Home

HP INTEGRITY RX3600 User's Manual

1. mA En a O Core I O Board Slot TPM System Battery I O VRM Replacing the System Battery 1 A A Insert the replacement battery into the socket on the I O board assembly CAUTION You must remove the I O board assembly to service the system battery The removal and replacement of the I O board assembly occurs through the rear of the rack for rack installed servers Carefully follow the removal and replacement procedures you must perform several tasks with the server extended out the front of the rack See Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 225 for complete instructions NOTE The positive terminal of the battery is designated by the sign Install the battery with the sign facing up Replace the I O board assembly See Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 228 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On
2. 3 Start the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation Powering Off the Server Power off the server using the following methods e jiLO2 MP PC command e Power button Powering Off the Server Using the LO 2 MP To power off the server using the iLO 2 MP follow these steps 1 Gracefully shut down the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation Initiate a console session and access the MP Main Menu Enter CM to enable command mode Use the remote power control command with the graceful shutdown option Enter OFF to power off the server and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action NP IN EA IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system however ac voltage for standby power is still present in the server 6 Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server Powering Off the Server Manually To manually power off the server follow these steps e Amomentary push on the power button will gracefully shut down the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation we IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system however ac voltage for standby power is still present in the ser
3. AT CTO Screw Locatio T E A S o k crew Locatior Behind Pull TH JU Behind Pull Handle 1 Pull 7 3 3 Handle a Handle Inserting the Server into the Rack To insert the server into the rack follow these steps 1 2 Press the rail clips on both sides of the server inward Push the server into the rack until it stops Accessing a Pedestal Installed Server Follow these steps to access the internal components in a pedestal installed server 1 Aa p N Remove the pedestal kit feet by pulling them outward Lay the server horizontally onto its right side Unscrew the thumb screws in the rear of the server Pull back on the side component using the finger grips Once the pedestal side has moved about 1 4 inch the side can be removed 180 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 2 Server in Pedestal Kit Finger Grip Pedestal Kit Feet Removing and Replacing the Top Cover Access to internal components require moving the locked top server cover in both standalone and pedestal installed environments A NOTE When the top cover is open or removed the chassis fan units increase to high speed to assist cooling When the top cover is replaced at the end of the operation the chassis fans return to normal speed R
4. Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 3 Slot 7 Core I O Board Slot Slot 4 E Slot8 PCI PCI X PCle Card Dividers PCI PCI X PCle Configurations The section contains the following topics e PCI PCI X IOBP page 63 e PCI PCI X PCle IOBP page 63 e Shared Slots page 63 62 Installing the System PCI PCI X IOBP The following describes configuration requirements for slots one through ten on the PCI PCI X T O backplane e PCI X slots 1 and 2 are reserved for use by the core I O cards SAS core I O card in slot 1 and Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card in slot 2 Slots 1 and 2 are not hot pluggable Install only supported PCI X SAS and LAN core I O cards in slots 1 and 2 Depending upon the number and type of SAS core I O cards installed on the system the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card may be installed in slot 10 e Slots 3 and 4 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 3 and 4 is PCI X 266 MHz e Slots 5 and 6 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 5 and 6 is PCI X 133 MHz e Slots 7 and 8 are shared slots and slots 9 and 10 are shared slots These four slots are limited by bus mode or frequency related incompatibilities See Shared Slots page 63 for more information PCI PCI X PCle IOBP The following describes configuration
5. Physical Slot Physical Rope OLARD Logical ACPI Path XX 0 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 10 Slow core iLO 2 MP at 33MHz Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 2 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 0 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 2 1 8 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 1 0 Fast core storage at 66 MHz 2 8 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 2 0 Fast core LAN at 66 MHz Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 2 1 3 12 13 14 amp 15 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 700 Pci 1 0 Public single at 266 MHz 4 45 6 amp 7 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 300 Pci 1 0 Public single at 266 MHz 5 10 amp 11 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 600 Pci 1 0 Public single at 133 MHz 6 2 amp 3 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 1 0 Public single at 133 MHz 7 9 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 1 0 Public shared at 66 MHz 8 9 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 2 0 Public shared at 66 MHz 9 1 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 1 0 Public shared at 66 MHz 10 1 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 2 0 Public shared at 66 MHz Table 5 26 PCI PCI X PCle Slot Rope ACPI Paths Physical Rope Physical Slot OLARD Logical ACPI Path XX 0 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 Slow core iLO 2 MP at 33MHz XX 0 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 Core I O USB Common I O Backplane 1
6. UG DOMINO Core I O Board Slot TPM System Battery I O VRM Replacing the TPM To replace the TPM follow these steps 1 Insert the TPM a Align the TPM connector pinouts with the pins on the I O board socket ES NOTE The female connector on the TPM has one pinout plugged which aligns with a missing pin on the male connector on the I O board assembly b Push the TPM straight down into the socket until it is fully seated Figure 6 28 2 Replace the core I O board See Replacing the Core I O Board page 237 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 4 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 5 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 6 Set the TPM to the prior state if available or to a customer preference Example 6 1 is an example of using the secconfig command to enable the TPM as a customer preference a Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module 235 Example 6 1 Enabling the TPM 1 Access the EFI Shell 2 Enterinfo sec to display the server security settings on the screen The TPM is disabled by default 3 Enter secconfig to display a list of configurable security settings 4 Enter secconfig tpm on to enable the TPM 7 Reset the server Boot the operating system See Booting and Shutting
7. System Specifications Condition Overall System Typical Heat Weight Dimensions Release WXDXH Airflow Airflow Maximun at Voltage Voltage Nominal 35 C 100 127 200 240 V ac V ac Server Rack Pedesid Rack Pedestal Description Watts Watts CFM m hr CFM m hr 10 9 kg 24 lbs 69 6 5 Minimum 432 669 173 29 28 371 44 9 27 a a Configuration kg N aes Max M ion 1300 75 90 45 36 Ibs 1732 id Ibs kg 100 ee Maximum 1095 1056 173 294 218 371 Ibs 51 7 T o Configurati kg 12 cm pl eii di cm 20 2 in Typical 685 669 173 294 218 371 Configuration ASHRAE Minimum _ 1x Itanium 1 8G 24M CPU 4x 4GB Class 1 Configuration DDRII DIMM memory 0x SAS Hard Drives 0x PCI PCI X PCle added to Air Flow Diagram Cooling Scheme F R ace a A Maximum 2x 1 8G 24M CPUs 24x 4GB DDRII Configuration DIMM memory 8x SAS Hard Drives 8x PCI PCI X PCle added to public I O cards Front to Rear F R Typical Half loaded configuration 1x Itanium Configuration 1 8G 24M CPUs 12x 4GB DDRII DIMM memory 4x SAS Hard Drives 4x PCI PCI X PCle added to public I O cards 1 Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 10C 300 m above 900 m 2 m hr 1 7 x CFM Physical and Environmental Specifications 51 52 3 Installing the System This chapter addresses the following topics Safety Information page 53 Installatio
8. Disk Backplane Common Display Panel Board FP LEDs FP Switches Diagnostic LEDs Unified Core O Board 156 Troubleshooting Figure 5 4 rx3600 with PCI PCI X PCle I O System Block Diagram PCI X 66 Bridge 12 DIMM ta e Memory s Extender PCIEX 133 Bridge PCHE X8 Bridge 12 DIMM Memory DMD Extender PDH LPC PCFE X8 Bridge Disk Backplane Common Display Panel Board FP LEDs FP Switches Diagnostic LEDs FSE Unified Core O Board There are two types of CRUs in the rx3600 server externally accessible CRUs eCRUs and internally accessible CRUs iCRUs The following are the eCRUs in the rx3600 server e Bulk power supply 1 and pt e Console device e Power cords e Modems UPS e DVD and 2 5 HDDs SAS or SATA The following are the iCRUs in the rx3600 server e I O board assembly e Core I O board e Core LAN HBA e SAS Disk HBA e CPU board and CPUs e Disk BP board 1 and 2 e Memory extender and DIMMs 1 CRUs identified by the Diagnostic Panel LED when they are faulty or have failed Supported Configurations 157 e FP and Diagnostic LED board e HBAs optional e HOVRM e Cooling Fans 1 3 e Midplane board e Interconnect board System Build Up Troubleshooting Procedure If the system powers on and remains powered on but does not enter into or pass POST or does not boot to the EFI menu follow these steps Remove the ac power cord from
9. we IMPORTANT Do not discard the diagnostic panel light guide You must install it onto the replacement display board Figure 6 30 Display Board Location Front Of Chassis Knurled Thumbscrew USB Connector Diagnostic Panel Light Guide Bezel Screws 244 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 31 Display Board IM CT Figure 6 32 Display Board Removal and Replacement Front of Chassis L Shaped Keyway NN L Shaped Keyway Connector plugs Into interconnect Boar Replacing the Display Board To replace the display board follow these steps Removing and Replacing the Display Board 245 ES NOTE Use the guide pins on the chassis and the L shaped keyways on the display board to help you with the display board replacement procedures 1 A 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Remove the diagnostic panel light guide protective cover from the replacement display board Figure 6 30 CAUTION Do not use the USB connector as a handle to replace the display board Failure to observe this warning can result in damage to server components Place the display board onto the guide pins Use the diagnostic panel light guide as a handle to push the board toward the front of the chassis until it fully seats against the front of the chassis Figure 6 30 Remove the top two screws from the right side of the bezel Pull the bezel out from the chassis approximately one half inc
10. 00 00 03 00 Ox8086 0x1229 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 00 20 o1 00 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 0 00 20 o1 01 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 1 00 20 02 00 0x14E4 0x1645 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 00 40 o1 00 0x1000 0x0021 02 Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 00 40 o1 01 0x1000 0x0021 02 Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 1 00 80 o1 00 0x14E4 0x1645 01 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 1 0 00 EO o1 00 0x103C 0x1290 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 0 00 EO o1 01 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci ri 00 EO 02 OO 0x1002 0x5159 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 2 0 In this example a single SCSI interface is listed For each channel of the SCSI board note certain information For example look at the information for the SCSI interface For each channel of this SCSI interface note the following information e Bus Identifies the bus the device is on This is the same for both channels In this example the bus number is 20 e Dev The ID the device is assigned on the bus This is the same for both channels In this example the SCSI interface is device 01 e Fnc Ht Identifies the channel of the device 00 for channel A 01 for channel B and so on In this example because the SCSI interface has two channels one channel is 00 and the other is 01 e Vendor ID Shows the device vendor ID This is the same for both channels For all SCSI interfaces the ID is 0x1000 e Device ID Shows the device ID This is the same
11. Controls Ports and LEDs 45 46 2 System Specifications This chapter provides the system specifications for the HP Integrity rx3600 server This chapter addresses the following topics e Server Specifications page 47 e Dimensions and Values page 48 e Grounding page 48 e Electrical Specifications page 48 e Physical and Environmental Specifications page 49 Server Specifications Table 2 1 lists the server specifications for the HP Integrity rx3600 Table 2 1 Server Specifications Component Specification rx3600 with PCI PCI X OBP rx3600 with PCI PCI X PCle lIOBP Processors One or two Itanium dual core processors e 1 4 GHz 12 MB cache e 1 6 GHz 18 MB cache e 1 42 GHz 12 MB cache e 1 67 GHz 24 MB cache Memory 8 DIMM memory carrier or 24 DIMM memory carrier Supported DDR2 DIMM sizes e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB Disk drives One to eight hot pluggable SAS hard drives PCI slots Two private PCI X 66 MHz slots Eight public PCI X slots Eight Public slots e Four PCI X slots 66 MHz e Two PCI X slots 66 MHz e Two PCI X slots 133 MHz e Two PCI X slots 133 MHz e Two PCI X2 slots 266 MHz e Four PCle x8 SAS core I O Eight port SAS core I O card PCI X e Eight port SAS core I O card PCI X Options e Eight port SAS core I O card with RAID e Eight port SAS core I O card with RAID PCI X PCI X e Eight port SAS core I O card with RAID P
12. Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive 60 A NOTE The replacement disk drive must have the same product number as the disk drive that you replace To install a hot pluggable disk drive follow these steps 1 Use Figure 3 5 to determine the next available disk drive installation slot 2 Remove the disk drive filler if required See Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler page 60 Installing the System ES NOTE Save the disk drive filler for future use For cooling purposes always place disk drive fillers in slots that do not contain a disk drive 3 Insert the hot pluggable disk drive into the slot guides and slide the drive into the slot until it seats into the socket on the disk backplane 4 Close the drive ejector handle by pushing it inward until it clicks into place Figure 3 4 Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Release Tab Extraction Handle Rotation Extraction Handle Installing Additional Components 61 Installing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Figure 3 6 shows the PCI PCI X PCle slot identification and card divider locations A NOTE Slots one through eight are full length slots nine and ten are short length Figure 3 6 PCI PCI X Slot Identification and Card Divider Locations Pa SM A
13. Four of the server PCI PCI X slots are not shared Two of the nonshared slots are 133 MHz PCI PCI X and two of the slots are 266 MHz PCI PCI X Shared slots have many speed and mode change restrictions during hot plug add or remove operations Table 1 1 PCI PCI X I O Rope Groups Slot Rope Numbers PCI Bus Bits Speed Function Hot Swap OL 1 2 8 1 64 66 MHz Core I O Private N 3 12 13 14 15 2 64 266 MHz __ PCI X 2 0 DDR Public Y Quad Bandwidth 4 4 5 6 7 Quad 3 64 266 MHz __ PCI X 2 0 DDR Public Y Bandwidth 5 10 11 Dual 4 64 133 MHz High Speed PCI X Public Y Bandwidth Server Subsystems 27 Table 1 1 PCI PCI X I O Rope Groups continued Slot Rope Numbers PCIBus Bits Speed Function A Swap 6 2 3 Dual 5 64 133 MHz High Speed PCI X Public Y Bandwidth 7 8 9 6 64 66 MHz General PCI X Public 9 10 1 7 64 66 MHz General PCI X Public 0 0 32 33 MHz UCIO Private N PCI PCI X PCle IOBP On the 10 slot PCI PCI X PCle IOBP there are a total of eight Public slots four PCI X mode 1 and four PCIe two Private Fast core slots PCI PCI X mode 1 64 bit 66 MHz and one Private Slow core UCIO slot PCI 32 bit 33 MHz The eight Public slots are further divided into three speed bandwidth configurations e Two PDHP which operate at 64 bit 66 MHz PCI X e Two PSHP operating at 64 bit 133 MHz PCI X e Four PCIe 8 lane x8
14. Removing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit To remove a hot swappable chassis fan unit follow these steps 1 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 2 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 3 Insert thumb and forefinger into the openings on the top of the fan and squeeze until the fan releases from the socket 184 Removing and Replacing Server Components 4 Pull the fan straight up and out of the chassis A CAUTION To prevent server components from overheating replace the fan within 20 seconds Failure to observe this caution results in the server automatically shutting down to prevent an overtemperature condition Figure 6 5 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit Fan Unit 1 Fan Unit 2 Fan Unit 3 Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit CAUTION To prevent server components from overheating replace the fan within 20 seconds Failure to observe this caution results in the server automatically shutting down to prevent an overtemperature condition EL NOTE The fan unit is keyed to fit into the fan housing in the correct orientation only To replace a hot swappable chassis fan unit follow these steps 1 Push the fan unit firmly into the fan housing until it is flush with the top of the chassis ES NOTE It can take up to ten seconds after installation for the new
15. Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines Use the following rules and guidelines when installing memory e Install DIMMs in pairs for the 8 DIMM memory carrier and quads in the 24 DIMM memory carrier e Ensure that all DIMMs within a pair or quad are identical e Install pairs or quads in order of capacity from largest to smallest For example install all 2 GB quads before 1 GB or smaller quads and install all 1 GB quads before 512 MB quads e Side 0 must have equal or greater memory capacity than side 1 e Install DIMM pairs or quads based on the following rules 1 9 Load pairs or quads into the memory carrier in order starting with slot 0 and ending with slot 2 Install the first pair or quad in side 0 Install the second pair or quad in side 1 For the remaining pairs or quads a If both sides of the memory carrier contain the same capacity of memory install the next pairs or quad in side 0 b If side 0 contains more memory capacity even though it may have less DIMMs than side 1 install the next pair or quad in side 1 c If side 1 is full install the remaining pairs or quads in side 0 Table 3 6 shows several examples of proper memory carrier loading order 70 Installing the System EL NOTE The number in parenthesis indicates the order in which the quads are loaded Table 3 6 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Loading Examples Quad Number Quad
16. page 183 NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the processor board Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 Press the button located on top of the bezel and directly in front of the memory carrier assembly to release the processor board access door Figure 6 19 CAUTION The processor board access door opens to approximately a 30 degree angle Do not force the door to open to a greater angle Failure to observe this warning results in damage to server components Use the processor board assembly access door as a handle and gently slide the assembly out of the chassis approximately six inches Grasp the handholds on the assembly carrier tray with both hands and carefully slide the assembly out of the chassis Figure 6 19 Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly 217 Figure 6 19 Removing the Processor Board Assembly Processor Board Assembly Access Door Release Button Processor Board Assembly Carrier Tray Grasp Here Processor Board Assembly Access Door Processor Board Assembly Carrier tray Grasp Here Front Chassis View Replacing the Processor Board Assembly To replace the processor board assembly follow these steps 1 Align the edges of the processor board assembly wi
17. Available AVL The hard disk drive may or may not be ready and it is not suitable for inclusion in an array or hot spare pool for example it is not spun up its block size is incorrect or its media is removable Failed FLD Drive was part of a logical drive or was a hot spare drive and it failed It has been taken offline Standby SBY This status is used to tag all non hard disk devices FORMAT The FORMAT command performs a low level format of a disk drive This operation can only be performed on a hard disk drive The drive cannot be an IR volume or a hot spare drive Syntax cfggen lt controller gt format lt Encl Bay gt noprompt Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 lt Encl Bay gt Enclosure number and Bay number that identifying the disk drive that will be formatted noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts A CAUTION Performing a low level format on a hard disk drive results in the destruction of all data stored on that disk drive The operation cannot and should not be interrupted doing so may result in irreparable damage to the hard disk drive Operation Unless you include lt no prompt gt on the command line warning messages display You are required to properly answer a series of prompts or the command aborts The answers are case sensitive and must be entered in upper case This command will not complete and return to a shell prompt until the format
18. page 253 Required Service Tools Service of this server requires one or more of the following tools e Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit P N 9300 1155 e Processor install tool attached to the processor board assembly e 1 4 inch flat blade screwdriver e ACX 15 Torx screwdriver e ACX 10 Torx screwdriver Required Service Tools 177 Safety Information Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage removing and replacing server components Voltages can be present within the server Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components to prevent injury and to prevent damage to the server e When removing or installing any server component follow the instructions provided in this guide e If installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component when power is applied fans are running reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating e If installing a hot pluggable component complete the required software intervention prior to removing the component e If installing an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot s
19. page 269 e Installing the HP Smart Array P600 page 270 e Installing the HP Smart Array P400 page 271 e Installing the HP Smart Array P800 page 275 Installing the HP Eight Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter On HP Integrity rx3600 and rx6600 servers the HP Eight Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter is supported by HP UX and OpenVMS operating systems It should be installed in slot 1 if one card is to be installed and slot 2 if slot 1 is already occupied The installation procedure involves the following steps e Preparing the server e Installing the adapter hardware e Connecting the Adapter to Other Devices Completing the adapter installation procedure including updating the firmware and installing drivers For more information including configuring and troubleshooting refer to the HP 8 Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter SAS Controller Users Guide which can be found in the I O Cards and Networking Software collection under SAS Host Bus Adapters at http www docs hp com Procedure B 2 Preparing the Server To prepare the server for add or replacement use the following steps Perform a normal system shutdown Power down the server Power down all peripheral devices attached to the server Unplug the ac power cord from the outlet and then unplug it from the server Disconnect all peripheral devices attached to the server Dia Gol redie B 3 Installing the Adapter Hardware 1 Remove or o
20. Although SCSI is a proven technology its parallel data communication model restricts it from providing the speed and scalability required for modern data transfer and storage In a parallel data communication environment multiple devices share one bus all data travels over the same cable and through the same port SAS provides serial or point to point data transfer A point to point architecture means that each device has its own private bus cable and port This architecture improves the reliability and availability of data and greatly enhances data transfer rates Current data transfer rates are 3 Gb s Additional features of the SAS technology include Full duplex capability all data reads and writes occur simultaneously Automatic device discovery and configuration each device is assigned a unique SAS address 246 Removing and Replacing Server Components Thin cables and small connectors assists with cooling and ease cable management issues Increased scalability expanders enable support for thousands of SAS devices The SAS backplane board attaches to an interconnect board that functions as a link between the midplane board and the SAS backplane board A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even
21. Button And LED LEDs System LAN VGA MP MP LAN Ports And LEDs tee pa Be Reset Port Anc Optional Button LEDs iLO 2 MP The server contains an iLO 2 MP on the core I O board that enables local and remote management of the server The iLO 2 MP can function using standby power and is active when ac power is present and the front panel power switch is off The iLO 2 MP is also active when ac power is present and the front power switch is on Figure 1 14 shows the controls ports and LEDs on the core I O board Controls Ports and LEDs 41 42 EL NOTE board The Core I O Board figure is oriented vertically to match the orientation of the core I O Figure 1 14 Core I O Board Controls Ports and LEDs e Q a 9 vi c 3 O iLO 2 MP RS 232 Serial Port DB 9F to DB 9F cable Connected to emulation terminal device PC laptop or ASCII terminal USB 2 0 Ports any USB device BMC Heartbeat MP Heartbeat iLO 2 MP Reset Button The iLO 2 MP reset button enables you to reset the iLO 2 MP and optionally reset the user specific values to factory default values To soft reset the iLO 2 MP press the button momentarily then release it To restore the factory default settings and passwords the button must be pressed and Overview USB MP LAN Auxilialy IO1O1 VGA Port Link and Activity LED No iLO 2 MP access EFI Standby Power only MP Self Test General Use Serial Port Printers etc 10 B
22. EFI Device Path YO Core viewed from rear of chassis Right most special slot private 0 0 1 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1o 0 0 2 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 20 Rightmost special slot private 1 0 0 4 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4o Rightmost special slot private The Core I O LAN may be in slot 10 depending upon the configuration PCI PCI X PCle IOBP The following describes configuration requirements for slots one through ten on the PCI PCI X PCle I O backplane we IMPORTANT PCI X slots 1 and 2 are reserved for use by the core I O cards PCI X SAS core I O cards and the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card Slots 1 and 2 are not hot pluggable Install only supported PCI X SAS and LAN core I O cards in slots 1 and 2 Depending upon the number and type of SAS core I O cards installed on the system the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card may be installed in slot 10 Slots 3 and 4 are swtiched PCle x8 PCle slots 3 and 4 are used for the PCle SAS Core I O cards but are public slots If the PCIe core I O is not installed these slots are available for other PCle I O cards Slots 5 and 6 are nonswitched PCle x8 Slots 7 and 8 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 7 and 8 is PCI X 133 MHz Slots 9 and 10 are shared slots These two slots are limited by bus mode or frequency related incompatibilities Slots 9 and 10 on the PCI PCI X PCle I O backplane have the same configu
23. ES NOTE The utility does not allow you to flash the firmware if the installed version is the same or higher than the version on the Smart Setup media 10 Use the tab key to scroll down into the Device section and highlight the device name 11 Press Enter to select the device this puts an X inside the box on the left side of the device name 12 Use the tab key to move to the OK selection and press Enter The firmware update begins and proceeds automatically to completion Configuring the Array provides two utilities for manually configuring an array on a Smart Array controller e ORCA a simple ROM based configuration utility e Array Configuration Utility ACU a versatile browser based utility that provides maximum control over configuration parameters 312 Core I O Card Utilities A NOTE To copy a particular array configuration to several other servers on the same network use the Array Configuration Replicator ACR or the scripting capability of ACU ACR is provided in the SmartStart Scripting Toolkit available on the HP Web site at http www hp com servers sstoolkit Whichever utility you use the following limitations apply e For the most efficient use of drive space do not mix drives of different capacities within the same array The configuration utility treats all physical drives in an array as if they have the same capacity as the smallest drive in the array The excess capacity of any lar
24. Off No No No No A NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server can automatically power on to the full power state Powering On the Server Power on the server to full power using the following methods e iLO2 MP PC command e Power button Powering On the Server Using the LO 2 MP A NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server can automatically power on to the full power state To power on the server using the iLO 2 MP follow these steps Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server Initiate a console session and access the MP Main Menu Enter CM to enable command mode Enter PC to use the remote power control command Enter ON to power on the server and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action Start the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation DUST 99 Nei Powering On the Server Manually A NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command z the server may automatically power on to the full power state To manually power on the server follow these steps 1 Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server 2 Press the power button to start the server 94 Installing the System Figure 3 21 rx3600 Power Button Power Button
25. Remove the core I O board See Removing the Core I O Board page 237 Locate the battery on the core I O board Figure 6 29 Insert a flat tool under the battery and carefully lift upward to pry the battery from the socket 238 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 29 Battery Location on the Core I O Board Core I O Board Battery Replacing the Core O Board Battery To replace the core I O board battery follow these steps 1 A ga Insert the replacement battery into the socket NOTE The positive terminal of the battery is designated by a sign Install the battery with the sign facing up Replace the core I O board See Replacing the Core I O Board page 237 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Restore the iLO 2 MP configuration settings using the server console For additional information about using the iLO 2 MP see the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Card The SAS core I O card connects to the SAS disk backplane and controls internal data storage operations for the server There are four types of SAS core I O cards supported on the server Hal
26. b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card 201 13 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Insert the PCI PCI X PCle card into the empty slot and use firm even pressure to seat the card in the slot CAUTION Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can fail after power is reapplied to the slot Connect all internal and external cables to the PCI PCI X PCle card Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card if it is full length Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the DVD Drive The DVD drive is located in the front of the server above the disk drives A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is con
27. e Platform authentication e Sensitive information protection e Data integrity e System privacy we IMPORTANT You must run the supported version of the HP UX operating system to utilize the TPM security component A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Enabling the TPM Use the following procedures to enable the TPM To enable the TPM follow these steps 1 Power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 2 Enable the TPM a Access the EFI Shell b Enterinfo sec to display the server security settings on the screen The TPM is disabled by default c Enter secconfig to display a list of configurable security settings d Enter secconfig tpm on to enable the TPM 3 Reset the server Boot the operating system See the operating system documentation for more information 5 Restore the former TPM settings to the new TPM See the HP UX operating system documentation for
28. lt proc gt HPMCoLPMCoTOCOASIC Display PIM information errdump cmc internal memory errdump init PIM EFI POSSE Commands This section describes the EFI POSSE commands developed for the server A NOTE EFI and Pre OS System Environment POSSE are similar EFI is an Intel specification POSSE is an HP implementation of EFI that aids HP support NOTE The output shown for these EFI commands are samples and might differ depending upon your server and its configuration help Provides information on the EFI Shell commands The help command also aids administrators familiar with the BCH menus to adjust to their equivalent functions in EFI Syntax help b lt category gt help b lt cmd gt help b bch lt bchmenu gt lt bchcmd gt Parameters b Enable page breaking category Category of commands to view help on commands cmd Shell command name on which to provide verbose information bch Display the list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI bchmenu BCH menu name taken from the top level of the BCH menu bchemd BCH command on which to display information Operation If you issue the help command with no parameters a list of shell command categories displays To list all of the commands within a category enter help lt category gt If help is issued with the b option any output longer than one page pauses after each page displays If a shell command name is used as a parameter verbose help displays for that comm
29. page 261 e Installing Core I O Cards page 268 e Processor Upgrades page 279 I O Backplane Upgrade I O Backplane Upgrade Overview The HP Integrity rx3600 Server and rx6600 Server may be upgraded from the 10 slot PCI PCI X I O backplane HPPN AB463 60001 to the 10 slot PCI PCI X PCle I O backplane HPPN AB463 60027 Table B 1 provides a comparison of the two backplanes for planning movement of I O cards Core I O cards must be placed in appropriate slots The HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBAs or HP Smart Array P600 PCI X cards must be installed in slots 1 and 2 The HP Smart Array P400 and HP Smart Array P800 PCle cards must be installed in slots 3 and 4 The Core LAN card is placed in slot 2 unless that slot is occupied by a SAS or Smart Array card In such instances the Core LAN is placed in slot 10 Table B 1 Slot Speed Comparison and Planning Table PCI PCI X 1 O PCI PCI X PCle I O Upgraded I O Slot Number Backplane Installed I O Card Backplane Configuration 1 Core I O Only PCI X Core I O Only PCI X 66 MHz 66 MHz 2 Core I O Only PCI X Core I O Only PCI X 66 MHz 66 MHz 3 PCI X 266 MHz PCIe x8 4 PCI X 266 MHz PCIe x8 5 PCI X 133 MHz PCle x8 6 PCI X 133 MHz PCIe x8 7 PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 133 MHz 8 PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 133 MHz 9 PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 66 MHz 10 PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 66 MHz Slots 1 and 2 are shared slots on both backplanes Slots 3 and 4 are switched s
30. 271 connecting to devices 271 controller board installation 270 overview 270 preparation 270 updating firmware 271 HP Smart Array P800 Linux installation 277 279 completing installation 279 connecting to devices 278 controller board installation 278 preparation 277 overview 275 Windows installation 275 277 completing installation 276 connecting to devices 276 controller board installation 276 preparing the server 275 HP UX device paths PCI PCI X PCle 196 197 1 O backplane upgrade checklist 263 T O backplane see I O board assembly T O backplane upgrade overview 261 tools required 262 T O board see I O board assembly T O board assembly removing 225 replacing 228 T O card see PCI PCI X PCle cards T O cards verifying 267 T O paths 196 197 T O subsystem 26 see also core I O board see also I O board assembly block diagram 26 introduction 25 29 I O VRM removing 232 replacing 233 iLO 2 MP controls ports and LEDs 41 43 functional overview 41 LAN LEDs 43 LAN link speed LEDs 43 LAN link status LEDs 43 logging in 89 main menu 89 PC command 94 95 reset button 42 status LEDs 43 indicators LED 171 info adapter path 338 adapter slot number 338 info command adapter path 338 adapter slot number 338 init button function 37 integrated lights out 2 management processor see iLO 2 MP interconnect board removing 250 replacing 252 intermittent server problems
31. 343 boot option add 344 change boot order 345 delete 345 maintenance menu 343 manage bootnext setting 345 set auto boot timeout 346 bulk power supplies BPS 79 C cable determine physical access method 83 LAN 80 power 80 SAS cable part numbers 110 cable kit part numbers 269 cell board 79 cfggen utility 106 CM command 94 95 cold swappable components 179 command mode see CM component classification 178 components hot pluggable 179 configurable components EFI capable 340 configuring iLO 2 MP using ARP ping 86 using DHCP and DNS 85 using RS 232 serial port 88 console problems 120 console set up checklist 82 determining connection method 83 determining LAN configuration method 85 flowchart 82 overview 81 controller handle 340 controls front panel locations 36 rear panel locations 41 rear panel functions 41 cooling 31 see also fans Core I O Board battery removal 238 battery replacement 239 functionality 236 removing 237 replacing 237 Core I O board ports 43 cover memory carrier assembly removing and replacing 57 top removing 56 181 replacing 57 182 cover memory carrier assembly removing 183 replacing 183 cover top removing 56 181 replacing 57 182 thermal considerations 181 CPU see processor CRU list see parts list 351 D damaged equipment returning 55 default password 89 user accounts 89 device paths PCI PCI X PCle 196 197 DHCP
32. Additional information about troubleshooting is available in the HP Integrity rx3600 User Service Guide included on the CD provided with the server Offline troubleshooting programs are available on the resource CD that is shipped with the HP server To troubleshoot the server you must be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment ODE which runs in the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI Descriptions and user information about offline troubleshooting tools are available at http w docs hp com The offline tools are available for downloading at http w software hp com Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held in and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the system Table 3 18 describes what happens when the server is at EFI and you press the power button Table 3 18 Server Power Button Functions When Server is On Action Reaction Push power button and hold System power turns off immediately at EFI Shell hard power off 1 3 seconds System powers off when OS is running software controlled power off Push power button and hold 5 System power turns off immediately with EFI or OS running hard power off seconds or longer If the server is off and power is not connected to server power supplies pressing the pow
33. D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 D 12 D 13 D 14 D 15 D 16 D 17 D 18 D 19 D 20 D 21 D 22 D 23 D 24 Enabling the Tricio 236 help commandi sree i a E ea e A E hai Ee 321 help DSM COMMANG ernste e e Eea N a a ER Aid dz T i 321 help config ration commanda cavadsacvacecshedeces yea ecesksvcvecd Java estessbasesetoudevasbsareateisaanvaisecciterees 321 help cpuconfig OM ci iia 322 help LOG OME TG COMME A a RE edo 322 boottest command raid E 324 boottest early cpu off dear 324 epuc nfig command eeoa cena tE E AAA a eee 325 EPUCONELO 12 COMMAN CO EE E ed chests Noa We nada eae avai 325 CONCONE rg command aerea ioe E a AE E Persea dela deine he dads E na meats 325 conconfig 2 primary COMMANG pse ana r EEE A E E a a 326 GONGONE ig 3 Of COMMMANG ee a A E E a R E S ERER 326 c nconfig 3 on command eer e eaa eA A a EE nent ias 326 ioconfig COMME a a a Ed a a a ts 327 info ald commandi iire E a a aE iE E E S a E E e 329 info CPUsCOMIMANG cinc dd Ad E AA ii 332 info MEM COM a a a R E A a ee aad 332 inro LO COMME tia 333 INES DOSE Command easa e esc ayecuechdabsnadsayevaetdta oa hea co yavneuadabenas E cele vaveevadas asi 334 Vanaderes Ss lt COMMAN A A ev ends Thea A ee og td 334 monarch COMME tt 335 POE COMM ANG A a ees a ae AT 336 pat Gear commanderisccsaiestetela titres aekiana a 336 Sy EMOS COMME ees 337 19 20 About This Document This document describes how to troubleshoot and diagnose server problems
34. EFI redhat elilo at the EFI Shell command prompt Allow the ELILO EFI loader to proceed with booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating System You can boot the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 operating system on HP Integrity servers using either of these methods Selecting a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu page 137 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell page 137 Selecting a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server entry from the EFl Boot Manager menu 1 2 3 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu Select its entry from the list of boot options Choose a Linux entry from the boot options list to boot the operating system using ELILO EFI loader and the elilo conf file Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell 1 From the system console select EFI Shell from the EFI Boot Manager menu to access the EFI Shell Access the EFI System Partition for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file systems s0 s1 and so on that are known and mapped To select a file system to
35. Figure 5 1 Front Panel LEDs Initialization Button External Health System Health OT ifi Unit Identifier Internal Health System Power LED Button Methodology 141 A NOTE The Unit Identifier UID Locator LED has not been included in Table 5 2 because it is not used directly for troubleshooting rx3600 servers However indirectly it can provide system information for example when it is blue the BMC is working The INIT Button amomentary switch with pinhole access used to cause a system INIT or Transfer of Control TOC is not discussed in the following tables either It is similar to a system reset preserving the entire memory image so that you can obtain a crash dump and receive OS error information This button can be used to recover a hung system and to obtain information useful for debugging it is less harsh than a power reset NOTE for example FLASHING AMBER In Table 5 2 LED states indicating error conditions are provided in bold italic uppercase Table 5 2 lists the front panel LED states Table 5 2 Front Panel LED States System Health Internal Health External Health System Power Basic Entry Class Troubleshooting Table Step Number Off Off Off Off 1 in Table 5 3 Off Off Off Steady amber 2a in Table 5 3 FLASHING AMBER OR Steady FLASHING Steady green 2b 2c in Table 5 3 RED green off AMBER Off FLASHING Steady green Steady green 8b in Table 5
36. HOTSPARE DELETE lt Encl Bay gt Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 DELETE Specifies that the hot spare is to be deleted Omit the DELETE keyword to specify hot spare creation lt Encl gt lt Bay gt Enclosure number and Bay number that identifying the disk drive that will become the hot spare Operation The number of disk drives in an IM array plus the hot spare disk cannot exceed three You can create only one hot spare disk You must make sure the capacity of the hot spare disk is greater 108 Installing the System than or equal to the capacity of the smallest disk in the logical drive An easy way to verify this is to use the DISPLAY command A CAUTION See Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks page 107 Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers The following information is provided to assist you in configuring the Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 controllers during installation Quick Installation Procedure To install the controller follow these steps 1 Power off the server 2 Install additional physical drives if necessary see Connecting External Storage page 109 The number of drives in the server determines the RAID level that is auto configured when the server is powered on 3 Power on the server 4 Update the controller firmware see SAUPDATE Utility page 110 When the firmware update process is complete the server
37. HP strongly recommends you modify the default settings during ale the initial login session See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 89 Following is the MP Main Menu iLO MP MAIN MENU CO Console VFP Virtual Front Panel CM Command Menu CL Console Logs SL Show Event Logs SMCLP Server Management Command Line Protocol HE Main Menu Help X Exit Connection See the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide for information on the iLO 2 MP menus and commands When logging in using the local or remote RS 232 serial ports the login prompt may not display if another user is logged in through these ports Use Ctrl B to access the MP Main Menu and the iLO 2 MP prompt MP gt Additional Setup This section provides additional information to setup the iLO 2 MP Modifying User Accounts and Default Password The iLO 2 MP comes preconfigured with default factory settings including a default user account and password The two default user accounts on initial login are e All Rights Administrator level user login Admin password Admin e Console Rights Operator level user login Oper password Oper Console Setup 89 Login and password are case sensitive s l Q TIP For security reasons HP strongly recommends you modify the default settings during the initial login session Make the following changes using any of the iLO 2 MP user interfaces
38. NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the processor board Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 Press the button located on top of the bezel and directly in front of the memory carrier assembly to release the processor board access door Figure 6 18 CAUTION The processor board access door opens to approximately a 30 degree angle Do not force the door to open to a greater angle Failure to observe this caution results in damage to server components Use the processor board assembly access door as a handle and gently slide the assembly out of the chassis approximately six inches Remove the six screws that attach the bezel to the chassis Figure 6 18 Tilt the bezel away from the chassis Figure 6 18 Remove the plastic server label located to the right of the front panel LEDs a Grasp the label and pull it out until it stops b Lift up on the notched retaining tab at the rear of the label until it clears the slot c Pull the label completely out of the chassis IMPORTANT You must reinstall the plastic server label into the replacement bezel Flip out the two pull handles located on both ends of the front bezel Figure 6 18 With pull handles open slide the bezel to the right to release it from the
39. See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information 2 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 3 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 4 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 5 Remove the core I O board See Removing the Core I O Board page 237 234 Removing and Replacing Server Components 6 Grasp the TPM by the edges and lift it out of the socket on the I O board Figure 6 28 A CAUTION Destroy the TPM after removing it from the server Follow local regulations to securely destroy the TPM Do not attempt to use the TPM in another server Figure 6 28 TPM Location on I O Board fo Mm a 0 HL EOI
40. Shell gt cpuconfig 2 off CPU will be deconfigured on next boot Shell gt cpuconfig PROCESSOR INFORMATION of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Slot CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F 00 B2 Active 1 1 1 GHz 3 MB None 1F 00 B2 Sched Deconf conconfig Use this command to configure the primary console and turn on other consoles for mirroring from the firmware Syntax conconfig index on off primary Parameters Index Specifies index of console to set as primary on Enables the specified console as a secondary console off Puts console into Not Configured NC state primary Sets the specified console as primary Notes e Primary console setting will take effect after reboot e Pin the status column indicates that the console is the primary e Sin the status column indicates that the console is the secondary e NC in the status column indicates that the console is not configured e Ifa disabled console is set to primary it will be enabled Example D 10 conconfig command To display current primary operating system console Shell gt conconfig CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index Status Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 EFI POSSE Commands 325 2 S Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 P VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example D 1 conconfig 2 primary command To change primary operating system console Shell gt conconfig 2 primary CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index St
41. This is also known as like for like replacement e Removing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Offline page 201 Describes the removal of a PCI PCI X PCle card after powering down the server e Installing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Offline page 201 Describes the installation of a PCI PCI X PCle card after powering down the server Figure 6 10 shows the PCI PCI X PCle slot identification and card divider locations A NOTE Slots one through eight are full length slots nine and ten are short length Figure 6 10 PCI PCI X PCle Slot Identification and Card Divider Locations Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card 193 Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 3 Slot 7 Core I O Board Slot Slot 4 Slot 8 PCI PCI X PCle Card Dividers PCI PCI X PCle Configurations This section contains the following topics e PCI PCI X IOBP page 194 e PCI PCI X PCle IOBP page 196 e Shared Slots page 197 PCI PCI X IOBP The following describes configuration requirements for slots 1 through 10 on the PCI PCI X I O backplane PCI PCI X Card Path Logging PCI X slots 1 and 2 are reserved for use by the
42. To modify default account configuration settings follow these steps 1 Login as the administrator You must log in as the administrator in order to modify default user configuration settings 2 To modify default passwords a Access the MP Main Menu b Enter CM at the MP gt prompt c Enter UC at the MP CM gt prompt and follow the prompts to modify default passwords 3 To setup user accounts a Access the MP Main Menu b Enter CM at the MP gt prompt c Enter UC at the MP CM gt prompt and follow the prompts to modify user accounts Setting Up Security For greater security and reliability HP generally recommends that iLO 2 MP management traffic be on a separate dedicated management network and that only administrators be granted access to that network This not only improves performance by reducing traffic load across the main network it also acts as the first line of defense against security attacks A separate network enables administrators to physically control which workstations are connected to the network HP also strongly recommends you modify the default settings during the initial logon session and determine the security access required and what user accounts and privileges are needed Create local accounts or use directory services to control user access See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 89 Security Access Settings Determine the security access required and what user accounts and privileges
43. You can also accomplish this step by using the efi vms vms_bcfg efi and efi vms vms_show efi utilities which are available on the EFI System Partition for HP OpenVMS Both vms_bcfg and vms_ show are unique utilities for OpenVMS 164 The vms_bcfg utility differs from the bcf g EFI command in that vms_bcfg enables you to specify boot devices using VMS style device names Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the MP Main Menu Booting HP Open VMS To boot HP OpenVMS on an entry class HP Integrity server use one of the following procedures Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Boot Manager page 130 Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Shell page 130 Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the system on which you want to boot HP OpenVMS a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager At the EFI Boot Manager menu select an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to use when booting the dev
44. and remove and replace server components for the HP Integrity rx3600 Regulatory Model Number RSVLA 0404 The document printing date and part number indicate the document s current edition The printing date will change when a new edition is printed Minor changes may be made at reprint without changing the printing date The document part number will change when extensive changes are made Document updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes To ensure that you receive the updated or new editions you should subscribe to the appropriate product support service See your HP sales representative for details The latest version of this document can be found online at http www docs hp com Intended Audience This document is intended to provide technical product and support information for authorized service providers customer system administrators and HP support personnel New and Changed Information in This Edition This document has been updated to include new processor information Publishing History Table 1 lists the publishing history details for this document Table 1 Publishing History Details Document Manufacturing Part Number Publication Date AB463 9003A September 2006 AB463 9003B February 2007 AB463 9003C November 2007 Document Organization The AP Integrity rx3600 User Service Guide is divided into several chapters each chapter contains information about se
45. b Guide the cable connector down through the opening in the fan housing c Remove the cable From the front of the server use a Torx 15 driver to remove the five Torx screws attaching the midplane bracket assembly to the chassis Grasp the top edge of the midplane board sheet metal attachment and lift straight back to release it from the guide pins on the chassis Pull straight out and up to remove the midplane board from the chassis 254 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 37 Midplane Board Replacing the Midplane Board To replace the midplane board follow these steps 1 2 3 DI y Place the midplane board onto the guide pins on the chassis wall Push straight down until the board seats onto the locking studs Use a Torx 15 driver to replace and tighten the five Torx screws attaching the midplane bracket assembly to the chassis Replace the fan cables into the fan 1 and fan 2 housing units a Guide the cable connector up through the opening in the fan housing b Push the cable connector toward the front of the chassis until the connector tabs seat into place Replace the power supplies See Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply page 187 Replace the I O board assembly See Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 228 Replace the interconnect board See Replacing the Interconnect Board page 252 Replace the SAS backplane board See Replacing the SAS Backplane Board
46. c Ensure that the extraction levers are in the fully closed position Figure 3 11 Inserting a DIMM into the Memory Board Connector 72 Installing the System ES 8 Replace the memory carrier assembly side cover a Insert the side cover tabs into the retaining slots at the base of the assembly Figure 3 8 b Insert the tabs Figure 3 8 into the slots on both sides of the extraction handle release button until the side cover snaps into place NOTE To install DIMMs into slots on the other side of the memory carrier turn the carrier over to the opposite side side 0 or side 1 and repeat the installation procedure Replace the memory carrier assembly and latch the top cover release lever See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 66 Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly The processor board assembly holds one or two dual core Itanium processors and is located beneath the disk drives and memory carrier assembly in the bottom service bay The processor board is mounted onto a removable carrier tray which is retained in the service bay by a hinged access door A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure
47. drive including an online spare drive if one is required ES NOTE You cannot use ORCA to configure one spare drive to be shared among several arrays Only ACU enables you to configure shared spare drives 3 Press Enter to accept the settings 4 Press F8 to confirm the settings and save the new configuration After several seconds the Configuration Saved screen displays 5 Press Enter to continue You can now create another logical drive by repeating the previous steps ES NOTE Newly created logical drives are invisible to the operating system To make the new logical drives available for data storage format them using the instructions given in the operating system documentation ACU Utility For detailed information about using ACU see the HP Array Configuration Utility User Guide at I O Cards and Networking Software at http docs hp com en netcom html Installation Troubleshooting This section provides basic server troubleshooting information It is designed to help you diagnose common issues that can occur during server installation This section addresses the following topics e Troubleshooting Methodology page 117 e Server Does Not Power On page 118 e Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button page 118 e EFI Menu is Not Available page 119 e Operating System Does Not Boot page 119 e Operating System Boots with Problems page 119 e Intermitt
48. page 110 e EBSU Utility page 113 e ORCA Utility page 116 e ACU Utility page 117 Integrated RAID Use Integrated RAID IR where either storage capacity redundancy or both of a RAID configuration are required Two components of IR are e Integrated Mirror IM e Global Hot Spare Integrated Mirror The advantage of an IM is there is always a mirrored copy of the data An IM provides data protection for the system boot volume to safeguard critical information such as the operating system on servers and high performance workstations An IM supports two simultaneous mirrored volumes making an array providing fault tolerant protection for critical data Typically one of these volumes is the boot volume If a disk in an IM fails the hot swap capability enables the volume to be easily restored by replacing the failed disk The firmware then automatically re mirrors to the replaced disk Global Hot Spare Each SAS controller can have one global hot spare disk available to automatically replace a failed disk in the one or two IM volumes configured on the controller The hot spare makes the IM array more fault tolerant Up to two IM volumes are supported per SAS controller plus the hot spare HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller The following information is provided to assist you in configuring the 8 Internal Port SAS HBA controller during installation For additional information refer to the HP 8 Internal
49. 03 AD390 2100C AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB HP Integrity BL860c server blade AD394 2101C 1 42 GHz 12 MB AD395 2102C 1 6 GHz 6 MB greater than 01 01 AD396 2101C 1 67 GHz 18 MB 1 IMPORTANT HP Integrity rx3600 servers with 512MB DIMMs installed on an 8 DIMM Memory Carrier do not support this processor upgrade When upgrading to this processor on HP Integrity rx3600 servers with 512MB DIMMs installed in an 8 DIMM Memory Carrier the quads of 512MB DIMMs must each be replaced with a pair of 1 GB DIMMs This requirement applies only to HP Integrity rx3600 servers with 512MB DIMMs installed on an 8 DIMM Memory Carrier This requirement does not affect 512MB DIMMs together with the 24 DIMM Memory Carrier or any other size DIMMs together with the 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Upgrading Verses Adding On If your HP Integrity server already contains one or more of the processors listed in Table B 6 then follow the processor removal and replacement procedures see Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor page 218 to add another processor Updating the system firmware and OS is unnecessary when adding another processor If your HP Integrity server does not currently contain one or more of the processors listed in Table B 6 then a server upgrade is being performed and system firmware and OS updates may be necessary After any necessary system firmware and OS updates are performed follow the processor removal and replacement procedures se
50. 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 29 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 6 1 6 2 O Subsystems block Diarias e poza 26 PCI PCI X PCle I O Subsystem Block Diagram scicncinoinnsia dotan dotaci n nied nce ys tessa vis nd dde iaa 27 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Block Diapr ad eoni n cil conato betas dida da aan a ads 30 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Block Diagrains venom noiiconncne ia yonocidnn bncceoreieetcgunedetinyonnvddetentecdessiendsanvess 31 Cooling as oda 32 Power oulsy steny Block Dra A di 33 Diagnostic Panel narnia prre eaa ea a ee da dai 34 Front Panel Control Port and LED LocationsS cccoconooncncnncnnnnnoninnnncncnnnonnnnnnonnoncrononnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnos 36 Front Control Panel EDS ai a a a c ae ado bala 38 Hot Pl ggable Disk Dave LEDS des 38 Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Slot Availability LEDS vucooscnioiso tantsetistensets iodo reses 39 Diaenostic Panel Lab l and BEDS ji ciiis A vaca O Sua aah 40 Rear Panel Control Port and LED Locations cccccccccccessssescececececeeueeeececcceceseaueneseeceeeeeaeaaes 41 Core I O Board Controls Ports and LEDS cccccesesescececececeeeeseseeccceeecesauaeseececcseseauaaeneeeeeeeess 42 Removing and Replacing the Top COVE vrai anditn dnde tacna tn eat dt tk c i 57 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVeT ooooonoccnoccconncnonnnnononanacinncnnnannnnos 58 Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply vecino nccnsceiantscersn
51. 2c Front panel system health LED is flashing red and external health LED is flashing amber A fatal fault was detected and logged after server powered on system health is flashing red internal health is off steady green external health is flashing amber and power is steady green 1 Examine each power supplyLED If any power supply LED is not steady green replace that power supply See System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 for information The problem is fixed when the iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is off steady green external health is steady green power is steady green Methodology 143 Table 5 3 Basic Entry Class Troubleshooting continued Step 3a 3b Condition Both front panel system health LED and internal health LED are flashing amber Front panel system health LED is flashing red and internal health LED is flashing amber Action A warning or critical failure was detected and logged while booting or running system firmware system health is flashing amber internal health is flashing amber external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Check the Diagnostic LED panel to identify the failed or faulty internal FRU See Troubleshooting Tools page 147 for information The problem is fixed when a redundant internal FRU is replaced the iLO 2 MP logs are read and the fron
52. 389674 B21 361317 006 SAUPDATE Utility Use saupdate from the EFI Shell to update the firmware image on the HP Smart Array P600 Command line options are described below Follow one of these two procedures to run saupdate 1 If you are using saupdate from the Offline Diagnostic CD Download the firmware and copy it to the EFI partition The CD containing saupdate efi must be in the drive before booting the system to allow device mapping Boot the system to the EFI Shell prompt The CD drive should appear in the list of mapped devices as fs0 Change to this device by typing fs0 under EFI Shell prompt If the EFI utility and firmware image files are not located in the root directory move to the directory in which these files are located for example fs0 gt cd EFI HP TOOLS IO CARDS SmartArray Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers 307 z IMPORTANT Both saupdate efi and the firmware image file must be located in the same directory If they are not copy them both to the EFI partition Run the saupdate efi using the fs0 gt saupdate command If you are not using the Offline Diagnostic CD Download the SA EFI update utility saupdate efi and copy it to the EFI partition Download the firmware and copy it to the EFI partition Boot the system to the EFI Shell and change directories to the EFI partition Run the saupdate efi using the using the s0 gt saupdate efi command The following screen displa
53. 4 AMBER FLASHING AMBER OR FLASHING Steady green Steady green 3a 3b in Table 5 3 RED AMBER Off Steady green Steady green Steady green 4a 4b 4c and 4d in Table 5 3 Steady green off Steady green Steady green Steady green 8a in Table 5 4 Steady green Steady green Steady green Steady green 5 6 and 7 in Table 5 3 and Table 5 4 Table 5 3 lists basic entry class server troubleshooting conditions and actions 142 Troubleshooting Table 5 3 Basic Entry Class Troubleshooting Step 1 Condition Chassis appears dead no front panel LEDs are on and no fans are running Action Nothing is logged for this condition 1 For new server installations review the install procedures 2 Verify that the power cords are connected to both the power supplies and to the ac receptacles 3 Verify that acpower at the proper ac voltage levels is available to the receptacles 4 Check the front panel connector and the cable to the rest of the system 5 If power button integrated LED on front panel remains off reseat the power supplies replace the power cords and replace the bulk power supplies in that order See System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 for information The problem is fixed when the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady amber 2a 2b Server does not power on after front panel power button is depr
54. 64 bit PCI X card 8 T O 133 MHz 8th from left 0 5 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 1 64 bit PCI X card 9 T O with 66 MHz 9th from left 0 1 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 11 64 bit PCI X card shared with slot 10 10 T O with 66 MHz 10th from left 0 1 2 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 21 64 bit PCI X card nearest to core shared with slot I O board 9 Core Core I O iLO 2 Right most 0 0 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 I O MP special slot board Core Core I O USB Right most 0 0 2 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 21 I O special slot board Core Core I O VGA Right most 0 0 4 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 41 T O optional special slot board 1 The Core I O LAN may be in slot 10 depending upon the configuration Shared Slots Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions If one of the shared slots is occupied the card added to the second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot If the new card has a slower capability than the current bus configuration it fails If the new card has a faster capability than the current bus configuration it only runs at the slower bus mode and frequency of the current bus configuration The following are common configuration scenarios for cards that use shared slots These examples also apply to slots nine and ten because they are shared both use a common bus Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card 197 ES If there is a PCI
55. A processor failed SFW BOOT_CPU_FAILED Processors Type E0h 33d 26d A logical CPU thread failed SFW BOOT CPU EARLY TEST FAIL an early self test Processors Type 02h 25h 71h 80h No physical CPU cores are BMC Possible badly MISSING FRU_DEVICE present seated or failed processor Troubleshooting rx3600 Memory The memory controller logic in the zx2 chip supports three versions of memory expanders An eight DIMM memory carrier provides two memory boards that hold two or four memory DIMMs 160 Troubleshooting in both memory cells 0 and 1 A 24 DIMM memory carrier provides two 12 DIMM memory boards that hold four eight or twelve DIMMs in both memory cells 0 and 1 All three versions of memory expanders must have their memory DIMMs installed in groups of four known as a quad DIMM quads of different sizes can be installed in any physical rank on all versions of memory expanders but they must be grouped by their size Both the 24 and 48 slot memory expanders support physical memory ranks with four DIMMs while the common 8 slot memory expander s memory cells 0 and 1 each support physical ranks with two DIMMs In the 8 slot memory expander however the logical quad of four DIMMs includes ranks from both sides 0 and 1 running in lock step with each other Memory DIMM Load Order For a minimally loaded server four equal size memory DIMMs must be installed in slots 0A OB 0C and 0D on the same side of the 24 48 slot memory expande
56. Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci EFI POSSE Commands 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 333 Example D 19 info boot command Shell gt info boot BOOT INFORMATION Monarch CPU Current Preferred Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings 0 0 AutoBoot on Timeout is 7 SEC Boottest boottest Settings Default Variable OS is not speedy boot aware Selftest Setting early cpu Skip this test late _cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test lanaddress Displays the core I O MAC address Syntax lanaddress Parameters none Example D 20 lanaddress command Shell gt lanaddress LAN Address Information LAN Address Path Mac 00306E4C4F1A Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Mac 00306E4COFF2 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Mac 00306E4COFF2 monarch Displays or modifies the ID of the bootstrap processor The preferred monarch number is stored in NVM Syntax monarch lt cpu gt Parameters lt cpu gt specifies a cpu 334 Utilities Operation If specified with no parameters monarch displays the Monarch processor for the system Specifying a processor number alters the preferred Monarch processor None of these changes takes affect until after a reboot Example D 21 monarch command Shell gt monarch Current Preferred Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings 0 0 0 0 To view monarc
57. B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu b To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main Menu Booting HP UX From the EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment to boot HP UX on a device follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP UX a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 At the EFI Shell environment issue the map command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems you need are listed as s0 s1 and so on 3 Access the EFI System Partition fsX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The file system number can change each time it is mapped for example when the system boots or when the map r command is issued 4 When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing The full path for the loader is E
58. Board PCIx 66 PCIx 66 PCIx 133 Dual Rope Dual Rope 21 4c1x Bridge ll PCIx 133 PCIx 266 Quad Rope Pe Paix bid l Clx 266 PCIx266 z Mi Core Disk Storage CD Ports From Chassis Rear ort Ports From Chassis Front 26 Overview Figure 1 2 PCI PCI X PCle I O Subsystem Block Diagram cuss Unified Core IO Board PCIx 66 PCIx 133 PClx 133 X8 PCI E X8 PCI E g X8 PCI E z Ports From Chassis Rear Private Slots 7 Port Ports From Chassis Front Common IO Board PCI PCI X IOBP On the 10 slot PCI PCI X IOBP there are a total 8 Public slots PCI X mode1 2 2 Private Fast core slots PCI X model and 1 Private Slow core UCIO slot PCI 32 bit 33 MHz The eight Public slots are further subdivided into three speed bandwidth configurations e Four PDHP Public Dual Hot plug which operate at 64 bit 66 MHz PCI X e Two PSHP SDR Public Single Hot plug Single Data Rate operating at 64 bit 133 MHz PCI X e Two PSHP DDR Public Single Hot plug Double Data Rate at 64 bit 266 MHz 133 MHz double clocked PCI X mode2 Four 66 MHz PCI PCI X slots are shared in groups of two Shared slots have many speed and mode change restrictions during hot plug add or remove operations For more information on PCI PCI X card configuration and restrictions see PCI PCI X PCle Configurations page 62
59. CONTROLLER INFORMATION Controller Product Number P400 Controller Product Name HP PCIe SmartArray P400 Hardware Path 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Deyvis Pa LG cosida caco dev ciss5 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD You are downloading the firmware image INCPTR_2 02 2 42 PAK to the controller dev ciss5 Retrieving firmware image file from disk Done Validating the file s signature and size Done Retrieving the firmware revision string from ROM Done Retrieving the firmware revision string from the file Done Current Revision in ROM 1 96 New Revision in file 2 02 WARNING The firmware download process may take several minutes to complete All I O to this controller will be temporarily halted during this time Are you sure you want to continue y n y Preparing for downloads sesser ree ka ekai e Won Bee DE EEE ae Done Sending the new firmware to the controller Done Activating the new Firmware coiis p doe cad asia aaa aa Done Resetting the controller iria rd da Done Retrieving the firmware revision string from ROM Done Current Revision in ROM 2 02 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD WAS SUCCESSFUL kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
60. DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE inadequate is inadequate Table 5 16 Processor Events That May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Event Cause Source Notes LEDs Processors Type E0h 734d 26d Installed processors are not SFW BOOT_CPU_LOADING_ ERROR comp atible Processors Type E0h 2953d 26d Processors and or SFW BOOT CPU LOADING ERROR termination are out of order Processors Type E0h 36d 26d A logical CPU thread failed SFW BOOT CPU LATE TEST FAIL a late self test Processors Type E0h 677d 26d A logical CPU thread slave SFW MC_RENDEZVOUS _SLAVES FAIL failed to rendezvous Processors Type E0h 30d 26d A CPU core failed the SFW BOOT_CPU_ConFIG_FAIL configuration process Processor Type E0h 790d 26d A processor s fixed core SFW BOOT CPU BAD CORE FIXED RATIO frequency ratio is incompatible with the bus frequency Processor Type E0h 745d 26d A watchdog timer expired SFW BOOT_FINAL RENDEZ WATCHDOG FAIL and determined that a monarch processor is not responding Processors Type E0h 83d 26d A logical CPU thread SFW Bad or slow BOOT_RENDEZ_FAILURE rendezvous failed processor Processors Type E0h 67d 26d The logical monarch CPU SFW BOOT _MonARCH_TIMEOUT thread has timed out Processors Type E0h 57d 26d A logical slave CPU thread SFW BOOT _INCOMPATIBLE SLAVE is incompatible with the logical monarch CPU Processor Type E0h 56d 26d CPU PAL is incompatible SFW BOOT_INCOMPATIBLE PAL with the processor Processors Type E0h 34d 26d
61. Disk is marked failed at host s request Offline Disk is offline for some other reason Inactive Disk has been set inactive Not Syncd Data on disk is not synchronized with the rest of the array Primary Disk is the primary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Secondary Disk is the secondary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Wrg Type Device is not compatible for use as part of an IM array Too Small Disk is too small to mirror existing data Max Dsks Maximum 4 of disks allowed for this type of Array reached and or Maximum of total IM disks on a controller reached No SMART Disk doesn t support SMART cannot be used in an RAID array Wrg Intfc Device interface SAS differs from existing IM disks Pred Fail Indicates whether device SMART is predicting device failure Yes No Size MB Indicates the size of the device in megabytes megabyte 1024 x 1024 1 048 576 If the device is part of a two disk array this field reflects the size of the array not the size of the individual disk If the device is part of a three or more disk array this field is the size that the disk makes up within the array When creating a striped array the usable size of the array is determined by the number of drives times the size of the smallest drive in the array In arrays consisting of different sized drives excess space on larger drives are unusable View Array Screen The View Array screen enables you to view the current array config
62. Down HP UX page 124 9 Restore the former TPM settings to the new TPM See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information 10 Back up the TPM security information See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information 9 Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board The core I O board provides local and remote manageability access and manages many critical server functions and components such as e Power supplies e Fans e Main memory e Front panel e Processors e Remote interfaces e USB e VGA optional e Server boards The core I O board has a unique dedicated slot located to the left of the public PCI PCI X card slots as viewed from the front of the chassis on the I O board assembly The core I O board includes VGA optional iLO 2 MP LAN iLO 2 MP USB and iLO 2 MP serial ports and locator 236 Removing and Replacing Server Components A and iLO 2 MP status LEDs For more detail on the port locations and LEDs see Controls Ports and LEDs page 36 WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected this voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION
63. Features and Procedures continued ACU ORCA Supported Procedures Creation and deletion of arrays and logical drives Yes Yes Assignment of RAID level Yes Yes Sharing of spare drives among several arrays Yes No Assignment of multiple spare drives per array Yes No Setting of stripe size Yes No Migration of RAID level or stripe size Yes No Configuration of controller settings Yes No Expansion of an array Yes No Creation of multiple logical drives per array Yes No ORCA Utility To use ORCA follow these steps 1 Power on the server POST runs and any array controllers that are in the server are initialized one at a time During each controller initialization process POST halts for several seconds while an ORCA prompt message displays 2 At the ORCA prompt e If you are connected using a headless console press the Esc 8 combination e Otherwise press F8 The ORCA Main Menu displays enabling you to create view or delete a logical drive Figure 3 29 ORCA Main Menu Main Meru reste logical Drive Let sl Da Creating a Logical Drive Using ORCA To create a logical drive using ORCA follow these steps 1 Select Create Logical Drive The screen displays a list of all available unconfigured physical drives and the valid RAID options for the system 116 Installing the System 2 Use the Arrow keys Spacebar and Tab to navigate around the screen and set up the logical
64. Health Descriptions tt ada 149 System Health LED States meretas A a EEE E ERE 149 VEP Systemi Health D seript oN tens srta rin od ion 150 Diagnostics Panel EDS ita lata 151 Online Support Tools List sirenas ira iD cia 152 Offline Support Tools isa a aii da aia 152 General Dine nostic Tools Li AA 153 Processor Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS ii da 159 Processor Events That May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS oooonnonnconncnnnncnonconorancranranarancnnnrnornss 160 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 A 1 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 C 1 C 2 C 3 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 5 D 6 18 Memory Subsystem Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS oonooniccnconnonoconononanrocnrnncnanranoross 162 Memory Subsystem Events that May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS ccceccesseeseneeeteees 162 Power LED tes tenses deusatteiucnesy EEE NEI EN Eate 165 Power Supply CED latest 166 I O Power Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS oononnconconinnmsmnnrararerarenarrnss 166 Cooling Subsystem Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS cooconconnnnnconncnnnnconnrocoranornnrannnnnos 167 I O Card Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS aia 167 VO Card Events that May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDS 0 da eee 168 PCUPCGLA Slot Rope ACPL Pats A A ie 169 PCEUPCEX P CIL Slot Rope ACPI Paths ii tas posan 169 Manageability LAN LED States and Speeds isc tat tirn eos
65. Internal Health LED States LED Color Flash Rate State Off Off Health is good on all internal CRUs or system is off Green Steady Health good on all internal CRUs and system firmware has passed BOOT_START Amber 1 Hz An internally accessible CRU failed The system is on or in standby mode Check the Diagnostic Panel or internal system LEDs The Internal Health LED clears when all failed internally accessible entities are repaired and report that they are healthy or on any ac standby power cycle For details on how each LED in the Diagnostic panel is cleared see Diagnostics Panel LEDs page 150 and the HP Integrity rx3600 system specification Table 5 8 lists the iLO 2 MP strings in the VFP for the three states of the internal health LED Table 5 8 VFP Internal Health Description LED Color State Off None Green Internal parts including CPUs and memory are healthy Flashing amber An ore accessible CRU failed Check the Diagnostic panel System Health LED This LED indicates the overall health state of the system including the state of system firmware and the OS If the LED is amber or red the system needs attention Examine the event logs for details of the problem The System Health LED performs the following tasks e Carries forward the ATTENTION functionality of legacy Integrity and HP 9000 front panel designs e Indicates whether the server is up or down External and Interna
66. MP gt enter the CO command to switch the console terminal from the MP Main Menu to mirrored redirected console mode All mirrored data is displayed To return to the iLO 2 MP command interface type Ctrl B or Esc and 92 Installing the System Accessing the Host Console With vKVM Integrated Remote Console For information on how to access the host console using the vKVM feature through the Integrated Remote Console IRC see the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide Accessing the Host Console with the SMASH SM CLP For information on how to access the host console using the SMASH SM CLP see the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA A BA VGA is a method you can use to access the graphic console NOTE You cannot access the iLO 2 MP using VGA This method requires three elements e Monitor VGA connector e Keyboard USB connector e Mouse USB connector The graphic console output displays on the monitor screen IMPORTANT The server console output does not display on the console device screen until the server boots to the EFI Shell Start a console session using the RS 232 serial port method to view console output prior to booting to the EFI Shell or to access the iLO 2 MP See Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port page 88 To access the graphic console with VG
67. Name server rx3600 Product Number AB463A Secondary Product Number is Identical Serial number SGH43442VB Secondary Serial Number is Identical UUID 3C33C58E 2E5A 11D8 A33B 4188COAEFAE2 Valid Secondary UUID is Identical Product ID 0x301 Enable the TPM See Replacing the TPM page 235 Restore the TPM settings See the HP UX operating system documentation for instructions Verify the system board replacement and operation using either the iLO 2 MP or EFI commands Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly 229 Removing and Replacing the System Battery The system battery is located on the I O board assembly Replace the battery with only an identical or equivalent battery only Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING Lithium batteries may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of batteries in a fire Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Removing the System Battery 230 A EA WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment
68. Port SAS Host Bus Adapter SAS Controller Users Guide in the I O Cards and Networking Software collection under SAS Host Bus Adapters at http www docs hp com MPTUTIL Utility The MPTUTIL utility enables you to update the adapter flash memory with the EFI driver and HBA firmware New versions of these images are released periodically we IMPORTANT Do not store the files in this package on a SAS device If you store these files on Z a SAS device and the update fails these files will not be accessible To update firmware follow these steps Integrated RAID 283 1 Insert the HP IPF Offline Diagnostics and Utilities CD in the drive and boot to the EFI Shell ES NOTE You can also download the firmware image file and update utility from the HP Web site at http www hp com in the Driver Downloads section we IMPORTANT When you boot the EFI enabled systems the CD containing the utility must be in the drive to allow device mapping The EFI utility and firmware image files are located in the root directory or in a subdirectory on the CD 2 The CD drive displays in the list of mapped devices as fs0 To change to this device enter fs0 shell gt fs0 fs0 gt 3 To determine the current version of the firmware follow these steps a At the EFI Shell enter mptutil from the directory that contains mptutil efi The following example indicates that the EFI Serial Attached SCSI card utility version is 1 01 12 00
69. Processor Board Assembly patna erent cneae eae 74 Installing a Dual Core Procesan ai A a dv ela vine AA Cals E aa rien ERa 74 Processor boad OD a a Ea a PS 75 Required Tools AS a Laa 75 Installing a Dual Core Process a ad 75 Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal Mount 2 ccssescecessesiseiateeseacesctiouestetsnadeciaetocessiwssereeseeds 78 Installing the Server into Rack tia 78 HR Bees Vela A eS a AT EAA A E EA A lO e o 78 Non FAP RACK iaa das rada otras iros 78 4 Table of Contents Installing the Server into a Pedestal Mot ii 78 Connecting the Cables O A AT EOS Da a Ea ONET idas 78 AC put POWE ereina A AS AA AAA 79 IOANA ES KE h E Se E ER o o etanol 79 Applying Standby Power to the Servers iaa ada ee ali 80 LAN li ileso aca 80 Console DD ii Adi lt a AAA y E E 80 DN A NE 81 Setup Checklista cia 82 Console Setup ROW cla bi An A ae dada 82 PPLE POA A VOI AAA RA AA a 83 Determining the Physical iLO 2 MP Access Method crcciosornrsirimec untada iio 83 Determining the iLO 2 MP LAN Configuration Method vitrina die cti 85 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS cocccnccccncnononanonccnnnananncnononanacnnncnnncnnnnonnnacnno 85 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using ANDRES alan 86 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port oononnncnnonononnnnoononanoconnnonnanonaconanonns 88 Logging nto the 2 MP ui A ias 89 Additional MA A A A AAA A AA 89 Modifying User Accounts and Default Pass Words capo 89 Setting Up
70. Replace the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw clockwise until it tightens to the chassis Removing and Replacing Server Components 4 Reconnect the internal SAS cables to the card A CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 5 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 6 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O Card A A The LAN core I O card enables network connectivity for the server The dedicated slot for the LAN core I O card is slot 2 unless there are two PCI X SAS core I O cards installed In this case the dedicated slot for the LAN core I O card is slot 10 WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is
71. SAS 4x 432239 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419537 B21 Completing the Adapter Installation Procedure B 22 Updating the Firmware To update the firmware on the server controller or hard drives use Smart Components These components are available on the Firmware Maintenance CD A more recent version of a particular 276 Upgrades server or controller component might be available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support 1 Find the most recent version of the component that you require Components for controller firmware updates are available in offline and online formats 2 Follow the instructions for installing the component on the server These instructions are given with the CD and are provided on the same Web page as the component 3 Follow the additional instructions that describe how to use the component to flash the ROM These instructions are provided with each component Installing device drivers and Management Agents You can use the Integrity Support Pack to automatically install the device drivers Event Notification Service and Management Agents or you can install these items manually The Integrity Support Pack is located on the Smart Setup media To install the Integrity Support Pack launch Express Setup from EBSU and follow the on screen instructions Installing device drivers The drivers for the controller are located on the Smart Setup media Updates are pos
72. SAS controller can have one global hot spare disk available to automatically replace a failed disk in the one or two IM volumes configured on the controller The hot spare makes the IM array more fault tolerant Up to two IM volumes are supported per SAS controller plus the hot spare HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller The following information is provided to assist you in configuring the 8 Internal Port SAS HBA controller during installation To flash firmware use the MPTUTIL command To configure and maintain the IR functionality of the SAS controller on the HP Integrity server use the drvdfg and c ggen EFI commands If you are scripting multiple devices use thecfggencommand MPTUTIL Utility we The mptutil utility enables you to update the adapter flash memory with the EFI driver and HBA firmware New versions of these images are released periodically IMPORTANT Do not store the files in this package on a SAS device If you store these files on a SAS device and the update fails these files will not be accessible To update firmware follow these steps 96 Installing the System 1 Insert the HP IPF Offline Diagnostics and Utilities CD in the drive and boot to the EFI Shell ES NOTE You can also download the firmware image file and update utility from the HP Web site at http www hp com in the Driver Downloads section we IMPORTANT When you boot the EFI enabled systems the CD containing the ut
73. See ioconfig page 326 For non PCle systems ioconfig and info io will not display the MPS optimization policy setting The Set PCle MPS Optimization boot manager menu also will not be displayed Running 28 Overview the ioconfig mps optimize on off command from a non PCle system the following output will be displayed Shell gt ioconfig mps optimize ioconfig PCIe MPS optimization is not supported Shell gt ioconfig mps optimize on ioconfig PCIe MPS optimization is not supported Exit status code Unsupported To restore MPS to the default values use the default clear command See default page 327 Processor The server processor subsystem accommodates one or two dual core Itanium processor modules The processor subsystem consists of the following elements e zx2 CEC front side bus memory and I O controller e System clock generation and distribution e Circuitry for manageability and fault detection The zx2 CEC and the processor modules are located on the processor board assembly Each processor connects to the processor board through a zero insertion force ZIF socket The processor board is mounted on a removable carrier tray that is attached to the processor board access door Access the assembly through the front of the server after the memory carrier is removed Memory The server DIMMS are seated on memory boards that are enclosed in an extractable memory carrier assembly The memory boards p
74. Standard Mode ida aaa tias 125 Booting HP UX From the EFL Boot Manager eroidniaccidn svesennsosniverSeverdoonnsscsny ains ci i n 125 Booting HP UX Prom the EPS ina ati veo bie Casha a aa E 126 Booting HP UX in Single User Mode aaa 127 Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode verja nciiade 128 Shutting Down HP UX each hee AA aia dats 128 Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS cscorrorisi rotar nea ni sa tail 129 Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options Listin ia ici 129 Booting HP Open ViDa A can neve tos segues ou newohen Ea aeea Sian 130 Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Boot Manager cinc nar tid ebateavecerivnctoedhenvs 130 6 Table of Contents Booting HP OpenVMS from the EP Shell atea 130 Stee Dowi HP OpenVMS sorta tints ac aaa a 131 Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft WindoOWS ooococoncooncnoononcconncnnnonanonnconnrnaronconnnonanonarn nn orar rn conan 132 Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options Listin ascii it 132 Booting the Microsoft Windows Operating SYSteM ooooonccooncconnnonoranonnnonncnnonanonnoranonnnrnnnrnnrnnarnnonnss 133 Shutting Down Microsott Wind WS data 134 Shutting Down Windows from the Start Mente 2 02004 accut iil betel renee 134 Shutting Down Windows from the Command LiN ococccocccnonanocnnnnnononaconnnnnn nono nonanacancnnnnaninnoss 134 Booting and Shutting Down LID ad wee tae a G Gee e ai ee 135 Adding Linux to the Boot Options lisa 135 Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Operating System sssssss
75. a Ata 97 Flashing BIOS and EFI Driver on the First Comttoller coisesspateoscvctstocnsesaceveetd bevy nconians ahi 98 Common Questions About Flashing Pirmi ware ist capaces 98 Viewing the VPD Information for EFI Driver and RISC FirmWale ocococccnocnnonnnconananccinnaninos 98 A o RN ey ne eT 98 DRVCFG UQlty A A A T ea 98 Staring the DRVCEG UGU estne a T E E ES ernest 98 Using the DRVCEG UII a a 99 Configuration Utility Screens nadas ted ld a ii 99 AL A AR 100 CFEGGEN UTI ta A A ada aaa 106 Starting CFGGEN asarna eae naeta erarnan cent npn ned E TETA ee EE EE T E a TEE ea oases 106 CFGGEN Operan seloaseaiecvaseteexs eevee beets ete nevis E E a mena ere Ge 107 Table of Contents 5 Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare diskS ooooonnconinnncconnnnnnrocnranrocnrnncranonanrnornss 107 CEGGEN COMAS a ds 107 Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers incor tene reli nata oca cia 109 Quick Installation Procedure ivi 109 Connectune External Store A tl RAS ia do 109 SAS Cable Part Nubes a dla 110 SAUPDATE Utility ssc su se Gy AAA AA AAA A A AAA Ed e 110 o EE EAE E A ed ed yunnts eas we uae ea say es een ea 110 COMIN ATS 22 oes E ad 110 A TN 111 UPDATE 20 AE A A EA IAEA AAA ee 111 UPDATE Misato tai ita dalla a a 111 HELP A SS de east 112 Frror Mess a A A ir ASEO 112 EBSU LIA A tao 113 CONMUEVE 115 Comparing the Unless i 115 ORCA Ulinn a A AA AS 116 Creating a Logical Drive Using ORCA adoro 116 A ai oie RE ENERE E E E Saad
76. accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the efi vms vms loader command to initiate the vms_loader efi loader on the device you are accessing fs5 gt efi vms vms_loader efi HP OpenVMS Industry Standard 64 Operating System Version XAV1 D2Y Copyright 1976 2005 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P SPKAO Copyright c 1998 LSI Logic PKW V3 2 20 ROM 4 19 PKAO SCSI Chip is SYM53C1010 66 Operating mode is LVD Ultra3 SCSI SSMP I CPUTRN CPU 01 has joined the active set SSMP I CPUTRN CPU 02 has joined the active set SSTDRV I STARTUP OpenVMS startup begun at 13 JUL 2005 14 54 36 25 SEWAO Auto negotiation mode set by console Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the MP Main Menu Shutting Down HP OpenVMS To shut down the HP OpenVMS operating system follow these steps 1 2 Log in to HP OpenVMS running on the system that you want to shut down Log in to the iLO 2 MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the iLO 2 MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP OpenVMS has shut down Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 131 oy At the OpenVMS DCL command element prompt issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and specify the shutdown options in response to the prompts For ex
77. admin lt service gt sets system mode to service Operation If specified alone sysmode displays the system mode If a mode is specified as a parameter the system mode changes immediately The system mode is retained on successive boots 336 Utilities Example D 24 sysmode command Shell gt sysmode System Mode NORMAL Shell gt sysmode admin You are now in admin mode Shell gt sysmode service You are now in service mode Shell gt sysmode normal You are now in normal mode Specifying SCSI Parameters The following SCSI parameters can be configured for the SCSI board e SCSIID SCSI initiator ID e Maximum data transfer rate SCSI rate e Bus width e Whether the HBA is bootable driver support e Avoid bus resets secondary cluster server Using the SCSI Setup Utility To use the SCSI Setup Utility to specify SCSI parameters follow these steps Specifying SCSI Parameters 337 338 Utilities At the EFI Shell prompt type the following command to map the parameters for all PCI cards installed in the system shell gt info io A list of all the devices that are installed in the server and managed by EFI drivers displays For example Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 o1 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 o0 00 00 o1 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 00 00 o1 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 112 00 00 02 00 0x1095 0x0649 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0
78. analyze any error messages e Offline Diagnostic Environment ODE Operating System Boots with Problems If the operating system is running and you are experiencing problems use the following tools to help solve the problem e LEDs e Error Messages and event logs Intermittent Server Problems You can usually trace intermittent problems that occur during installation to power source problems a loose connector or some other hardware problem If you are experiencing intermittent problems follow these steps 1 Check iLO 2 MP logs and analyze the problem Determine if there is more than one symptom and if the problem is random Verify that the ac power source is stable Reseat all rear panel connectors Reseat all hot swappable fans and power supplies Reseat all main memory DIMMs Reseat all cable harnesses and board connectors DVD Problems DVD problems that occur during installation are usually related to faulty connections If you are experiencing DVD problems follow these steps 1 Remove and reinsert the DVD 2 Replace the DVD 3 Remove and reinstall the DVD drive Check that connectors are fully engaged 4 Replace the DVD drive Dy RN Hard Drive Problems Hard drive problems that occur during installation are usually due to rough handling The drive may not be correctly seated or may have been damaged in transit If you are experiencing hard drive problems follow these steps 1 Remove and reinsert the faulty
79. are needed The iLO 2 MP provides options to control user access Select one of the following options to prevent unauthorized access to the iLO 2 MP e Change the default user name and password See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 89 A CAUTION When DHCP is enabled the system is vulnerable to security risks because anyone can access the iLO 2 MP until you change the default user name and password HP strongly recommends you assign user groups and rights before proceeding e Create local accounts You can store up to 19 user names and passwords to manage iLO 2 MP access This is ideal for small environments such as labs and small to medium sized businesses e Use directory services Use the corporate directory to manage iLO 2 MP user access This is ideal for environments with a large number of frequently changing users If you plan to use directory services HP recommends leaving at least one local account enabled as an alternate method of access 90 Installing the System Accessing the Host Console This section provides information on the different methods of accessing the host console of an HP Integrity server This section addresses the following topics e Accessing the iLO 2 MP With the Web Browser page 91 e Accessing the Host Console With the TUI CO Command page 92 e Accessing the Host Console With vKVM Integrated Remote Console page 93 e Accessing the Host Consol
80. are several methods to configuring the LAN DHCP with DNS is the preferred one DHCP with DNS comes preconfigured with default factory settings including a default user account and password Other options include e ARP Ping e RS 232 serial port 80 Installing the System This section addresses the following topics Overview Overview page 81 Setup Checklist page 82 Console Setup Flowchart page 82 Preparation page 83 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS page 85 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using ARP Ping page 86 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port page 88 Logging In to the iLO 2 MP page 89 Additional Setup page 89 A console is a tool consisting of display and input devices used to locally and remotely monitor and control the server The console enables interaction with the following manageability configuration and diagnostic tools ES Integrated Lights Out 2 Management processor LO 2 MP Provides a way to connect to the server and perform administration or monitoring tasks for the server hardware It controls power reset and Transfer of Control TOC capabilities provides console access displays and records system events and displays detailed information about internal subsystems The iLO 2 MP is available whenever the system is connected to a power source even if the server main power switch is turned off NO
81. be created without at least one IM volume already created e The utility does not allow adding a hot spare disk of type different from disk types in any of the volume e With the AUTO command all drives used are the same type as the first available disk found and the size is limited to the size of the smallest disk CFGGEN Commands Using the CREATE Command The CREATE command creates IM volumes on the SAS controller Firmware and hardware limitations for this family of cards limit the number of configurations that are possible Syntax cfggen lt controller gt create lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the IM volume in Mbytes or MAX for the maximum size available gsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation Once a disk has been added to an IM volume all of its storage capacity may or may not be used depending on drive capacity and volume capacity For example if you add a 36 GB disk drive Core I O Card Configuration 107 to a volume that only uses 9 GB of capacity on each disk drive the remaining 27 GB of capacity on the disk drive is unusable The disk identified by the first SCSI ID on the command line is assigned as the primary disk drive when creating an IM volume If the SAS controller is allowed to resync the disk drives
82. buses 5 PAL code configures all CPUs 5 SAL code configures all platform CEC chips including shared memory and all responding I O devices 5 Firmware code and stack are relocated to shared memory after all x4DIMM ranks in shared memory are configured and tested 5 EFI Shell launches from shared memory and cache lines are retrieved 128 bytes at a time by MEMC in Zx2 6 The OS loader launches using the EFI device driver 6 The OS boots and starts its own device drivers 6 The OS can use runtime PAL and SAL calls and ACPI features These abstraction layers enable platform independence Booting 173 Firmware The system has three sets of firmware installed e System firmware e BMC firmware e jLO2 MP firmware All firmware must be from the same release Independent updates are not supported Details about a specific release are available in the Release Notes Firmware updates are available from http www hp com under Support and Drivers Identifying and Troubleshooting Firmware Problems Erratic system operation and failure to boot to the EFI Boot Manager or to the EFI Shell are symptoms of possible firmware problems Problems due to firmware are relatively rare Look for other problem causes first If you are dealing with a firmware problem the probable failure areas are Unsupported firmware installation e Corrupt firmware installation To troubleshoot firmware problems 1 Verify that all system and
83. channels one line for each channel The lines contain the SCSI interface description LSI Logic Ultra160 SCSI Controller The value shown for Ctr1 17 and 18 at the beginning of each line is the controller s handle for each channel You need this value for the next step NOTE The controller s handle values changes on every boot From the EFI Shell prompt enter the following command to obtain the EFI driver s handle for the SCSI interface Shell gt drvcfg A list of all EFl capable configurable components in the system is displayed For example Shells drvcfg Configurable Components Drv 3D Ctr1 15 Lang eng Drv 3F Ctr1 19 Lang eng Drv 45 Ctr1 17 Lang eng Drv 45 Ctr1 18 Lang eng This listing shows which driver controls which device controller This information describes a SCSI interface because the values shown for Ctr1 17 and 18 are the controller s handles for the SCSI interface two channels from the information displayed by the devtree command ES NOTE The EFI driver s handle values change on every boot sl 6 Y Ae s TIP From this command drvc g record these two pieces of information for each channel of each SCSI interface for parameters to be changed Drv the EFI driver s handle Ctr1 the controller s handle Using the driver s handle Drv and the controller s handle Ctr1 from the drvcfgcommand start the EFI SCSI Setup Utility fo
84. charged for the travel and labor costs of this service Optional Parts for which customer self repair is optional These parts are also designed for customer self repair If however you require that HP replace them for you there may or may not be additional charges depending on the type of warranty service designated for your product No Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair To satisfy the customer warranty HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part Based on availability and where geography permits CRU parts are shipped for next business day delivery Same day or four hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits If assistance is required you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the telephone HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CRU part whether a defective part must be returned to HP In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time normally five 5 business days The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement With a CRU HP pays for all the shipping and part return costs and determines the courier to be used For more information about HP s Customer Self Repair program c
85. command line utility that runs in the Linux EFI and Windows Pre Installation WinPE environments It is a minimally interactive program that you execute from a command line prompt or a shell script The results from invoking this utility are communicated through the program status value that is returned when the program exits Use the CFGGEN utility to create IM storage configurations on SAS controllers Some CFGGEN commands work only with SAS adaptors in the EFI environment Starting CFGGEN TheCFGGENutility is located on the HP IPF Offline Diagnostic and Utilities CD To use CFGGEN follow these steps 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Boot the system to the EFI Shell prompt 3 From the EFI Shell prompt change to the CD drive shell gt fs0 Enter fs0 gt 4 Change to the directory that containscfggen efi fs0 gt cd EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK Enter fs0 EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK gt From this directory use CFGGEN HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 299 CFGGEN Operation CFGGENis not case sensitive You can enter CFGGENcommands and parameters in uppercase lowercase or a mixture of the two Use the following conventions in the command descriptions e Text in italics must be entered exactly as shown on the command line e Text surrounded by lt gt must be replaced with a required parameter e Text surrounded by may be replaced by an optional parameter e Parameters surrounded by must be entered one or more times as a
86. cooocoomo o 64 Supported Memory Carrier Assembly Configurati0WS oomconoooconnnroonnocnncnnonnranoranonnnrnnnrancnnarnnonnss 65 supported Memory Conti UT aHOMS dara dies 68 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Dd aa 69 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Loading Examplesis ion ri en crac 71 Processor Load DAR a tdt id 75 POWer A A NN 79 Elements Required to Start a Console Sessions 81 Setup Chela a losa 82 Physical Connection MATES asse A A A AA AA 85 LAN Configuration Methods evo tinto a a kes tan AA a A 85 ARP Ping COMA SS AE AS EA NAS oneness 87 POW tata A e A eels tee ln ela 94 MPTUTIL Commands and Fun ctions cccccccccccccccccccsscccscessccssceecesscesecssceusccsseesecsseuueeesseuuneess 97 SAS Cable Parti NUDE da AS E aS 110 ACU and ORCA Supported Features and Procedure innata 115 Server Power Button Functions When Server iS OM occccccnnnocococcnonononononncoccnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnncnnnnnnnannnos 118 Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off oooooononnccconcnononononocncnnnononcnnnnnoncnccnnnnnnnannnoss 118 Troubleshooting Entry Policoro tostados cd eiie EESE TEETE E EEE eei 141 Eront Panel EED SIER eea aee A E A AAE A e oh de eect EE EAE aE fav eves TETERA A 142 Basie Entry Class Troubleshooting scenie SS 143 Advanced Entry Class Trombleshopne str o in 146 External Health LED States it id E ai a iS ai tiara 148 VEP External Health Descriptif eironi ninas O E a Ra Rac 148 Internal Health LED States iii in ta A a ia ainda 149 VEP Internal
87. creation or any time after creation provided the array is made up of 5 disks or fewer This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The array already has a hot spare e The array is made up of the maximum number of devices 6 e The device isn t large enough to mirror existing data on the primary The hot spare drive must be greater than or equal to the size of any drive in any IM volume XXXX OK Disk is online and fully functional Missing Disk is not responding Failed Disk has failed Initalizing Disk is initializing CfgOffln Disk is offline at host s request User Fail Disk is marked failed at host s request Offline Disk is offline for some other reason Inactive Disk has been set inactive Not Syncd Data on disk is not synchronized with the rest of the array Primary Disk is the primary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Secondary Disk is the secondary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Wrg Type Device is not compatible for use as part of an IM array Too Small Disk is too small to mirror existing data HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 291 Max Dsks Maximum 4 of disks allowed for this type of Array reached and or Maximum of total IM disks on a controller reached No SMART Disk doesn t support SMART cannot be used in an RAID array Wrg Intfc Device interface SAS differs from existing IM disks Pred
88. de a a aaa 285 PRVCFG UME aaa eae hav ars vec AR eves vn A Soe eles EEE ANREP E EEEE he 285 Starting the DRVCEECUI Ma AA A a 285 Using the DR V CEGUERA a Aa 286 Configuration Utility rr nt dt 286 DRVEES Sens hs Seed A E S I AE o 286 CEGGEIN UA A A A RAR 299 A In 299 CEGGEN ODE aida 300 Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks oonoconnccnnononocanonacinnanicnnnanoranacnnccnnnos 300 CEGGEN Conadi aia 300 Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controller cocina ida 306 Quick Installation Procedure oooooooncncnnncnnnononononenononononononononononononononononononononononononononanenenenenenens 306 Connecting External Storages hioin ann ads TE EN RAEE EEE EK AROE EE ounce cda 307 SAS Cable Part Numbers deina a A EAE EAA A ATEA E EEEN 307 SAUPDATE Dil A AA A Ni 307 o A EE O RAR ai 308 o A TN 308 A A E EA AE TAEA o 308 UPDATE 0 Ata 308 UPDATE ona cr a dt e e o ir ace a e dt ek 309 HELLO ii A oct idos 309 Error Messe nd A arcada 310 EBSUL Ulla AAA 310 CSO EL UN the AV a A A A td Eea aa een i 312 Compatins Me Diles a cl ar e atte tat inde lth Gait Ata ee iit atte ces elm 313 ORGA UY A e o e E O 314 Creating a Logical Drive Using ORCA in a a 314 ACU VUM A AE AL A AAA AAA AE 315 Diles ind 317 Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager tt aa ad cd 317 ELENA dad 318 EPOSSE COnN S 0 cosh x beh a n a a a a N a a 320 O R asi 320 IM E EE es ven A E T A 320 PAPAIN CHOLES AEE OE EE E ES AE E S T A A E AE A tesa 320 Opera
89. detect SPD misprogrammed or EEPROM with a bad this DIMM is checksum incompatible DIMMs Type E0h 4652d 26d This memory board is WIN Memory rank is about WIN_AGT PREDICT_MEM_FAIL correcting too many Agent to fail or environmental conditions are causing more errors than usual Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs Processor ype EOh 189d 26d Unable to clear the SFW Carrier MEM_ERR_LOG FAILED TO CLEAR platform error logs in the CEC Processor Type E0h 181d 26d Selftest of CEC multibit SFW Carrier MEM_ECC_MBE SIGNAL TST_FAILED error signaling has failed Processor Type E0h 160d 26d The CEC failed the SFW Carrier MEM BIB REG FAILURE register test Processor Type E0h 187d 26d System firmware SFW SFW Carrier MEM_ECC_ MBE SIGNAL TST FAILED was unable to clear the platform error logs on the CEC Processor Type E0h 190d 26d The error registers in the SFW Carrier MEM ERR REG CLEAR FAILURE CEC failed to clear Processor Type E0h 208d 26d The CEC memory SFW Carrier MEM_MC_REG_FAILURE controller failed the register test Memory Type 02h 02h 07h 06h Memory card voltage BMC Voltage wholly Carrier VOLTAGE_NON_RECOVERABLE error contained on the memory carrier has failed DIMMs Type E0h 4000d 26d An SDRAM is failing on SFW The failing DIMM MEM CHIPSPARE DEALLOC RANK the DIMM quad will be deallocated DIMMs Type E0h 174d 26d DI
90. diagnostic panel LEDs see Controls Ports and LEDs page 36 A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server we IMPORTANT System information is stored on the display board assembly You must write the serial number and model string information to the new display board after installation Removing the Display Board To remove the display board follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 242 Removing and Replacing Server Components ES SND 10 11 oy 12 13 NOTE The USB cable connector is an RJ45 connector it is not a typical USB connector Remove the air baffle Figure 6 33 Remove the clear pl
91. drives Press Enter to accept the settings Press F8 to confirm the settings and save the new configuration After several seconds the Configuration Saved screen displays 314 Core I O Card Utilities 5 Press Enter to continue You can now create another logical drive by repeating the previous steps ES NOTE Newly created logical drives are invisible to the operating system To make the new logical drives available for data storage format them using the instructions given in the operating system documentation ACU Utility For detailed information about using ACU see the HP Array Configuration Utility User Guide at I O Cards and Networking Software at http docs hp com en netcom html Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers 315 316 D Utilities This appendix describes the utilities that are part of the server These include the EFI Boot Manager and EFI POSSE This appendix addresses the following topics e Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager page 317 e EFI POSSE Commands page 320 e Specifying SCSI Parameters page 337 e Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu page 343 e LO 2 MP page 348 Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager The Extensible Firmware Interface EFI is an OS and platform independent boot and preboot interface EFI resides between the OS and platform firmware enabling the OS to boot without details about the underlying har
92. e Memory up to 96 GB of memory This chapter addresses the following topics e Server Subsystems page 25 I O page 25 Processor page 29 Memory page 29 Cooling page 31 Power page 32 Front Display Panel DVD and Diagnostic Panel page 34 Mass Storage page 34 e Firmware page 35 e Controls Ports and LEDs page 36 Front Panel page 36 Storage and Media Devices page 38 Diagnostic Panel page 39 Rear Panel page 40 Server Subsystems I O The server may contain either a 10 slot PCI PCI X IOBP or a 10 slot PCI PCI X PCle IOBP The PCI PCI X PCle interfaces are classified under two major categories public and private Public interfaces Public interfaces are PCI slot connectors that are left available to the customer for the I O card adapters which they wish to install based on their application needs provided the adapter is supported in the slot All public slots support HP server traditional OL hot plug Operations Private interfaces Private interfaces are interfaces dedicated to meeting the core I O system requirements There are two types of core I O fast core and slow core also known as the UCIO Unified Core I O The Private slots and UCIO are not hot pluggable Hot plug PCI PCI X PCle hot pluggable operations enable you to add or remove a PCI PCI X PCle card while the server is pow
93. e When a new server is first booted DHCP is automatically available factory set default but ARP Ping does not start for three minutes after the iLO 2 MP is booted This applies to every subsequent boot of the iLO 2 MP until an IP address is obtained by DHCP or has been assigned by using the LC command e Upon successfully assigning an IP address using ARP Ping DHCP is automatically disabled There are two methods to use the ARP Ping utility 1 Connect a PC to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server and run the ARP Ping commands from the PC 2 Locate an existing server on the network log into it and run the ARP Ping commands from the server Table 3 13 lists the ARP Ping commands Table 3 13 ARP Ping Commands ARP Command Description arp s This command assigns the IP address to the iLO 2 MP MAC address This ARP table entry maps the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN interface to the static IP address designated for that interface ping This command tests network connections It verifies the iLO 2 MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address The following procedure explains how to use the ARP Ping utility using a PC that is connected to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server To configure a static IP address using the ARP Ping utility follow these steps 1 Obtain the iLO 2 MP MAC address To set the IP address using ARP you must know the MAC address
94. each bulk power supply Extend the server from the chassis if the chassis is racked Remove all the HDDs from the front of the chassis Remove the memory extender and CPU board FRUs Remove the top cover Remove all components except the I O backplane board and core I O board FRUs Plug in the ac power cords The iLO 2 MP and system console power on Execute the iLO 2 MP CM gt DF command The CRU IDs are listed You should see the Alert IPMI event for this action as read from the SEL 9 If you do not see the Alert Level 5 IPMI event but get a different high level alert try replacing the I O backplane board 10 Examine the pins on the midplane board and if necessary replace the midplane board 90 NTO Ok Re Nr 11 Remove the ac power cords 12 Add the memory carrier with at least one rank of DIMMs You should see the Alert IPMI event for this action as read from the SEL 13 If you do see Alert level 5 Missing CRU device CPU 0 PIROM insert the CPU board CRU with at least module 0 processor installed 14 Add the CPU board CRU and turn on system power The cooling fans should turn on and stay on If the installed CRUs are all functional the system should initiate POST on all processors It is recommended that you view the system console output using live logs to ensure that POST is initiated and completes successfully If POST does not start after a few seconds there may be a CPU board or processor problem T
95. ead gables loa R 117 Installation Troubleshooting tada tiara serier anei tess a Oates anna oi DEE 117 Troubleshootin oe Method aitor E E 117 Troubleshooting Using the Server Power DUO ies 118 Server Does Not PoWer O nn aa a aaa aa aa a e a a a thang ued a E aa Aa Aea S Aaea EEN 118 EPL Mennais Not vallada n R 119 Operating System Does Not Dotar idas ti 119 Operating System Boots with Problems o a 119 Intermittent Server Proble Sais eies areierebrrii renees EEES OE EAA AEEA NETI NENN E 119 PIVIDSPLODISHIS bd 119 Hard Bre Prol E ET T E AEON O E EE TA 119 Console Problems ui enna aa aN N Ra A aE N N A ad 120 Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the FirmMWale ooonconnoconcnonnnononanonanronaranonanonnornss 120 Downloading the Latest Version of the FIEDOIWATS ii 120 Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware ssssesssssssssessssrsessessserssrsreeserssesneesesseeneeseense 120 Enabling the Trusted Platform Module Ain 120 Tode O a n r T AEN 120 Enabling the TEN iodo as 121 4 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System c ccsssesesseeseseseesesesteseeestesees 123 Contiguring System Boot Optom sins davecsiis A ti n 123 Boot Options iSt fi Geet ies ease Si ie kk Coch eels ak adele ek cathe atari ot eE EES 123 DUO OOF SOUR E hte Saw eave bob a E edo oh Soap save beeen end an pd ay AAA AAA AAA 124 Booting and Shutting Down de WN ti escalate ty bes a a e ar eases 124 Adding HP UX to the Boot Options Lis io 124 Booting HP UX in
96. firmware 1 Execute the following EFI command at the EFI Shell prompt to determine the current firmware version Shell gt info fw 2 Look for the latest firmware updates for Itanium based servers at http www hp com go bizsupport 3 If anew version of the firmware is available copy the firmware image file onto your own FTP server 4 Follow the instructions provided in FPGA release notes to Initiate a firmware upgrade from the iLO 2 MP user interface the iLO 2 MP pulls its image from the FTP server that you specify c VBios Ifthe server has UCIO with VGA the vBios must be updated Follow these steps to update the vBios firmware 1 Power on the system and get to the EFI Shell prompt 2 Execute the following EFI command at the EFI Shell prompt to determine the current firmware version Shell gt info fw 3 Look for the latest firmware updates for Itanium based servers at http www hp com go bizsupport 4 If anew version of the Video Graphics Adapter VGA firmware is available download it Save it to CD or copy it over the network to the system you are going to update 5 From the EFI Shell move to the directory in which the downloaded firmware file is located 6 Follow the installation instructions provided in the firmware release notes to update the VGA firmware using the provided flasher efiflash_1p15 efi Performing a System Backup Record the boot configuration settings To find the settings use the INFO ALL EFI
97. for yes or N for no This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The array is inactive e The array does not need to be resynchronized e The adapter s MPT firmware does not support the feature e Non IR firmware is used e IR is disabled The array is inactive Activate Array To perform an activation of an IM array press Enter on Activate Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y for yes or N for no Delete Array To perform the deletion of the currently displayed IM array press Enter on Delete Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y for yes and N for no Identifier Displays the identifier of this array Type Displays the RAID type Scan Order Displays the scan order of the array Size MB Displays the size of this array 292 Core I O Card Utilities Status Displays the status of this array SAS Topology Screen The SAS Topology screen presents a view of the adapter s SAS hierarchy and provides other user functionality To access SAS Topology press Enter on SAS Topology from the Adaptor Properties screen Figure C 4 SAS Topology Screen Expander Closed 4 HP iLO Remote Serial Console Window jangogsp Microsoft Internet Explorer provided E K Zoom In Out Settings SAS1068 14 01 00 The following objects along with their significant properties are shown e Adapter e PHYS e Expanders Enclosures e Attached
98. fs0 EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK gt mptutil MPTUTIL 1 01 12 00 Vendor Device Choice ID ID Bus Device 0 1000h 0054h 14h 01h LSI Logic SAS1068 Host Adapter 1 Refresh b Press Enter 4 To update the firmware use the mptutil command 5 Reset the controller fs0 gt reset The mptutil commands and functions are listed in Table C 1 and described in the following sections Table C 1 mptutil Commands and Functions Command Function mptutil f lt firmware_file gt Updating HBA RISC firmware on the controller mptutil o g lt x86_file gt lt fcode_file gt Updating EFI driver on first controller mptutil o vpd c 0 Viewing VPD information Parameters in lt gt are optional A space is required between command line options and their parameters The following sections describe the mptutil commands and functions Flashing Firmware on First Controller To update the HBA RISC firmware on the first controller follow these steps 1 Atthe fsO gt prompt entermptutil f lt firmware file gt c 0 2 Atthe fsO gt prompt enter reset The filename is optional and you are prompted for a filename if omitted Another way for the firmware to be flashed is done without your knowledge When mptutil is executed and a SAS HBA is in any state other than ready or operational mptut il immediately performs a firmware download boot The firmware provided by you to do the firmware download boot is immediately flashed after the
99. hard drive 2 Swap the hard drive with one from another slot or with a known good spare 3 Remove and reinstall the hard drive backplane Check that connectors are fully engaged Installation Troubleshooting 119 4 5 Replace the hard drive backplane Replace the SAS core I O card Console Problems Console problems during installations can be caused by faulty interconnections If you are experiencing monitor keyboard or mouse problems follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Check the monitor controls Adjust contrast and brightness as required Inspect all power and interconnecting cables Check that all console connectors are fully engaged Check that all iLO 2 MP board connectors are fully engaged Exercise the appropriate self test features of the console software Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware HP makes every effort to provide you with the most current version of firmware However there can be instances when this is not the case To ensure you have the latest version of the firmware running on the server download the latest version of the firmware from the Web and create a CD to install the firmware on the server Downloading the Latest Version of the Firmware To download the latest version of the firmware from the Web follow these steps NUON Sl Ne Go to http www hp com go bizsupport Select download drivers and software Select Itanium based servers from the Server cate
100. help bch ma For more help on one of the commands above at the prompt type help bch COMMAND Example D 3 help configuration command Shell gt help configuration Configuration commands cpuconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure cpus date Display or set date err Display or set error level esiproc Make an ESI call errdump View Clear logs info Display hardware information monarch View or set the monarch processor palproc Make a PAL call salproc Make a SAL call time Display or set time ver Displays version info Type help followed by command name for full documentation on that command Type help a to display a list of all commands EFI POSSE Commands 321 Example D 4 help cpuconfig command Shell gt help cpuconfig CPUCONFIG cpu on off cpu Specifies which cpu to configure on off Specifies to configure or deconfigure a cpu Notes 1 Cpu status will not change until next boot Examples To deconfigure CPU 0 fs0 gt cpuconfig 0 off CPU will be deconfigured on the next boot To display configuration status of cpus fs0 gt cpuconfig lt CPU configuration data displayed gt Example D 5 help ioconfig command Shell gt help ioconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure IO components or settings IOCONFIG fast_init wol on off fast_init Specifies device connection policy setting wol Specifies System Wake On LAN setting on off Specifies to configure or deconfigur
101. in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION PCI PCI X slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by core I O cards Do not place any other PCI PCI X expansion cards in slots 1 and 2 Slots 1 and 2 are not hot plug capable CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the LAN Core I O Card To remove the LAN core I O card follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 Disconnect all external cables attached to the card 3 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 4 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 5 Remove the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw counterclockwise until it is free from the chassis 6 Grasp the card by the edges and lift it out of the chassis Replacing the LAN Core I O Card To replace the LAN core I O card follow these steps 1 Insert the replacement card into the dedicated LAN core I O slot a Insert the tab at the base of the card bulkhead into the slot in the chassis b Align the card connectors with the slots on the I O board c Apply firm even pressure to bot
102. installation procedure involves the following steps Preparing the server Installing the controller board Connecting the Controller to Other Devices Completing the adapter installation procedure including updating the firmware and installing drivers Windows Installation Procedure B 17 Windows Quick Installation Procedure Ore SA D 10 11 12 13 Power down the server Unplug the ac power cord from the power outlet Unplug the power cord from the server Install the controller hardware If necessary install additional physical drives The number of drives in the server determines the RAID level that is autoconfigured when the server is powered up next step Power up the server Update the controller firmware When the firmware update process is complete the server reboots and runs through a POST procedure This POST procedure halts briefly during controller initialization and prompts you to open ORCA Open ORCA e Ifusing a headless console press the Esc 8 key combination e Otherwise press the F8 key Configure the logical boot drive and then exit from ORCA Load the controller driver from EBSU on the Smart Setup media To load the driver select Load OEM Boot Drivers in EBSU For more information about Smart Setup refer to the HP Smart Setup Guide on the Smart Setup media Run Express Setup When you have finished installing the operating system as directed during the Express Setup procedure
103. is damaged contact your HP customer service representative immediately The service representative initiates appropriate action through the transport carrier or the factory and assists you in returning the equipment Unloading the Server with a Lifter A WARNING Use caution when using a lifter Because of the weight of the HP Integrity rx3600 server you must center the server on the lifter forks before lifting it off the pallet to avoid injury A NOTE HP recommends that you follow local guidelines when lifting equipment To unload the server from the pallet using a lifter follow these steps 1 Unpack the server 2 Unroll the bottom corrugated tray on the side where you will place the lifter and slide the server as close to that edge of the pallet as possible 3 Break off any foam packaging that can prevent you from fully inserting the lifter under the server we IMPORTANT Do not remove the foam packaging from the corners of the server This foam is required to elevate the server and enable the forks of the lifter to be inserted under the server Insert the lifter forks under the server Roll the lifter forward carefully until it is fully positioned against the side of the server Raise the server slowly off the pallet until it clears the pallet cushions ND OP Roll the lifter and server away from the pallet Do not raise the server any higher than necessary when moving it to the rack Unpacking and Inspe
104. memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 ES NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however z the top cover release lever must be open 4 Press the button located in the center of the memory carrier assembly to release the extraction handles Figure 6 12 A CAUTION Manipulate the extraction handles with care failure to observe this caution can result in damage to the extraction handles 5 Pull up on the extraction handles and rotate them outward approximately 90 degrees Figure 6 12 204 Removing and Replacing Server Components ES NOTE The extraction handles latch into the open position with an audible click 6 Pull the extraction handles to lift the memory carrier assembly out of the chassis Figure 6 12 ES NOTE To avoid damage to the extraction handles HP recommends rotating the handles inward and snapping them into the locked position when servicing the system DIMMs or any time the carrier is out of the chassis Before replacing the memory carrier press the button to release the extraction handles Use the handles to replace the memory carrier into the chassis Figure 6 12 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Extraction Handles Extraction Handle Release Button Front Bezel Processor Board Assembl Access Door Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly CAUTION Ensu
105. n 58 Power Supply Loading Guidelimesiz ii A a Aaa 58 Installing a Hot Swappable Power SuPplV aan pia 59 Removing and Replacing Hot Swappable Disk Drive Fillers cccssscsssssessusenesseessensesseesees 59 Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Fillet csistesitcsssasesetsonivontsvwnntoveavenevannesundetovuasetvonneds 60 Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive lletra ie iia 60 Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive A ai 60 Installing a Hot Pl ggable Disk Dive a 60 Installing a PCNPCEPC Te Carlista baca aaa dada 62 ECIPCIEATEC Te COn UI St a A Aa 62 PCL PCEX OBR 000 adi 63 PCL PCEXIP CIE OP P an esas troba 63 RR 63 Offline Installation of a PCI E e y a EEE AEE E A T A 64 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly ocoonconconnnnncnnnnnnnnocnronoranonnroncrancnnarnornss 65 Removing the Memory Carrier ASSemibl Y st aaa aaa 65 Replacing the Memory Carrier Asset Sato 66 Installing System Memory DIMM Scsi in ente 67 Memory Installation Conventos iia iii 68 Supported DIMM Sizes and Memory Configurati0MS coooonococnnonnnnnnonnranoranonnnrnnnnnncnnnrnnonnss 68 Mem ry boad Order prissioni i rnin ne a Ts eae Me rr a Eea ENES 68 Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines scant ote eat a 70 Tastalling Memory ieee Ad RENE R EARE ANEETA E A Paiva REEDE EREA rE EEE AEE 71 Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly ocoonconconinnnnnnncnnonconnranoranonnronaranconarnonoss 73 Removing the Processor Board Assembly aio 73 Replacing the
106. of the extraction handle release button until the side cover snaps into place A NOTE To install DIMMs into slots on the other side of the memory carrier turn the carrier 5 over to the opposite side side 0 or side 1 and repeat the installation procedure 10 Replace the memory carrier assembly and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 205 11 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 12 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 214 Removing and Replacing Server Components Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel The front bezel provides server control and port access and LED interfaces You must power off the server to remove the front bezel A NOTE The procedures in this section see the upper portion of the front bezel the lower portion of the front bezel is the processor access door Removing the Front Bezel To remove the front bezel follow these steps 1 A 90 EA 10 11 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183
107. of the iLO 2 MP LAN You can find the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN on a label on the server we IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address to the iLO 2 MP LAN and not the MAC address to the server core LAN 2 Verify that an active LAN cable on the local subnet is connected to the iLO 2 MP LAN port on the server 3 Access a PC on the same physical subnet as the server Open a DOS window on the PC 5 Atthe DOS prompt enter arp s to assign the IP address to the iLO MAC address Syntax arp s lt IP address you want to assign to the iLO MAC address gt lt iLO 2 MAC address gt Example from Windows arp s 192 0 2 1 00 00 0c 07 ac 00 6 Atthe DOS prompt enter ping followed by the IP address to verify that the iLO 2 MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address The destination address is the IP address that is mapped to the iLO MAC address Perform this task from the PC that has the ARP table entry gt Syntax ping lt IP address just assigned to the iLO MAC address gt Example from Windows Console Setup 87 ping 192 0 2 1 Use the IP address to connect to the iLO 2 MP LAN Use Web or telnet access to connect to the iLO 2 MP from a host on the local subnet and complete the rest of the LAN parameter gateway subnet Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port To configure the iLO 2 MP LAN using the RS 232 serial port follow these steps 88 we 7 IMPORTANT Do not confi
108. of them Use the arrow keys to select a SAS controller and press Enter to view and modify the selected SAS controller s properties You can view and modify the SAS controller whether it is enabled or disabled You can use the Boot Support setting in the Adapter Properties menu to change the status of this setting You must reconnect the EFI Driver in order for a new Boot Support setting to take effect The following are the descriptions for the Adapter List screen Adapter Indicates the specific SAS Controller type PCI Bus Indicates the PCI Bus number assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter 0x00 OxFF 0 255 decimal PCI Dev Indicates the PCI Device assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter range 0x00 Ox1F 0 31 decimal PCI Fne Indicates the PCI Function assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter range 0x00 0x7 0 7 decimal FW Revision Displays the Fusion MPT firmware version and type IR or IT Status Indicates whether the adapter is or is not eligible for software control enabled disabled or error Enabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either currently controlling the adapter or will attempt to control the adapter upon reload Disabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either not controlling the adapter or will discontinue control of the adapter upon reload Error Indicates that the EFI Driver encountered a problem with the adapter Viewing and modifying settings for the adapter is allowed but the information and functional
109. operating system console control over the server s power and hardware reset functionality and works with the server to enable remote network booting through a variety of methods iLO 2 refers to an Integrated Lights Out 2 management processor iLO 2 MP with the latest advanced digital video redirection technology This new feature gives you a higher performance graphics console redirection experience than with the previous iLO See the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide for complete information on the iLO 2 MP iLO2MP 349 350 Index Symbols 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly 69 210 see memory see also memory block diagram 31 load order 210 removing 204 replacing 205 slot IDs 164 211 8 Internal Port SAS HBA controller 96 283 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly 68 209 see memory see also memory block diagram 30 load order 209 removing 204 replacing 205 slot IDs 163 210 A accessing graphic console using VGA 93 accessing iLO 2 MP with SMASH SM CLP 93 with TUI CO command 92 with vKVM IRC 93 with Web browser 91 activity LED 171 acu utility 117 adapter path 338 slot number 338 advanced configuration and power interface ACPI 35 ARP ping commands 87 B backup see system backup block diagrams 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly 31 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly 30 T O subsystem 26 power 33 system 155 boot EFI boot manager 317 from file
110. options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to be used when booting the device Press Enter to initiate booting using the selected boot option Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows 133 4 Once Windows begins loading wait for the Special Administration Console SAC to become available The SAC interface provides a text based administration tool that is available from the system console For example Loading Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Computer is booting SAC started and initialized Use the ch command for information about using channels Use the command for general help SAC gt For details see the SAC online help type at the SAC gt prompt 5 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Control B to exit the console and return to the MP Main menu To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main menu Shutting Down Microsoft Windows CAUTION Do not shut down Windows Server 2003 SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the system to restart or shut down immediately and can result in the loss of data Use the Windows Start menu or the shutdown command to shut
111. page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 256 Removing and Replacing Server Components A Customer Replaceable Units Information This appendix provides the following information for each field replaceable unit e Manufacturing part number e Description e Replacement part number e Exchange part number This appendix addresses the following topic e Parts Only Warranty Service e Customer Self Repair e Customer Replaceable Units List Parts Only Warranty Service Your HP Limited Warranty may include a parts only warranty service Under the terms of parts only warranty service HP will provide replacement parts free of charge For parts only warranty service CSR part replacement is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service Customer Self Repair HP products are designed with many Customer Replaceable Units CRU parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement If during the diagnosis period HP or HP service providers or service partners identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CRU part HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement There are three categories of CRU parts Yes Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be
112. provides a local serial port connection and a LAN connection both of which can be used to access an OS s text serial console The iLO 2 MP LAN can also be used to access the VGA console of an OS if the iLO 2 Advanced Pack for Integrity is purchased At this time the 174 Troubleshooting integrated remote console feature for redirecting the VGA is only supported on the Windows OS For instance by default HP UX is configured to use text serial as a console using the iLO 2 MP as its console device The iLO 2 MP provides this text serial console through the iLO 2 MP LAN and through the RS 232 console RS 232 port on the core I O board The primary console device used by any OS can be set in the EFI interfaces For instance Linux can be set to use a text serial console using the iLO 2 MP as its console device Windows can be set to operate properly in headless mode with the iLO 2 MP as its headless console device and the VGA as its graphics console Troubleshooting the Server Interface RS 232 connection A dumb terminal or PC running terminal emulation software is attached to the iLO 2 MP local port and does not respond to a Control B CR key sequence and the terminal is running 9600 baud 8 data bits and is ONLINE The solution is that the iLO 2 MP is not operational or functional Examine the following LEDs e iLO2 MP heartbeat LED e BMC heartbeat LED Replace the core I O board FRU if both heartbeat LEDs are not flashing green If bot
113. reboots and runs through a POST procedure This POST procedure halts briefly during controller initialization and prompts you to open ORCA Option ROM Configuration for Arrays 5 Open ORCA See Configuring the Array page 115 e Ifusing a headless console press Esc 8 e Otherwise press F8 6 Configure the logical boot drive and exit from ORCA Depending on the OS additional device drivers and management agents must be installed See the User guide for the specific HP Smart Array Controller at http h20000 www2 hp com bizsupport TechSupport Home jsp under the specific HP Smart Array Controller product for installation procedures The latest firmware drivers utilities software and documentation for HP Integrity servers are available on the support page of the HP Web site at http www hp com support itaniumservers Connecting External Storage we IMPORTANT Not all OSs support external drives To connect external storage follow these steps 1 Power off the server 2 Connect an external SAS cable to the external port of the controller ES NOTE You do not have to disconnect any internal drives on shared internal port 11 because the controller preferentially discovers devices attached to port 1E However drives on the shared internal port are unavailable until you disconnect the external storage device 3 Tighten the lock screws on the cable connector 4 Attach the other end of the cable t
114. registration information and click Next 5 Click the depot that corresponds with the OS you are running to download the drivers utilities and manpages for the Smart Array Controllers 6 Inthe Documents column next to the Download Software column click Installation Instructions to download instructions for using the Software Distributor tool to install the drivers utilities and manpages Installing Software for Smart Array Series Controllers The drivers utilities and manpages for the Smart Array Series Controllers contained in the RAID 01 bundle downloaded depot can be installed using Software Distributor SD SD is a tool for installing software on HP UX host systems SD can also be used to remove software from HP UX systems The RAID 01 bundle is composed of several files that will be copied to the appropriate directories on the host system View these files in the opt raidsa bin directory The instructions for using SD to install or remove the drivers utilities and manpages for the Smart Array series controllers can be viewed at the HP Software Depot Procedure B 14 Verifying the Installation After the system reboots verify that the installation was successful by following these steps 1 Enter the swlist command swlist When running HP UX 11i v2 the generated output will look like this RAID 01 B 11 23 0612 RAID SA Supptd HW A7143A A9890A A9891A 2 Enter the ioscan kfnd ciss command ioscan kfnd ciss If the Smart Array Co
115. replace the core T O FRU board See Management Subsystem page 170 for information The problem is fixed when the iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED and the system health LED are steady green Still no iLO 2 MP prompt on system console and front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running the OS Nothing may be logged for this condition Note if the iLO 2 MP is off the system health will be off as well 1 Verify that the proper terminal type is set Supported settings are hpterm VT100 default and VTUTF8 2 Verify that the RS232C configuration matches between the server and the local console or modem See Supported Configurations page 155 for information 3 Look for loose damaged or disconnected power and signal cables on the I O backplane FRU The problem is fixed when the MP Main Menu appears on the system console and the system health is steady green 144 Troubleshooting Table 5 3 Basic Entry Class Troubleshooting continued Step 4b Condition Cannot see the EFI prompt on the system console and front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running the OS Action Nothing may be logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Examine the state of the three LEDs located in the back left corner of the chassis visible through the perforation
116. requirements for slots one through ten on the PCI PCI X PCle I O backplane e PCI X slots 1 and 2 are reserved for use by the core I O cards SAS core I O card in slot 1 and Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card in slot 2 Slots 1 and 2 are not hot pluggable Install only supported SAS and LAN core I O cards in slots 1 and 2 Depending upon the number and type of SAS core I O cards installed on the system the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card may be installed in slot 10 e Slots 3 and 4 are swtiched PCIe x8 PCIe SAS core I O is installed in slots 3 and 4 on the PCI PCI X PCle IOBP e Slots 5 and 6 are nonswitched PCIe x8 e Slots 7 and 8 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 7 and 8 is PCI X 133 MHz e Slots 9 and 10 are shared slots These two slots are limited by bus mode or frequency related incompatibilities EA IMPORTANT Slots 9 and 10 on the PCI PCI X PCIe I O backplane have the same configuration limitations as slots 9 and 10 on the PCI PCI X I O backplane See Shared Slots page 63 for more information Shared Slots Shared slots have card compatibility restrictions If one of the shared slots is occupied the card added to the second slot is limited by the configuration of the occupied slot If the new card has a slower capability than the current bus configuration it fails If the new card has a faster capability than the current bus configuration it only runs at the slower bus mode and frequency of th
117. rx3600 air baffle n a AY Cables Customer Replaceable Units List 259 Table A 2 CRU List continued Manufacturing Part Description Replacement Part Exchange Part Customer Self Number Number Number Repair AB463 2003A Display board USB signal cable AB463 2003A n a AY connects to UCIO board AB463 2005A Power cable internal memory fan AB463 2005A n a BY AB463 2006A Power cable internal CPU fan AB463 2006A n a CY AB463 2011A Doorbell board cable AB463 2011A n a AY AB463 2012C CPU power pod cable AB463 2012C n a AY AB463 2017A SAS data A cable AB463 2017A n a AY AB463 2017A SAS data B cable n a AY 5184 1894 Serial console cable 5184 1894 n a AY Power Cords 8120 6903 Power Cord U S 8120 6903 n a AY 8121 0871 Power Cord Australia 8121 0871 n a AY 8121 0070 Power Cord 8121 0070 n a AY 8120 6898 Power Cord UK amp HK amp Singapore 8120 6898 n a AY 8121 0161 Power Cord 8121 0161 n a AY 8120 6895 Power Cord 8120 6895 n a AY 8121 0675 Power Cord 8121 0675 n a AY 8120 6897 Power Cord Sweden amp Denmark 8120 6897 n a AY 8120 6899 Power Cord Europe 8120 6899 n a AY 8121 0802 Power Cord 8121 0802 n a AY 8121 0974 Power Cord 8121 0974 n a AY 1 N new install CY with a system board replacement 260 Customer Replaceable Units Information B Upgrades This appendix address the following topics e I O Backplane Upgrade
118. s command shortened output Entering the sautil lt device file s gt command provides an abbreviated listing of information for the Smart Array Controller and all connected devices including the firmware version currently in ROM sautil dev ciss5 s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk kkkk KKKK SAUTILSupportutilit y kkkk KKKK xxx x for the HP SmartArray RAID Controller Family KKKK KKKK version A 02 11 RRR KKK x C Copyright 2003 2006 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DRIVER INFORMATION Driver Stater AN eR R ea READY CONTROLLER INFORMATION gt 255225 2214 AA A A ls e Controller Product Number P400 Controller Product Name HP PCIe SmartArray P400 Hardware Path 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Serial Numbers hae See baa PA5360BBFSW20N Device Fue ta ta ea tea ths dev ciss5 Hardware Revisli0M vB Firmware Revision in ROM 1 96 H of Logical Drives 2 of Physical Disks Configured 4 of Physical Disks Detected 4 o o content has been omitted O kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkk x x End of SAUTIL Output Cece eee eee ee ee k k
119. size of the smallest drive in the array In arrays consisting of different sized drives excess space on larger drives are unusable The View Array screen enables you to view the current array configuration To access the View Array screen press Enter on the View Existing Array field from the Select New Array Type screen Core I O Card Configuration 103 You can perform the following actions on the View Array screen e To view the next array press N e To create a new array press C Array Identifier Type Scan Order Size MB Status Bay Device Identifier RAID Disk Hot Spr Drive Status 104 Installing the System Displays the number of this array Displays the identifier of this array Displays the RAID type Displays the scan order of the array Displays the size of the array Displays the status of the array Displays the bay in which devices are located Displays the device identifier Specifies the devices disks that make up an IM array If RAID Disk is Yes the device is part of an IM array if No the device is not part of an IM array This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The device is not large enough to mirror existing data on the primary drive e This disk has been selected as the hot spare for the IM array Specifies whether a device is the hot spare for an IM array If hot spare is Yes
120. sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Intel Montvale processors cannot be intermixed with similar Montecito processors Processor speed and cache size must be identical for all processors in a system Whether upgrading replacing or adding an additional processor to ensure compatibility use processors with identical part numbers Failure to observe this caution results in performance degradation or system failure CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Processor Load Order The server can have up to two dual core processors on the processor board The slots on the processor board are labeled Module 0 and Module 1 Table 6 8 lists the processor load sequence Table 6 8 Processor Load Order Dual Core Processor 1 Module 0 2 Module 1 Required Tools To install and remove processors use the processor install tool fastened to the processor board Removing a Dual Core Processor To remove a dual core processor follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cable
121. telnet or SSH client and enter the default host name The default host name is the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address The iLO 2 MP Log In window opens 5 Log in using the default user name and password CAUTION When DHCP is enabled the system is vulnerable to security risks because anyone can access the iLO 2 MP until you change the default user name and password HP strongly recommends you assign user groups and rights before proceeding Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using ARP Ping 86 A NOTE You can use ARP Ping regardless of the status of DHCP unless an IP address has ever been acquired using DHCP Once an IP address is assigned using DHCP ARP Ping is permanently disabled Some DHCP server options can cause the apparent issuance of ARP Ping to the iLO 2 MP which will negate the DHCP DDNS method The Address Resolution Protocol ARP and Packet Internet Grouper Ping utility uses ARP packets to ping or discover a device on the local network segment The IP address you assign to the server must use the same network segment or subnet as the computer assigning the address ARP does not work across routed or switched networks Use the ARP Ping utility to assign a static IP address when you do not have access to the RS 232 serial port or when DHCP is not available Installing the System ES NOTE ARP Ping operational issues e The PC and the server must be on the same physical subnet
122. terminal emulation program documentation to verify which input keys are supported If problems occur using any of the function keys or HOME END PGUP PGDN it is recommended that the alternate keys be used There are general key inputs throughout the configuration utility that apply on all screens F1 Help Context sensitive help for the cursor resident field Arrow Keys Select Item Up down left right movement to position the cursor Home End Select Item Up down left right movement to position the cursor Change Item Items with values in brackets are modifiable Numeric keypad and numeric keypad minus update a modifiable field to its next relative value Esc Abort Exit Escape aborts the current context operation and or exits the current screen User confirmation is solicited as required if changes have been made by user If you are using a serial console pressing Esc causes a delay of several seconds before it takes effect This is normal system behavior and is not an error Enter Execute lt item gt Executable items are indicated by highlighted text and a different background color Press Enter to execute the field s associated function Configuration Utility Screens All SAS BIOS configuration utility screens contain the following areas starting at the top of the screen Header area Identifies the utility and version number Menu area Gives the title of the current screen and on screens other than the A
123. test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test Example D 7 boottest early cpu off command Shell gt boottest early cpu off BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable Selftest Setting booting valid On OS speedy boot aware early cpu Skip this test late _cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test cpucontig Use this command to display the configured or deconfigured state of processors in the system and enables the user to configure or reconfigure processors Syntax cpuconfig lt cpu gt lt on off gt Parameters lt cpu gt specify a processor lt on off gt state to set the processor to Operation Issue cpuconfig with no parameters to display the configured or deconfigured status of all processors To reconfigure CPUs specify a CPU number and a state on or off If you enter a valid state that is different from the current state of a CPU its status changes on the next boot 324 Utilities A NOTE The last remaining configured CPU in a system cannot be deconfigured Example D 8 cpuconfig command Shell gt cpuconfig PROCESSOR INFORMATION of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Slot CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None 1F 01 B1 Active 1 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None 1F 01 B1 Active Example D 9 cpuconfig 2 command
124. the Front Bezel car A 216 Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly ooconconcnnccnncnnononnnronoranonnonnnrnnonncranoranonnnons 217 Removing the Processor Board Assembly nte id iaa 217 Replacing the Processor Board Assembly isc tania oa 218 Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor Acces o ia as 218 Processor Load OLA bois nin aa a A N E A E T ANS 219 Required TOG LS dE A aaa 219 Removing a Dual Core ProC SSOT srrdiatd ii dt ER A id dit 219 Installing Dual Core PROCESS moria dd a a A A a ace 223 Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly aiii i 225 Removing the I O Board ASS ta dao 225 Replacing the 1 O Beard Assembly Aa 228 Removing and Replacing the System Battery ive deiiriecaosiadasi ndice ada cba 230 R moving th Systemi Batterye Adi A 230 Replacing the System BA a ia ia 231 Removing and Replacing the I O Voltage Regulator Modulle ccccsccessescsseeseeeeseesseenaeenseeseens 232 Removing the VO VRIM rai a td A vee A a td aia 232 Table of Contents 9 Replacing the TO VR A Aa E A AA Ea 233 Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module msi italia ii 233 REMOVING the IPM Dirt NAAA meobens 234 Replacing the TONE as 235 Removing and Replacing the Core I O BOT ici li ta cl iaa i 236 Removing the Core VO Borda rca aaa 237 Replacing the Cote T O Borda tn Ai A tit a 237 Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board DattelViicseoiicnnnscretaonoiraccnntii ida cxtesbervusdes no nano dead n 238 Removing the
125. the device is used as a hot spare for the IM array if No the device is not used as a hot spare for the IM array Only one hot spare per IM array is permitted A hot spare is not required in an IM A hot spare can be specified at array creation or any time after creation provided the array is made up of 5 disks or fewer This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The array already has a hot spare e The array is made up of the maximum number of devices 6 e The device isn t large enough to mirror existing data on the primary The hot spare drive must be greater than or equal to the size of any drive in any IM volume XXXX OK Disk is online and fully functional Missing Disk is not responding Failed Disk has failed Initalizing Disk is initializing CfgOffln Disk is offline at host s request User Fail Disk is marked failed at host s request Offline Disk is offline for some other reason Inactive Disk has been set inactive Not Syncd Data on disk is not synchronized with the rest of the array Primary Disk is the primary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Secondary Disk is the secondary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Wrg Type Device is not compatible for use as part of an IM array Too Small Disk is too small to mirror existing data Max Dsks Maximum 4 of disks allowed for this type of Array reached and or Max
126. the info io command Shell gt info io I O INFORMATION BOOTABLE DEVICES Order Media Type Path 1 CDROM Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 2 1 Usb 0 0 CDROM Entry0 HD Part1 Sig00000000 2 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOAO3 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C5000034749D Lun0 HD Part1 Sig4EE76936 BE45 47FA 9AC7 BOECF2D912F2 3 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOAO3 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C50000347735 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig92C8CB4C E0F2 11DA 8002 D6217B60E588 4 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOAO3 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C50000347735 Lun0 HD Part3 Sig92C8CB7E E0F2 11DA 8004 D6217B60E588 Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1303 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 0 00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1302 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 1 00 00 01 02 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 2 I O Backplane Upgrade 267 00 00 02 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 0 00 00 02 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 1 00 00 02 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 2 2 00 14 01 00 0x1000 0x0054 01 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 1 0 00 14 02 00 0x1000 0x0054 02 Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 400 Pci 2 0 00 15 01 00 0x1000 0x000F 07 Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 500 Pci 1 0 00 15 01 01 0x1000 0x000F 07 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 1 1 00 15 02 00 Ox8086 0x1079 08 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 2 0 00 15 02 01 0x8086 0x1079 08 Acpi HW
127. the labeling on the cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel When reconnecting these cables you must match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 10 Disconnect the SAS data and power cables from the connectors on the SAS backplane Figure 6 34 250 Removing and Replacing Server Components 11 Remove the interconnect board air baffle Figure 6 35 a Insert your finger into the opening on the interconnect board air baffle and pull upward to release the air baffle from the chassis b Lift the air baffle out of the chassis at an angle 12 Remove the SAS backplane See Removing the SAS Backplane Board page 247 13 Insert your fingers into the handle on the interconnect board and push the board toward the front of the chassis to unplug it from the socket on the midplane board Figure 6 36 14 Lift the interconnect board out of the chassis Figure 6 36 Figure 6 35 Interconnect Board Air Baffle Front of Chassis Finger Hole Removing and Replacing the Interconnect Board 251 Figure 6 36 Interconnect Board Removal and Replacement Interconnect Board Handle Connector to Display Board Connector to SAS Backplane Board LATA d PASTS Replacing the Interconnect Board To replace the interconnect board follow these steps A CAUTION Handle the interconnect bo
128. the memory carrier assembly cover follow these steps 1 2 Unlock the cover release lever Turn the cam 90 degrees counterclockwise Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover and memory carrier assembly cover from the chassis Figure 3 1 Slide the memory carrier assembly cover toward the left side of the server to free it from the center of the chassis Lift the cover off the chassis Figure 3 2 Installing Additional Components 57 Figure 3 2 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover Top Cover Cover Release Lever Latch Unlatch Memory Carrier Assembly Cover Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover To replace the memory carrier assembly cover follow these steps 1 Position the cover onto the opening above the memory carrier assembly 2 Slide the cover toward the right side of the server until it is flush with the center chassis wall push firmly 3 Slide the top cover forward until it is flush with the front of the chassis 4 Push the cover release lever down into the latched position Figure 3 1 5 Lock the cover release lever by turning the cam 90 degrees clockwise Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply The server can have one or two hot swappable power supplies These power supplies are located at the rear of the server The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of one power supply You can install or replace a hot swappable power supply us
129. the open position Figure 6 17 page 214 9 Remove the DIMM from the slot Figure 6 13 shows the memory carrier assembly removed from the chassis Figure 6 13 Memory Carrier Assembly Release tabs Extraction Handles Closed Memory Carrier Assembly Side cover Extraction Handles release Button Memory Carrier Assembly Side Cover Side 0 Memory Boards Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 207 Figure 6 14 shows the memory carrier with the side cover removed Figure 6 14 Memory Carrier Assembly with Side Cover Removed 4 DIMM Memory Retaining Slot Retaining Slot Memory Installation Conventions Before installing memory read and understand the following memory installation conventions e Supported DIMM Sizes and Memory Configurations e Memory Load Order e DIMM slot IDs Supported DIMM Sizes and Memory Configurations The standard server configuration includes an 8 DIMM memory carrier which contains two 4 DIMM memory boards An optional high capacity memory configuration with a 24 DIMM memory carrier containing a pair of 12 DIMM memory boards is available with this server System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards The minimum server configuration requires at least one memory pair in the 8 DIMM memory carrier and at least one memory quad group of four DIMMs in the 24 DIMM memory carrier The following are th
130. the size of any drive in any IM volume XXXX OK Disk is online and fully functional Missing Disk is not responding Failed Disk has failed Initalizing Disk is initializing CfgOffln Disk is offline at host s request User Fail Disk is marked failed at host s request Offline Disk is offline for some other reason Inactive Disk has been set inactive Not Syncd Data on disk is not synchronized with the rest of the array Primary Disk is the primary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Secondary Disk is the secondary disk for a 2 disk mirror and is OK Wrg Type Device is not compatible for use as part of an IM array Too Small Disk is too small to mirror existing data Max Dsks Maximum of disks allowed for this type of Array reached and or Maximum of total IM disks on a controller reached No SMART Disk doesn t support SMART cannot be used in an RAID array Wrg Intfc Device interface SAS differs from existing IM disks Indicates whether device SMART is predicting device failure Yes No Indicates the size of the device in megabytes megabyte 1024 x 1024 1 048 576 If the device is part of a two disk array this field reflects the size of the array not the size of the individual disk If the device is part of a three or more disk array this field is the size that the disk makes up within the array When creating a striped array the usable size of the array is determined by the number of drives times the
131. their corresponding LED states Manageability Reset Button The manageability reset button with pinhole access from the rear of the server enables you to reset the iLO 2 MP You can also use it to reset user specified values to factory default values 170 Troubleshooting LED State Link Status Blinking green Activity Solid green Link with no activity Off No link Speed Solid amber 100 MB Off 10 MB Press and release the reset button quickly to soft reset the iLO 2 MP Press the reset button and hold it for more than four seconds to hard reset the iLO 2 MP A hard reset returns user specified values to factory default values The following values are reset e Serial terminal baud settings e User names and passwords Manageability Status LED The manageability status LED indicates the state and health of the iLO 2 MP It is visible from the rear of the server Table 5 28 lists manageability status LED states and their definitions Table 5 28 Manageability Status LED LED State Definition Off iLO 2 MP is not responding Steady amber Self test 0 5 Hz flashing green Heartbeat 1 Hz flashing amber ROM error I O Subsystem The I O subsystem includes SAS SATA SCSI DVD HDD and core I O devices Verifying Hard Disk Drive Operation A Each hard disk drive has an activity LED indicator on the front of the drive NOTE On HP Integrity rx3600 servers only the activity LED is use
132. to support up to eight Lower Bus Adapter LBA chips Each LBA chip interfaces with the SBA in the zx2 chip through one or multiple rope interfaces as follows e One LBA chip uses a single rope interface used by core I O to support a single 32 bit 33 MHz PCI slot e Three LBA chips use a single rope interface one used by core I O and two are for customer use to support dual 64 bit 66 MHz PCI X slots e Two LBA chips use dual rope interfaces both are for customer use to support two single 64 bit 133 MHz PCI X slots e Two LBA chips use two quad rope interfaces both are for customer use to support two single 64 bit 266 MHz PCI X slots System Power BPS and I O VRM The two bulk power supply CRUs in the rx3600 chassis provide N 1 redundancy Each power supply CRU is identified as 0 and 1 for logging purposes only There are no LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel for the power supplies 164 Troubleshooting Power supply CRU failures are identified visually by a single green LED that is turned off when one or both of the power supplies fail Power supply failures are also logged as IPMI events by voltage sensor logic and identified as power supply CRU failures on the front LED panel The I O VRM CRU located beside the core I O board CRU provides all I O subsystem dc power Power Subsystem Behavior System For rx3600 servers each bulk power supply CRU provides 1200 watts of dc power from a nominal 120 V ac 50 60 Hz The Baseboard M
133. up to rotation speed during system boot To reduce the power requirement stress on the backplane a delay is introduced between drive spin ups Direct Attached Spinup Delay Direct Attached Max Targets Expander Spinup Delay Expander Max Target Devices Time in seconds between each disk drive spin up default 3 seconds Number of disk drives that spin up at the same time default 1 drive Expanders are not supported Expanders are not supported HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 297 PHY Properties Screen The PHY Properties screen enables you to view and modify PHY specific settings To access PHY Properties press Enter on the PHY Properties field from the Advanced Adaptor Properties screen You can perform the following actions from PHY Properties e To display the next PHY press N e To display the previous PHY press P e To reset the Link Error Counts for this PHY or all PHYs press Enter on Reset Link Error Counts Resetting Link Error Counts issues a PHY Link Error Reset The following prompt displays when you press Enter Are you sure you want to reset Phy error counts Reset error counts for this Phy only Reset error counts for all Phys Cancel A NOTE The Link Error Settings values on this screen display the current values for this PHY only and are not modifiable To modify the Threshold values you must return to Advanced Adapter Properties screen PHY Displays the PHY number current inform
134. when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the SAS Backplane Board To remove the SAS backplane board follow these steps 1 N DTP amp 10 11 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 Remove the air baffle Figure 6 33 Remove the clear plastic cover Slide the SAS drives and fillers approximately two inches out of the drive bays See Removing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 188 CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS backplane board If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot Disconnect the SAS cables from the connectors on the SAS backplane board Figure 6 34 Remove the interconnect board air baffle Figure 6 35 See Removing the Interconnect Board page 250 Pu
135. which enhances security capabilities for the server if it is running the HP UX operating system The TPM is a security chip that is unique to the server It performs key security processes independent of other hardware components The TPM creates and stores additional encryption keys at the system root The encryption keys created by the TPM encapsulate system application encryption keys to provide an additional layer of security for sensitive system data Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module 233 The fundamental capabilities of the TPM include e Platform authentication e Sensitive information protection e Data integrity e System privacy A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server We IMPORTANT You must run the supported version of the HP UX operating system to utilize the TPM security component Removing the TPM To remove the TPM follow these steps 1 Backup the current TPM settings
136. 0 4 2 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 20 Gigabit from left LAN private Core I O LAN 194 Removing and Replacing Server Components Table 6 1 PCI PCI X I O Paths continued Slot Function Location HP UX Device Path EFI Device Path with Path as viewed from rear of chassis 3 T O with 3rd from 0 7 1 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1o 266 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card 4 I O with 4th from 0 3 1 Acpi HWP0002 300 Pci 1o 266 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card 5 I O with 5th from 0 6 1 Acpi HWP0002 600 Pci 1o 133 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card 6 I O with 6th from 0 2 1 Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1o 133 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card 7 I O with 7th from 0 5 1 Acpi HWP0002 500 Pci 1o 66 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card shared with slot 8 8 I O with 8th from 0 5 2 Acpi HWP0002 500 Pci 20 66 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card shared with slot 7 9 I O with 9th from 0 1 1 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1o 66 MHz left 64 bit public PCI X card shared with slot 10 10 I O with 10th 0 1 2 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 20 66 MHz from left 64 bit public PCI X nearest card to core shared I O with slot board 9 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card 195 Table 6 1 PCI PCI X I O Paths continued Function with Path Slot Location as HP UX Device Path
137. 1 8 Front Panel Control Port and LED Locations UID Locator Button and LED DVD Drive System Health LEDs Disk Drive Status And Activity LEDs USB Port Power f DVD Drive Button LED Disk N LED Init Drives Button NANNNINAN dada nc 0d Disk Drive Slot Availability Indicators e E ee e gt pen mr e e p 140004 Table 1 4 lists the front panel controls and LED states 36 Overview Table 1 4 Front Panel Controls and LEDs LED Function States Status Manually powers the server Off No ac power on and off Power Button Green Full power is on Yellow Standby power is on Helps locate a particular Off UID button is not activated server within a rack of 7 UID Button servers You can remotely Blue UID button is activated activate this button usin various system utilities Init Button Resets the system irrecoverably halts all system processing and I O activity and restarts the server Provides information about Off System is off the system status Green Normal operation System Health LED Flashing amber Warning Flashing red System fault Indicates the status of Off System is off internal serviceable components This LED Green System health is good maintains its state when the system is in standby mode Flashing amber System health is degraded system power turned off Flashing red System health is critical bu
138. 119 internal health LEDs 37 IP address static assigning using ARP ping 87 assigning with LC command 88 L LAN configuration methods 85 determining configuration method 85 LAN core I O card functionality 241 link speed LEDs 44 link status LEDs 44 ports 43 removing 241 replacing 241 slot restrictions 241 LEDs 171 diagnostic panel 39 disk drive 38 DVD activity 39 external health 37 front control panel 37 front panel locations 36 iLO 2 MP LAN link speed 43 iLO 2 MP LAN link status 43 iLO 2 MP status 43 internal health 37 power button 37 power supply 44 353 rear panel locations 41 rear panel UID 44 system health 37 UID button 37 light pipes 172 load order disk drive 60 189 190 memory 68 70 209 processor 75 219 logging in to the iLO 2 MP 89 M MAC address 86 address label 86 management processor see iLO 2 MP see iLO 2 MP manual retention latch see MRL mass storage 34 see also SAS mass storage subsystem see mass storage memory 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly block diagram 31 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly slot IDs 70 164 211 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly block diagram 30 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly slot IDs 69 163 210 installation conventions 68 208 installing 71 212 introduction 29 31 load order 68 70 209 211 load order 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly 69 210 load order 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly 68 209 removing 206 supported
139. 180 Removing and Replacing the Top COVE ns tienes athena aoe arene net rnhaa tenes 181 Removme th TOP COV eres iis tose arrier sai ales a cela Me ees aad A A AA 181 Replacing the Top COVE Rata 182 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVeT cooonconicococoooncononanonanoonnonnconaranoranonnnons 182 Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVE tai 183 Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVE eamosiriorsssiatis tren adios iris 183 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit inside lii 184 Removing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unai ati iia ds 184 Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unitaria ao 185 8 Table of Contents Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power SupplY cocconconnionncnnoconnnnonoranonanonnananonnnranoranonanons 186 Power S pply Loading iden a aa 186 Removing a Hot Swappable Power SUPpIVesirvici an ceguera ada reci 186 Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Suppl ibi 187 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler oooncononncononnonnrmmerererirrirrrneros 188 Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Pileta aaa 188 Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler vajar it dida titi 188 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive ii da ati 188 Removing a Hot Pluggable Disk DIV da 188 Disk Dive toT Oro area ae aia 189 Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk DAVE pi AA Ghali tae 190 Removing and Replacing PCI PCI X PCle Card DividerS oooioconccnonnonannconnnonnanonaconanonnnconnnnonnconanonns 190 Remo
140. 2 5 Gbps two of which are switched The two 66 MHz PCI PCI X slots are shared Shared slots have many speed and mode change restrictions during hot plug add or remove operations Table 1 2 PCI PCI X PCle I O Rope Groups Slot Rope Numbers Bits Speed Function Hot Swap OLR 1 2 8 64 66 MHz Core I O Private N 3 4 10 11 x8 2 5 Gbps PCle x8 Public or Private depending upon N Core I O 5 12 13 14 15 x8 2 5 Gbps PCIe x8 Public Y 6 4 5 6 7 x8 2 5 Gbps PCle x8 Public Y 7 2 3 64 133 MHz High Speed PCI X Public Y 8 9 64 133 MHz High Speed PCI X Public Y 9 10 1 64 66 MHz General PCI X Public Y 0 32 33 MHz UCIO Private N PCle MPS Optimization For PCle based systems each PCle device has a configurable MPS maximum payload size parameter Larger MPS values can enable the optimization to gain higher performance MPS Optimization is supported on PCle systems running HP UX Open VMS and Linux System firmware level greater than 02 03 performs an optimization during boot time to set the MPS value to the largest size supported by both a PCIe root port and the devices below it The default server state is optimization disabled When disabled system firmware sets MPS to the minimum value on each PCIe device The info io command will display the current PCIe MPS optimization setting See info page 328 To enable PCIe MPS optimization use the ioconfig mps_optimize command
141. 233 TPM Location on lO Brad data aa 235 Battery Location on the Core ODO ii acid 239 Display Board LOCOS a ai 244 Display DO caia AAA RRA ASA ARA 245 Display Board Removal and Replace ni ada aaa 245 Air Baffle Removal and Replacement ii AR 248 SAS Backplane Board Removal and Replacement cra ca 249 Interconnect Board Air Baffle oonccccnnncccnnnonocnnnnnnaconononiconononaronononaronononacicnnnnnconononacinananacinons 251 Interconnect Board Removal and Replacements cian Ad ia 252 Midplane BO A A EE A TE E Ei 255 OS Reinstallation Flowchart oooccccnonoccnnnonocinnnonacinnnonaconononaconononaronononaronononnccnnnonaconnnonncinnnnnnincnns 262 Accessed Screens inthe DRV CEG Util ara os 286 Adapter Properties Sort A cia 287 Select NEW Array Typ TEA iO 289 SAS Topology Screen Expander Close unica a ct ias ata 293 SAS Topology Screen Expander OPI ai 294 Advanced Adaptor Properties Screen sivas saci i heslel crenata eatin Gila arneeern a 296 EBSU Welcome Screens icici a a ti a aaa bie 310 EBSUI Main Men tics 311 EBSU Maintain Firmware Screen ccccccccccsscccsscccseccesccccessccuccseescecsecseusceceescececsuescecuesseesecesenss 311 EBSU Maintain Firmware Update SOTO vncecinicna nai idol tia cdta ba nid tabs 312 OREA Mia MA a i Ree 314 EFI BOO Sequences ene a E E E E E E E a a eae ouaargatereee 317 List of Figures List of Tables 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6
142. 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 7 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 P blis ing Histoty Details tos di ir pas a 21 PCI PCI X VO Rope Groups ist talco a Eb lave i a exelent Caw need adenine 27 PENPCEXNPCElS YO RO pe GLODP S ie ese aaiate CA i ves ev td AR E E A AR AA ARA 28 supported Memory Contursi rata cbadtianilodahabaceaneelcnats 29 Front Panel Controls and LEDS ccccccncccnnnoniconononacicononacicononarocononarocononanocononnrrcnnnnarocononaricanananoss 37 Hot Pl ggable Disk Drive LEDS a 38 Core T OiBOard Por odisea 43 1LO 2 MP Status and LAN LEDS camela lanas cala Lian 43 System LAN Link Status and Speed LEDS ui il ii 44 Power S pply AE A a bi 44 Rear Panel UID TED a sits dave ders e dede et AE 44 DET VEL Specifications A E das gue leds A estan aah Ga hide A aden E a 47 Rack or Pedestal Installed Server Dimensions and Values ooonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnoncncnnnonnnnnnnonononononannnns 48 Syste Power perrito a lia aa 48 Additional Component Power CONSUMO vrcoenrinocinnded donna cada coin caida ended diia se 49 Environmental Specifications system processing unit with hard disk oooonocccioccnicnnnanananacano 50 Physical and Environmental Specification scincariicnd corintio sbendeaaesd 50 Installation Sequence Checklist nopal cid 54 PCI PCI X Card Slot Frequency and Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slots o
143. 43374738 HP DGO72A8B5C HPD4 BO62P5B011M00547 SAS 1 3 6 Ready RDY 70007 143374738 HP DG072A8B5C HPD4 B062P5B011RK0548 SAS 1 2 7 Ready RDY 70007 143374738 HP DG072A8B5C HPD4 B062P5B011NB0548 SAS 1 7 9 Online ONL 70007 143374738 HP DG072A8B5C HPD4 B062P5B010R10547 SAS 500605B0 0001A950 8 HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 303 StartSlot 1 Start TargetID 0 Start Bus 0 Logical drive status values Okay OKY Volume is Active and drives are functioning properly and user data is protected if the current RAID level provides data protection Degraded DGD Volume is Active and the user s data is not fully protected due to a configuration change or drive failure a data resync or rebuild may be in progress Inactive OKY Volume is inactive and drives are functioning properly and user data is protected if the current RAID level provides data protection Inactive DGD Volume is inactive and the user s data is not fully protected due to a configuration change or drive failure a data resync or rebuild may be in progress Physical device status values are as follows Online ONL The drive is operational and is part of a logical drive Hot Spare HSP The drive is a hot spare that is available for replacing a failed drive in an array Ready RDY The drive is ready for use as a normal disk drive or it can be but has not been assigned to a disk array or hot spare pool
144. 62 for more information 1 Updating the Operating System Refer to your operating system documentation for procedures on updating the operating system 264 Upgrades we Updating the Firmware IMPORTANT When performing a firmware upgrade that contains system programmable hardware FPGA EFI PSOC BMC you must properly shut down any OS that is running before starting the firmware upgrade process SFW iLO and BMC Follow these steps to update the SFW BMC and iLO2 MP firmware a SFW iLO and BMC Update the SFW BMC and iLO2 MP firmware 1 Power on the system and get to the EFI Shell prompt 2 Execute the following EFI command at the EFI Shell prompt to determine the current firmware version Shell gt info fw 3 Look for the latest firmware updates for Itanium based servers at http www hp com go bizsupport 4 If anew version of the firmware is available download it Save it to CD or copy it over the network to the system you are going to update 5 Choose one of the following two options to update the firmware e On the system you are updating follow the instructions provided in the firmware release notes to download and execute the appropriate files to update your firmware e Initiate a firmware upgrade from the HP System Insight Manager SIM as a Group Action b FPGA The FPGA firmware upgrade is performed using FTP over the iLO 2 MP LAN which must be operational Follow these steps to update the FPGA
145. 69 Table 5 26 PCI PCI X PCle Slot Rope ACPI Paths continued Physical Rope Public single at x8 15 Physical Slot OLARD Logical ACPI Path XX 0 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 4 Core I O VGA optional 1 8 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 1 Fast core storage at 66 MHz 2 8 No Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 21 Fast core LAN at 66 MHz 3 10 11 No Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 600 Pci 0 10 Pci 010 Pei 110 Pci 0 Public switched daul x8 4 10 amp 11 No Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 600 Pci 0 10 Pci 010 Pci 010 Pci 0 Public switched dual x8 5 12 13 14 amp Yes Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 700 Pci 010 Pci 0 6 Public single at x8 4 5 6 7 Yes Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 300 Pci 010 Pci 0 Management Subsystem The management subsystem consists of the iLO 2 MP and the BMC Manageability LAN LED The manageability LAN uses two LEDs viewable from the rear of the system The manageability LAN LED indicates link and activity status Table 5 27 Manageability LAN LED States and Speeds 7 2 amp 3 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 1 Public single at 133 MHz 8 9 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 500 Pci 1 Public single at 133 MHz 9 1 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 1 Public shared at 66 MHz 10 1 Yes Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 100 Pci 21 Public shared at 66 MHz Table 5 27 lists the manageability LAN link statuses and speeds with
146. 70 for information 3 Test the operation of the BMC by toggling the UID locator switch LED on the front panel The blue LED is turned on off by the BMC when the switch is toggled The problem is fixed when the BMC heartbeat LED is flashing green and the system event log resumes logging OS is non responsive hung Front panel LEDs indicate that the server power is turned on and it is either booting or running the OS system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Nothing may be logged for this condition 1 Reset the system using one of the following methods a Use the iLO 2 MP to reset the system e From the command menu of text interface via SSH or Telnet use the TC command e From the web GUI Reset through INIT or TOC signal from the Power amp Reset menu on the Virtual Devices tab For more information see the HP Integrity iLO 2 MP Operations Guide b Use a tool such as a ACX 10 Torx screwdriver or appropriately size allen wrench to depress the INIT button on the front panel to start system initialization 2 Reboot the OS 3 Obtain the system hardware status dump for root cause analysis 4 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for information The problem is fixed when the root cause h
147. 9 b Determine the DIMM slots to populate using Figure 6 15 page 210 or Figure 6 16 page 211 c Read understand and follow the general guidelines to install memory in the server See Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines page 211 6 Lay the memory carrier assembly on side 0 or side 1 so that the memory carrier side that contains the DIMM slots that require servicing faces upward Figure 6 13 7 Remove the memory carrier assembly side cover a Press the release tabs Figure 6 13 on both sides of the extraction handle release button until the side cover releases from the top center of the assembly b Rotate the side cover slightly to free the tabs from the retaining slots at the base of the assembly Figure 6 14 c Lift the side cover off the assembly Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 213 8 Install the DIMM Figure 6 17 a Align the DIMM with the correct slot located on the memory board and align the key in the connector with the notch in the DIMM b Firmly and evenly push on each end of the DIMM until it seats into the slot c Ensure the extraction levers are in the locked position Figure 6 17 Inserting DIMM into Memory Board Connector 9 Replace the memory carrier assembly side cover a Insert the side cover tabs into the retaining slots at the base of the assembly Figure 3 8 b Insert the tabs Figure 6 13 into the slots on both sides
148. 97 HP UX device path 196 197 T O paths 196 197 locator LED 44 offline installation 64 193 201 offline removal 193 201 OLA 192 OLR 193 online addition 198 online replacement 199 removing 192 replacing 192 shared slots bus mode compatibility 64 198 shared slots common configuration scenarios 63 197 shared slots frequency compatibility 64 198 shared slots restrictions 63 197 slot IDs 62 193 PCIe card see PCI PCI X PCle cards PCIe MPS optimization 28 29 enabling 28 support 28 PCIe MPS optimize ioconfig command 326 pedestal converting from rack mount 78 pedestal mount server accessing 180 ports front panel locations 36 rear panel locations 41 power 32 see also power supply block diagram 33 button 118 full state defined 93 input 81 introduction 32 off state defined 93 PR command 94 problems 118 sources 79 standby state defined 93 states 79 93 power button function 37 LED 37 power reset command see PR power subsystem see power power supplies installing hot swappable 58 loading guidelines 59 power supply LEDs 44 load order 186 removing 186 replacing 187 power supply hot swappable replace 59 powering off the server 95 manually 95 using the iLO 2 MP PC command 95 powering on the server 94 95 manually 94 using the iLO 2 MP PC command 94 PR command 94 Pre OS System Startup Environment POSSE 35 processor con
149. A follow these steps 1 Perform preparation tasks 2 Connect the cables See your user service guide for specific port information a Connect the monitor VGA cable to the appropriate VGA port on your server b Connect the keyboard USB cable to the appropriate USB port on your server c Connect the mouse USB cable to the appropriate USB port on your server 3 Power on the server The EFI Shell prompt displays Powering On and Powering Off the Server This section provides information and procedures for powering off and powering on the server This section address the following topics e Power States page 93 e Powering On the Server page 94 e Powering Off the Server page 95 Power States The server has three power states Standby power Plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the chassis the front panel power button is not turned on Full power Full power occurs when you plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle and either activate the power using the iLO 2 MP PC command or press the power button Off Unplug the power cords Table 3 14 lists the server power states Powering On and Powering Off the Server 93 Table 3 14 Power States Power States Power Cable Powered On With the iLO 2 MP Pc AC Voltage DC Voltage Plugged into Command or Front Panel Power Button Applied Applied Receptacle Pressed Standby power Yes No Yes No Full power Yes Yes Yes Yes
150. A CAUTION A hot pluggable device may require interaction with the operating system before you can safely remove it from or install it into the server Verify that the operating system supports removing and replacing disk drives while the operating system is running If the operating system does not support this feature shut down the operating system before removing or installing disk drive Failure to observe this caution can result in system failure EL NOTE The replacement disk drive must have the same product number as the disk drive that you replace Removing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive To remove a hot pluggable disk drive follow these steps 1 Push the release tab away from the drive extraction handle and pull the extraction handle outward 188 Removing and Replacing Server Components 2 Pull gently until the hot pluggable disk drive slides out of the chassis Figure 6 7 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Release Tab Extraction Handle Rotation Extraction handle Front chassis View ES NOTE For cooling purposes always leave disk drive fillers in slots that do not contain a disk drive Disk Drive Load Order Disk drive are factory loaded in the following order 1st drive load in Bay 8 2nd drive load in Bay 7 3rd drive load in bay 6 4th drive load in bay 5 5th drive load in Bay 4 6th drive load in Bay 3 7th drive load in bay 2 Removing and Replacing a Hot Plug
151. A Cea A ease 44 Rear Panel UID Locator LED and ButtoN cccconoccncnoniconononacinononarocononanicononarocononaricononacriconananoss 44 PCL PGEX P Cle Eat a e N 44 2 System EC a tl 47 Server PELUCA OO Ra ete 47 Dimensions and Values ii ii 48 EOI A A AAA A a ee ere eee 48 Electrical Specific OS nitatea A At ree 48 System Power gt Peri caOOSd eae 48 Table of Contents 3 Power Consumption and COI tr A A A a uarcen Reawenrnspneys 49 Physical and Environmental Speci Canons A aba 49 O aes 53 Safety IMTOLITA TONY E E N a SRT EEE ET ESA E Ti E iiis 53 Installation Sequence arid Checklist s spseiio AE 54 Unpacking and Inspecting here cite Neatst urea nei as eens 54 Verifying Site PEPITO AAA A A AA AAA AAA AAC 54 Inspecting the Shipping Containers tor Damage io 55 Unpacking the Servera dao AE EERE a aa deis ANTERE Aes 55 Checking the Invento rain 55 Returning Damaged Equi PIE ai Act aa 55 Unloadine the Server witha Lite AS E ita 55 Installing Additional Components t iras io iv rta i 56 Removing and Replacing the Top COVE Asis 56 Removing the Top COVER sridi da a aca data 56 Replacing the Top COVE lie A AA a A A a ERRER DVER EAA NEA in 57 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVeT ocoonnocncncocconnnocoranonanronarancnnarnornss 57 Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Coveralia di id cil od 57 Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly COVE 0 tien eae er aie creations 58 Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply cia da a A aci
152. AC power cord from the outlet and then from the server 5 Disconnect all peripheral devices from the server Procedure B 7 Installing the Controller Board 1 Remove or open the access panel 2 Select the appropriate core I O slot 3 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed 4 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Save it to use for if you later decide to remove the adapter and leave the slot empty 270 Upgrades 5 Insert the adapter into the slot and press it firmly into place The contacts on the adapter edge should be fully seated in the system board connector 6 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead 7 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card Procedure B 8 Connecting the Controller to Other Devices e Connect the Adapter to the SAS backplane See Table B 3 page 268 for a listing of Cable kit part numbers Procedure B 9 Completing the Adapter Installation To update the firmware on the server controller or hard drives use Smart Components The most recent version of a particular component is available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support Some components are al
153. AID level Yes Yes Sharing of spare drives among several arrays Yes No Assignment of multiple spare drives per array Yes No Setting of stripe size Yes No Migration of RAID level or stripe size Yes No Configuration of controller settings Yes No Expansion of an array Yes No Creation of multiple logical drives per array Yes No Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers 313 ORCA Utility To use ORCA follow these steps 1 Power on the server POST runs and any array controllers that are in the server are initialized one at a time During each controller initialization process POST halts for several seconds while an ORCA prompt message displays At the ORCA prompt e Ifyou are connected using a headless console press the Esc 8 combination e Otherwise press F8 The ORCA Main Menu displays enabling you to create view or delete a logical drive Figure C 11 ORCA Main Menu Creating a Logical Drive Using ORCA To create a logical drive using ORCA follow these steps 1 2 2 Select Create Logical Drive The screen displays a list of all available unconfigured physical drives and the valid RAID options for the system Use the Arrow keys Spacebar and Tab to navigate around the screen and set up the logical drive including an online spare drive if one is required NOTE You cannot use ORCA to configure one spare drive to be shared among several arrays Only ACU enables you to configure shared spare
154. Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 iLO 2 MP Serial Console Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Select Active Standard Error Devices Use this option to define the devices that display error messages from the system console This menu is identical to the Console Output Devices menu The server does not support different configurations for Output and Error console When you make changes to either Output or Error console menus you must make the identical change in the other menu When you change serial devices you must make changes to Output Input and Error menus for proper operation Using the System Configuration Menu The System Configuration Menu on systems with EFI firmware version 2 0 or higher includes the following options e Security Password Menu Enables you to change the administrator and user passwords e Advanced System Information Menu Displays information about system and component configuration e Set System Date Enables you to modify the system date e Set System Time Enables you to modify the system time e Reset Configuration to Default Enables you restore system settings to their original configuration e Help Displays additional information about the available options e Exit Returns to the EFI startup menu Security Password Menu You can set administrator and user passwords to provide different levels of access to the system firmware Resetting Passwords If you forg
155. Applying Standby Power to the Server To apply standby power to the server follow these steps we IMPORTANT If the server has one BPS plug the power cable into the receptacle labeled PWR 1 1 LAN Locate the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the chassis Plug the power cord into the receptacle Observe the following LEDs at two different intervals to ensure the server is in the standby power state INTERVALONE After you plug the power cord into the server the BPS flashes green and an no light is present on the hard disk drives INTERVALTWO Approximately 30 seconds later the BPS is green and no light is present on the hard disk drives Standby power is now on The server has two LAN ports that can provide network connectivity Figure 3 16 shows the available LAN ports for the server Figure 3 16 Rear Panel LAN Ports System LAN Ports and LEDs To enable general network connectivity for the server follow these steps 1 2 Obtain valid IP addresses for each LAN port you plan to activate Connect the LAN cable from an available LAN port to a live connection on the network Console Setup Setting up the console involves the following 1 Determining the physical access method to connect cables There are two physical connections to the Integrity iLO 2 MP e RS 232 serial port e iLO2MP LAN port Configuring the Integrity iLO 2 MP and assigning an IP address if necessary Though there
156. BMC firmware components are from the same release using the iLO 2 MPsr command 2 Reinstall all firmware Firmware Updates The system has an EFI utility for updating system BMC and iLO 2 MP firmware fwupdate efi utility To update the firmware follow these steps 1 Power on the system and get to the EFI Shell prompt 2 Execute the following EFI command at the EFI Shell prompt to determine the current firmware version Shell gt info fw 3 Look for the latest firmware updates at http www hp com If a new version of the firmware is available download it Save it to CD or copy it over the network to the system you are going to update 4 On the system you are updating download and execute the appropriate fweupdate package an EFI application you run without options or arguments to update your firmware Update the firmware in one of the following ways 1 Use the same utilities that are used by system firmware and the BMC 2 Initiate a firmware upgrade from the iLO 2 MP user interface the iLO 2 MP pulls its image from the FTP server that you specify 3 Initiate a firmware upgrade from the HP System Insight Manager SIM as a Group Action Server Interface All system console connections VGA USB local RS 232 and iLO 2 MP LAN are located on the bulkhead of the core I O board FRU at the rear of the rx3600 chassis OSs can be configured to use a text serial console or the graphics VGA as a console The iLO 2 MP
157. Boot Manager menu The boot options list includes the EFI Shell and one or more operating system loaders A NOTE In some versions of EFI the Boot Configuration menu is listed as the Boot Option Maintenance Menu The following example includes boot options for HP OpenVMS Microsoft Windows HP UX and the EFI Shell The final item in the EFI Boot Manager menu the Boot Configuration menu is not a boot option The Boot Configuration menu enables system configuration through a maintenance menu EFI Boot Manager ver 1 10 14 61 Please select a boot option HP OpenVMS 8 2 1 EFI Shell Built in Windows Server 2003 Enterprise HP UX Primary Boot 4 0 1 1 0 2 0 Boot Option Maintenance Menu Use and v to change option s Use Enter to select an option e To set HP UX boot options see Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List page 124 e Toset OpenVMS boot options see Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options List page 129 Configuring System Boot Options 123 e To set Windows boot options see Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List page 132 e To set Linux boot options see Adding Linux to the Boot Options List page 135 To manage the boot options list for each system use the EFI Shell the EFI Boot Configuration menu or operating system utilities At the EFI Shell the bc g command supports listing and managing the boot options list for all operating systems except Microsoft Windows On HP Integrit
158. CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server IMPORTANT Before removing the system battery record all boot and LAN configuration settings Find the settings using the INFO ALL EFI command You must reset these values after replacing the battery To remove and replace the system battery follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 A CAUTION You must remove the I O board assembly to service the system battery The removal and replacement of the I O board assembly occurs through the rear of the rack for rack installed servers Carefully follow the removal and replacement procedures you must first perform several tasks with the server extended out from the front of the rack See Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 225 for complete instructions 2 Remove the I O board assembly See Removing the I O Board Assembly page 225 Locate the system battery on the I O board assembly Figure 6 26 4 Insert a flat tool under the battery and carefully lift upward to pry the battery from the socket o Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 26 Battery Location on I O Board
159. CIe e Eight port SAS core I O card with RAID able to connect to external storage PCIe LAN core I O Two GigE LAN ports Management Two serial ports two USB 2 0 ports one 10 Base T 100 Base T LAN port and one optional VGA core I O port Optical device One DVD or DVD RW drive Power supply One 1200 watt power supply 1 1 redundancy with second power supply Server Specifications 47 Dimensions and Values Table 2 2 lists the dimensions and values of the HP Integrity rx3600 for a rack or pedestal installed configuration Table 2 2 Rack or Pedestal Installed Server Dimensions and Values Dimension Value Server weight loaded product weight range 34 40 8 kg 75 90 lbs estimate Rack Rack dimensions depth x width x height 69 6 cm 27 4 in x 44 cm 17 32 in x 17 24 cm 6 8 in Rack weight Max 45 36 kg 100 lbs Rack unit Server takes up 4U in a rack Pedestal Pedestal dimensions depth x width x height 69 2 cm 27 2 in x 36 9 cm 14 5 in x 51 2 cm 20 2 in Pedestal weight 10 9 kg 24 lbs Minimum standalone configuration 44 9 kg 99 lbs Maximum standalone configuration 51 7 kg 114 lbs Grounding The site building shall provide a safety ground protective earth for each AC service entrance to all cabinets Install a PE protective earthing conductor that is identical in size insulation material and thickness to the branch circuit supply conducto
160. CONFIG lt cpu gt index ON OFF primary Configure primary console ioconfig IOCONFIG IOCONFIG fast_init mps_optimize Deconfigure or reconfigure I O wol on off components or settings boottest FastBoot ON OFF or test RUN SKIP Display or set boot tests execution date Time cn yr mo dy hr mn ss Read or set the date time Time cn yr mo dy hr mn ss Read or set the real time clock INformation info all ALL Display all server information info boot BootINfo Display boot releated information info cpu CAche Display cache information info chiprev ChipRevisions Display revision number of major VLSI MP command lt df gt FRU Display FRU information info fw FwrVersion Display firmware version for PDC ICM and complex info io IO Display firmware version for PDC ICM and complex lanaddress LanAddress Display core LAN station address info mem Memory Display memory information info cpu PRocessor Display processor information SERvice errdump clear CLEARPIM Clear zero the contents of PIM Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager 319 Table D 1 EFl Commands continued EFI Shell Command BCH Command BCH Command Parameters PA RISC Definition Equivalent PA RISC mm MemRead lt addr gt lt len gt lt type gt Read memory locations scope of page deallocation pdt page Display or clear the page deallocation deallocation table table pdt errdump mca processor
161. Configurations page 62 and Figure 3 6 for more information Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Installing the System 5 Insert the PCI PCI X PCle card into the empty slot and exert firm even pressure to seat the card in the slot A CAUTION Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can fail after power is reapplied to the slot 6 Connect all internal and external cables to the PCI PCI X card 7 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead 8 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card if it is full length 9 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 57 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly A The memory carrier assembly encloses the system DIMMs There are two different memory carrier assemblies available for the server e 8DIMM memory carrier assembly e 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly The 8 and 24 DIMM memory carrier assemblies have two sides 0 and 1 each of which contain a memory board System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards Table 3 3 lists the supported memory carrier assembly config
162. Controller type PCI Bus Indicates the PCI Bus number assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter 0x00 OxFF 0 255 decimal PCI Dev Indicates the PCI Device assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter range 0x00 Ox1F 0 31 decimal PCI Fne Indicates the PCI Function assigned by the system BIOS to an adapter range 0x00 0x7 0 7 decimal FW Revision Displays the Fusion MPT firmware version and type IR or IT Status Indicates whether the adapter is or is not eligible for software control enabled disabled or error Enabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either currently controlling the adapter or will attempt to control the adapter upon reload Disabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either not controlling the adapter or will discontinue control of the adapter upon reload Error Indicates that the EFI Driver encountered a problem with the adapter Viewing and modifying settings for the adapter is allowed but the information and functionality available may be limited Adapter Properties Screen The Adapter Properties screen enables you to view and modify adapter settings To scan the SAS controller s devices select a SAS controller and press Enter The Adapter Properties screen displays Figure C 2 Adapter Properties Screen 4 HP iLO Remote Serial Console Window jangogsp Microsoft Internet Explorer provided O a Zoom In Out Settings E d Enabled BIOS OSJ Use the arrow keys to select RAID Properties and p
163. Core I O Board Bat ai 238 Replacing the Core T O Boards Battista ninia eee rea 239 Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Carduasiontanan ti inet eaoh a 239 Removing the SAS Core YO Card id A ice 240 Replacing the SAS Cote YO Cade wel da 240 Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O C rd ionionictn ninia cin iii 241 Removing the LAN Core TO Cora adas 241 Replacing the LAN Core O Card iS 241 Removing and Replacing the Display Doria ita Asia 242 Removing the Display DO A A A A AA 242 Replacing the Display Board sei e EEEE EEE 245 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane DoOard iia 246 Removing the SAS backplane DO a nee eas 247 Replacing the SAS Backplane DO dvi An ode 249 Removing and Replacing the Interconnect BOA ii A aos 250 Remoyme the Interconnect Boar des ld 250 Replacing the Interconnect Boar sd e c i 252 Removing and Replacing the Midplane Borda ii ati 253 Removing the Midplane DOTA a ic nia aid 253 Replacing the Midplane Doria tad 255 A Customer Replaceable Units Information c cccsccsssesescssssescessseeceseseecenesesseneseseenees 257 Parts Only Warranty DVI A A a a dsd 257 Customer Sell Read it cia 257 Customer Replaceable Units Tits A Glee 258 A A O 261 VO Backplane Upgrade eate a A Ai 261 T O Backpla e Updated 261 Required Service TOO Siuensnisssiai apaa es eenaa aa t ieee e aoa E eiee 262 Satelite bid 262 T O Backplane Upgrade Proce dare tad mam sniay sd pubddaabenseostugnes teaneuscasstpetdeey 263 nst
164. DIMM sizes 68 208 supported memory configurations 29 68 209 memory carrier assembly removing 204 replacing 205 memory carrier assembly cover see cover memory carrier assembly memory carrier assembly removing and replacing 65 memory extender board see memory carrier assembly midplane board removing 253 replacing 255 midplane riser board see midplane board MP 348 see also iLO 2 MP MPS optimization see PCle MPS optimization mptutil utility 96 MRL 199 N N 1 31 N 1 capability 79 354 Index O OLA 192 procedures for PCI PCI X PCle cards 198 OLR 193 procedures for PCI PCI X PCle cards 199 requirement HP UX 193 OLX dividers see PCI PCI X PCle card dividers Online Addition see OLA Online Replacement see OLR operating system auto boot setting 124 booting and shutting down HP UX 124 booting and shutting down Linux 135 booting and shutting down OpenVMS 129 booting and shutting down Windows 132 boots or does not boot 119 configuring boot options 123 reinstallation 261 updating 264 orca utility 116 OS reinstallation 262 P PAL 35 parts list 258 password default 89 PC command 94 95 PCI card see PCI PCI X PCle cards PCI X card see PCI PCI X PCle cards PCI PCI X PCle card divider locations 193 removing 191 replacing 192 PCI PCI X PCle cards attention LED 44 card divider locations 62 193 configurations 62 192 194 divider locations 62 EFI device path 196 1
165. DNS using to configure iLO 2 MP LAN 85 DHCP enabled security risk 86 90 diagnostic panel 34 see also display board introduction 34 LEDs 39 diagnostic panel label and LEDs 40 dimensions server 48 DIMM see memory disk drive activity LED 38 activity LED location 38 42 84 activity LED states 38 LEDs 38 39 load order 60 189 190 removing 188 replacing 190 slot availability LEDs 39 slot IDs 61 190 status LED 38 status LED location 38 42 84 status LED states 38 disk drive filler removing 188 replacing 188 disk drive filler removing and replacing 60 disk drive hot pluggable removing and replacing 60 display board functionality 242 introduction 34 removing 242 replacing 245 drvcfg utility 98 dual core processing 74 218 dual core processor see processor DVD 34 see also display board DVD drive introduction 34 removing 202 replacing 203 DVD problems 119 DVD RW drive see DVD drive E ebsu utility 113 EFI capable devices controller handles 339 commands 318 320 acu 312 315 cfggen 299 drvcfg 285 340 341 352 Index ebsu 310 mptutil 283 orca 312 314 saupdate 307 configurable components 340 device paths PCI PCI X PCle 196 197 driver handle 341 info all command 230 POSSE commands 320 SCSI setup utility 341 troubleshooting 119 EFI commands info io 267 info warning 267 see also viewing warnings EFI driver firmware update 98 electrical sp
166. Devices HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 293 Figure C 5 SAS Topology Screen Expander Open 4 HP iLO Remote Serial Console Window jangogsp Microsoft Internet Explorer provided E K Zoom In Out Settings You can access the Device Properties screen from SAS Topology e To access the Device Properties screen for the specific device and turn on the locate LED press D from an expanded enclosure You can perform the following actions from SAS Topology e To expand the SAS Topology for display select an expander enclosure and press Enter This displays all Phys Devices Bays Press Enter again to collapse the expander enclosure e To activate the locate LED press Enter while on a device e To clear device mapping for non present devices press C Device Identifier Indicates the ASCII device identifier string extracted from the device s Inquiry Data Device Info Indicates if a device is SAS SATA Expander or Enclosure Neg Link Speed Indicates the negotiated link speed for this Phy or whether it has been disabled Phy Link Speed Indicates the maximum hardware link rate possible for this Phy Device Properties Screen The Device Properties screen displays information about a specific device To access the Device Properties screen press D from the SAS Topology screen when the cursor is on an expanded enclosure of the Device Identifier field of a device To access the following screens from Device Properti
167. Disk Drive ssssessssssssseesseissrsesserssisnrereesseesreseesse 189 Diek Prce Or IDS I a E RTE 190 PCI PCI X PCle Card Divider Removal and Replacement isio csssists seasscocncsany vend ctendevecete nth ene 192 PCI PCI X PCle Slot Identification and Card Divider LocationsS ooococnccnnnnnnnonnnonncnnnnnnnnnnannno so 193 DVD Drive Removal and Replacement dni 203 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly corista ita i 205 Memory Cartier ASSemi Phy ivsacs secu cxsdchnyeisZocosavedvadtevesd si dE AA br EA ti a 207 Memory Carrier Assembly with Side Cover Removed ccccccceccessseseersesscesessseeseseseeseseseeaeenes 208 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot Ds it iaa 210 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot ID att ii ata 211 Inserting DIMM into Memory Board Conecta ais 214 Removing and Replacing the Front Bezeleraciontriinin etica Rie 216 Removing the Processor Board Assembivinis ri oli 218 Processor board Assemply inoen a E A 220 Processor Power Cable an aa a a EA A AT A E A EER AETAT 221 Processor Alignment Posts and Lock Unlock MechanisIM ccooccnnononocononacinnaninanonnaranaconacinnacnnnoss 222 Processor Alignment Holes and Lock Unlock MechanisM ccoocccoocnnonononacinncinnaninnoranaconncnanacin nos 223 ID Board ASEO A cen Sr E E EES eeuaa mands aay EE TAE edna 227 I O Board Assembly Removal and Replacement ic 228 Battery Locatono OD aaa 231 Removing and Replacing the I O VRM crisis wsncescestbastevaanessowsesnes cdi lc
168. FI HPUX HPUX EFI When initiated the loader references the EFI HPUX AUTO file and proceeds to boot HP UX using the default boot behavior specified in the AUTO file You have 10 seconds to interrupt the automatic booting of the default boot behavior Press any key during this 10 second period to stop the HP UX boot process and enables you to interact with the HPUX EFI loader a To exit the loader the HPUX gt prompt enter exit to return to the EFI Shell b To boot the HP UX operating system do not type anything during the 10 second period given for stopping at the HPUX EFI loader For example Shell gt map Device mapping table fso Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig72550000 b1k0 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Luno b1k1 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig72550000 b1k2 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part2 Sig72550000 b1k3 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Luno b1k4 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 1 Scsi Pun2 Luno 126 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System Shell gt fs0 fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return t
169. FI Boot menu select Delete All Boot Options This setting can be used as a security device on systems that are accessed remotely Change Boot Order Use this option to change the order of boot options The order in which options are listed in the EFI boot menu also reflects the order in which the system attempts to boot If the first boot option fails the system tries to boot the second option then the third and so forth until a boot option succeeds or until all options have failed For example if you normally boot using a configuration on your LAN but want to boot from a local hard drive if the LAN is unavailable move the LAN boot option to the top of the list followed by the hard drive boot option The menu lists boot options that currently exist in the main Boot Manager menu To change the priority of the items select an option and move it up or down in the list e Press U to move an option up e Press D to move an option down e Select Save Settings to NVRAM to modify the order in the Boot Manager menu which modifies the order that the Boot Manager attempts to boot the options e The items at the bottom of the screen are descriptions of the selected option For example Change boot order Select an Operation EFI Shell Built in Current OS Save Settings to NVRAM Help Exit VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 F0D2992B5AA9 Boot0000 Manage BootNext Setting Use this option to run the selected boot option immediately upon
170. Fail Indicates whether device SMART is predicting device failure Yes No Size MB Indicates the size of the device in megabytes megabyte 1024 x 1024 1 048 576 If the device is part of a two disk array this field reflects the size of the array not the size of the individual disk If the device is part of a three or more disk array this field is the size that the disk makes up within the array When creating a striped array the usable size of the array is determined by the number of drives times the size of the smallest drive in the array In arrays consisting of different sized drives excess space on larger drives are unusable Manage Array Screen The Manage Array screen enables you to manage the current array To access the Manage Array screen select the appropriate field and press Enter on the Manage Array field from the View Array screen The Manage Array screen enables you to perform the following actions Manage Hot Spare To display a Hot Spare Management screen that has the same layout as the Create New Array screen press Enter on Manage Hot Spare This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The array is inactive e The array is at its maximum number of devices e Non IR firmware is used e IR is disabled The array is inactive Synchronize Array To perform a synchronization of the IM array press Enter on Synchronize Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y
171. HBA RISC firmware on the first controller follow these steps 1 Atthefs0 gt prompt entermptutil f lt firmware file gt c 0 2 Atthefs0 gt prompt enter reset The filename is optional and you are prompted for a filename if omitted Another way for the firmware to be flashed is done without your knowledge When mptutil is executed and a SAS HBA is in any state other than ready or operational mptutil immediately performs a firmware download boot The firmware provided by you to do the firmware download boot is immediately flashed after the firmware download boot has completed The mptutilcommand does this because the firmware only moves to the operational state if it is Core I O Card Configuration 97 running from flash and not memory Operational state is needed to do everything else provided in the utility Flashing BIOS and EFI Driver on the First Controller To update the EFI driver on the first controller follow these steps 1 Atthefs0 gt prompt enter mptutil o g lt Bios File gt lt EFI driver file gt c 0 2 Atthefs0 gt prompt enter reset The filename is optional and you are prompted for a filename if omitted Common Questions About Flashing Firmware Question After I update firmware on my SAS HBA why doesn t the version string change in the menu Answer The firmware you just flashed on the HBA does not run until a diagnostic reset occurs If you exit the utility and reenter it the version string is up
172. HP Integrity rx3600 User Service Guide HP Part Number AB463 9003C Published November 2007 Edition Third edition D O Copyright 2007 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Legal Notices The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Intel Pentium Intel Inside Itanium and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Linux is a U S registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group Table of Contents About This Documental ios ei ad dilatada 21 Ttended AUN A is 21 New and Changed Information in This Edi io 21 P blishing ito NEO 21 Document Ora Ori ti A a ta 21 Typographic COn vendio la 22 Related Docume A E eS 22 Warranty ornato daba 22 Related Tniorma Hom A a id ts idas 22 HPE Encourages Your ComMMENtS serieei Ene estes suds Crave ie au EET ea aces awe heel nae used 23 WO e te dt auth e EN at ene caci 25 Server DUST irc in RRA EA AAA EE A AA AA ARA A 25 AA O A
173. I O Board Assembly To remove the I O board assembly follow these steps 1 Record the boot configuration settings To find the settings use the INFO ALL EFI Shell command Use Figure 6 28 TPM Location on I O Board to determine if there is a TPM on the I O board assembly If so record the TPM settings to transfer to the replacement I O board assembly See the HP UX operating system documentation for instructions Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly 225 3 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 A CAUTION The removal and replacement of the I O board assembly occurs through the rear of the rack for rack installed servers Carefully follow the board removal and replacement procedures You must first perform several tasks with the server extended out from the front of the rack 4 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 5 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 6 Disconnect the internal USB cable from the connector on the core I O board Figure 6 24 7 Disconnect the SAS cables attached to the SAS core I O card in PCI slot 1 A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate
174. I O board assembly follow these steps 1 Transfer the following components from the removed I O board assembly to the replacement I O board assembly a SAS core I O card See Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Card page 239 b LAN core I O card See Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O Card page 241 c Trusted Platform Module TPM Use Figure 6 28 TPM Location on I O Board to determine if there is a TPM on the removed I O board assembly If so transfer the TPM from the removed I O board assembly to the replacement I O board assembly See Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module page 233 d Core I O board See Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board page 236 228 Removing and Replacing Server Components we SoA ND yg 13 14 15 16 17 Align the I O board assembly rails with the chassis slots and slide the assembly into the chassis until it stops against the midplane board socket Figure 6 25 IMPORTANT Do not pinch the cable of the fan located behind the memory carrier assembly between the fan housing unit and the I O board when sliding the board into the chassis Ensure the I O board assembly is flush against the midplane board socket and firmly push the extraction handles inward until the assembly plugs completely into the midplane board socket Press in on the retention levers to lock the I O board assembly extraction handles into place Reconnect all ex
175. K signal If neither is asserted then the ac supply has a problem 4 If any FRUs are missing or both ac supplies are not valid then return to power off state Server Subsystems 33 Initialize I O Expander settings prior to turning on power Set Power Sequencer Order Set system frequency in Power Sequencer Pulse BMC_PWR_CMD to tell the Power Sequencer to enable the voltages in the system Wait for SEQ_MPON to know the power sequencer has finished and check if SEQ_STATUS 0 for a fault condition If a fault has occurred scan sensors for the cause and generate events 9 Perform any pre Reset Hardware Setup needed while power is on 10 Release Reset by setting MPON 1 e Dat Front Display Panel DVD and Diagnostic Panel The front display panel DVD and diagnostic panel are supported on a single board called the display board located in the front of the chassis Service the display board from the top of the chassis The front display panel consists of the system status LEDs and a power switch Use the front display panel to determine the power status of the server monitor the server as it progresses through the boot cycle and use the various LED states to assist with troubleshooting system problems A slimline DVD drive or optional DVD RW drive is located above the hard disk drives in the horizontal orientation of the front panel There is a USB 2 0 port positioned between the DVD drive and the front display panel Each cust
176. MM e Configuration errors such as no DIMMs installed cause diagnostic LEDs to light for all DIMMs not installed e No diagnostic LEDs light for single byte errors that are corrected in both Zx2 caches and memory DIMMs during corrected platform error CPE events Diagnostic messages are reported for CPE events when thresholds are exceeded for both single byte and double byte errors all fatal memory errors cause global MCA events e PDT logs for all double byte errors are permanent Single byte errors are initially logged as transient errors If the server logs two single byte errors within 24 hours they are upgraded to permanent in the PDT Table 5 17 and Table 5 18 list the memory subsystem events that light and that may light the diagnostic panel LEDs CPU Memory and SBA 161 Table 5 17 Memory Subsystem Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Table 5 18 Memory Subsystem Events that M single bit errors ay Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs Memory Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on memory BMC A voltage on the Carrier VOLTAGE DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE board is inadequate memory expander is out of range likely too low DIMMs Type E0h 208d 04d No memory DIMMs SFW Light all DIMM LEDs MEM NO DIMMS INSTALLED installed in slot 0 of cell in rank 0 of cell 0 0 DIMMs Type E0h 172d 04d A DIMM has a serial SFW Either EEPROM is MEM_DIMM_SPD_CHECKSUM presence
177. MM type is not SFW MEM DIMM _ TYPE INCOMPATIBLE compatible with current DIMMs DIMMs Type E0h 173d 26d Detected a fatal error in SFW MEM DIMM SPD FATAL the DIMM serial presence detect SPD 162 Troubleshooting Table 5 18 Memory Subsystem Events that May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs continued Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs DIMMs Type E0h 795d 26d DIMM mismatch was SFW 24 or 48 slot memory MEM DIMM QUAD MISMATCH found within a quad of carrier DIMMs DIMMs Type E0h 779d 26d DIMM mismatch was SFW 8 slot memory carrier MEM DIMM PAIR MISMATCH found within a pair of DIMMs Figure 5 5 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 8 DIMM memory carrier board Figure 5 5 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs Figure 5 6 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 24 DIMM memory carrier board CPU Memory and SBA 163 Figure 5 6 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs Troubleshooting rx3600 SBA The rx3600 server shares a common I O backplane that supports a total of 10 PCI slots Slots 1 2 on rx3600 systems with only one core I O SAS card are for customer use Slots 2 10 are used for core I O functions on rx3600 systems with only 1 SAS core I O card The System Bus Adapter SBA logic within the zx2 chip of a rx3600 server uses 16 rope interfaces
178. O diagnostic Specific Card I O Diagnostics Card specific I O diagnostics BIST General Diagnostic Tools Table 5 14 lists genearl diagnostic tools Table 5 14 General Diagnostic Tools List Diagnostic Tool Description IPMI Event Decoder Provides detailed information about IPMI events such as problem description cause and action System Event Analyzer SEA Program that automatically analyzes system error logs and IPMI SEL events Produces callout reports and CRU information See http h18023 wwwl hp com support svctools webes for information about this tool Fault Management Overview Fault management and monitoring increases system availability by moving from a reactive fault detection diagnosis and repair strategy to a proactive fault detection diagnosis and repair strategy Fault management does the following e Detects problems automatically as near as possible to when they actually occur e Diagnoses problems automatically at the time of detection e Automatically reports a description of the problem in understandable text This includes the likely causes of the problem the recommended action s to resolve the problem and detailed information about the problem e Ensures that tools are available to repair or recover from the fault HP UX Fault Management Proactive fault prediction and notification is provided on HP UX by SysFaultMgmt WBEM indication providers as well as by the Event Managemen
179. OMAN 25 PCY PGEX MOB La ias 27 PCY RGEX P Cle JOB Re a A a eto ed ae de 28 ERETS MPS Optimizations tl athe a ae oes aaah E a aaa bait 28 POTES A di dada actos 29 MEMO SE A A 29 COOP O A ES Cas ent va AA A E A Le tad 31 BLODE A ea tA a E EA EESE a A NN 32 Front Display Panel DVD and Diagnostic Panel iycice iscecisssivcccsnsersdenrnverecovrs testes cantado pea densi even bee 34 MAS EOP AG eg es cata ey dusts ssc Su aha talus vp anon asc as Wi eas Sato es van ean ey veda tak Pane NTE AA 34 Firmware O a Bebo a ease as wae a ae ns ee nog Lea a aE 35 User Interact a ali eae ES 35 Event IDs for Errors and EvVentS occconnocccnnnnnoccnnnonacinonenaconnnonaconnnonoccnnnnanacnnnnnnccnnnnnnc TA A 35 Controls Ports and LEDS iivsicdecscikcesveusisssids vieesvevsvesscaccvsdsveascassiacavecseuvsvasscscivarsvuiscasaiae e ecsveiscasacserverce 36 NS A O RRA 36 storage and Media DECS tit A A ta A aa E 38 Hot Plugsable Disk Drive LEDS aca 38 Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Slot Availability LEDS cccsssivisccvnsssiesonteraneassessonteaytstunsevstadertots nove 39 DVD ello ta e 39 Diagnostic Panelisteina a ea e a a aaaea A A aeo aa a a mites Sivas sage 39 Rear Fan unan lo e la T e lada a dond a 40 DOM A a da Bane 41 LO 2 MP Reset ButtON oocccnnccncnoccnnnicnnocononccnnnacononcononocnonornonnrcnnnonnnncrnonacnnnarnnnnrrnnnccnnnornnnnss 42 Core DBA Pr ola 43 LO 2MEStatus LEDS da taa ralla coa aaa eo 43 System LAN A AA AAA AA maT 43 Power IPP A A a
180. Oy Ole ES 216 Removing and Replacing Server Components Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly The processor board assembly holds one or two dual core Itanium processors itis located beneath the disk drives and memory carrier assembly in the bottom service bay The processor board is installed onto a removable carrier tray that is retained in the service bay by a hinged access door A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Processor Board Assembly To remove the processor board assembly follow these steps 1 A Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover
181. P0002 PNPOA03 500 Pci 2 1 Fast initialization Enabled System Wake On LAN Enabled Shells Devices such as USB ports that do not occupy a slot are referenced as being in slot XX Slots that do not contain an I O card will not be listed in the output Using the output confirm that a device detected in each slot that is populated 13 Installing the OS HP UX Windows and Linux require reinstallation of the OS with the upgrade of the IOBP See Figure B 1 page 262 for more information 14 Booting to the Operating System See Chapter 4 page 123 for this procedure Installing Core I O Cards WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces allow the internal system components to cool before touching them CAUTION To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment consult the safety information and user documentation provided with the server before attempting the installation Many servers are capable of producing energy levels that are considered hazardous and are intended to be serviced only by qualified personnel who have been trained to deal with these hazards Do not remove enclosures or attempt to bypass any interlocks that may be provided for the purpose of removing these hazardous conditions CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage electronic components Be sure that you are properly grounded before beginning this procedure CAUTION When working with equipment installed
182. Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM CD FORMAT Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master CDROM Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 500 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master Load File EFI Shell Built in Load File Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Exit Where e NO VOLUME LABEL A hard drive When you format a hard drive the EFI tools provide an option to LABEL the disk In this example the volume is not labelled e CD_FORMAT The label created for the disk currently inside the DVD drive e Removable Media Boot Allows you to boot from a removable media drive CD DVD drive This option does not support booting from a specific file on a specific CD e Load Files The EFI Shell and the LAN Add a Boot Option Use this option to add items to the EFI boot menu This option displays the file systems that are on your system and lets you browse these file systems for applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the efiextension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on the network The option you select is added to the EFI boot menu If you add a new drive to your system you must manually add its boot options list to make it a bootable device When adding a boot option that already exists in the Boot Manager list of boot options you can choose whether to create a new option or modify the existing one e To modify an existing option change the boot
183. R 334 NN 334 MA OSI cent ee rete hast ana etc she tna 334 Sy HbA ij erecta laa acs E anna may sated RR o 334 PALAS A stil ete ce eet ree ets ak ease ark oe Auta oe eae oes 334 VRE UOT Aaa 335 Pa A AA AA E 335 SS Aa 335 ENS oi ae SENO 335 A chsh ess aa a nE La A E cea ty cecal op canta oe Sache cee el aoe 335 yg ang Seta Seiwa ae ye aaa oes 336 SAA ni re CORA oh es E aaleatede shaun eae A aaea ans 336 PAT ATM CLOTS sso NE 336 UCL AT Ol cas sates ec E steeds veuaes a amec aire eae hiny T 336 Specifying Col Parametros 337 Using the SES Setup UY O a a AR Aa A AR AE vk 337 Using the Boot Option Maintenance Mendo oo 343 PACS sau a dl oe atte ok odie dat 343 Bony E e a cba 343 Add a Boot OPIO nani id di T cid 344 Delete Bo0trOpton Sumcna la tardan 345 Change BOO a ata a ao 345 Manage BootNext e ao 345 Set Auto Boot MAME ida ao 346 12 Table of Contents select Active Console Output Desc o 346 Select Active Console Input Devices cua a 347 Select Active Standard Error Devices oooccccnonoccnnnonoccnononaconononaconononaconononaronononaconononariconanacinon 348 Using the System Configuration Men ai iii 348 Security Ras Word Men rental il AS ia ia 348 Resetting Pass Words sad ibi 348 WO ZMP A A LA EA TA AD A EA E STA edi E 348 O ON 351 Table of Contents 13 14 List of Figures 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3
184. SAS RAID controller able to 398657 001 n a BY connect to external storage P800 405965 001 Battery retainer P800 n a BY PCA Boards AB463 60003 Core I O board with VGA AB463 67003 n a AY AB463 60004 Core I O board without VGA AB463 67003 AB463 69003 AY AB463 60006 SAS disk backplane board AB463 67006 n a BY AB463 60010 Midplane board AB463 67010 n a CY AB463 60020 Display board AB463 67020 n a BY AB463 60025 Interconnect board AB463 67025 n a CY AB463 60113 2 socket processor extender AB463 60113 AB463 69113 BY Internal Disks Removable Media 375863 001 36 GB SAS HDD 376596 001 n a AY 375863 002 72 GB SAS HDD 376597 001 n a AY 168003 9D5 DVD drive 8X slim IS S5 CBT TE 397928 001 n a AY AD143 2100A DVD RW drive 8X S5 CBT TE AD143 2100A n a AY Server Subassemblies AB463 2134B T O backplane assembly AB463 67034 AB463 69034 BY AD124 2100B 8 DIMM memory carrier assembly AD124 67001 AD124 69001 AY AD125 2100B 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly AD125 67001 AD125 69001 AY Fan Assemblies AB463 2158A Fan AB463 2158A n a AY Other 314581 003 Trusted Platform Module 406059 001 n a N cy 0950 4677 I O VRM 0950 4617 n a BY 0957 2198 Power supply 0957 2198 AD052 69001 AY 1420 0356 System battery 1420 0356 n a BY AB463 3402E rx3600 memory carrier plastic cover AB463 3402E n a BY 8 24 DIMM 8710 2446 2 5mm Hex 8710 2446 n a BY 376383 001 HDD filler panel 376383 002 n a AY AB463 2145A rx3600 bezel AB463 2145A n a BY AB463 3421B
185. SCI A AE eee 90 Security Access SENES Aeir waceanivcte aed e KESE cab ce ea T AEEA KESA EA o tE PEERAA EEA AaS ta arse er EEEE e REEE ESKES wets 90 Accessing the Host Consoles naci 91 Accessing the iLO 2 MP With the Web Dro WSeT vista ariadna te 91 Helps e a ae E E O a elt cut tans a 92 Accessing the Host Console With the TUI CO CommMaNd ccnocccnoccnonnnionononacinnnnonannnnonnaconncnananinnon 92 Accessing the Host Console With vKVM Integrated Remote Console ooconconconornoorinrincocnranornss 93 Accessing the Host Console with the SMASH SM CLP ccccscescssecsssseeeesessceecseeeseeseeeseeeeenaeenes 93 Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA veis ai a ta no aaeain 93 Powering On and Powering Off the DE nara Nani 93 POWer States ESEN A A E T EE EEE A E E TE A 93 Powering On the Serye ARA AAA AA ES E RTTE 94 Powering On the Server Using the iLO 2 MP cr as 94 Powering On the Server Mantally rain att nda Das dd ecc 94 Poweting DIST a 95 Powering Off the Server Using the iLO 2M ss ca 95 Powering Off the Server Mai ays sra tapceveaneaees cab ve pte coumetoeastoeerbesa ncn aia 95 Core ONG are Comme raion A asia 95 Integrated RAID ua ido ed E ON RA daa 96 Inte erated MIO 96 Global POP Spates ds ienai enii duel Ea peta e ae EE edged E tenia aae aaa T a 96 HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller cies insavseediises cotseces cat cntdesenstvenedanteacettencebadennbevlaniosy 96 MPTUTIL Ud A dit cin la 96 Flashing Firmware on First Controller ai da
186. See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 200 Removing and Replacing Server Components Removing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Offline A Observe the following warning and cautions before performing an offline removal of a PCI PCI X PCle card WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing a PCI PCI X PCle card offline Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server CAUTION Record the slot location of all PCI cards as they are removed Depending on the operating system replacing the PCI cards in a different location may require system reconfiguration and may cause boot failure To remove a PCI card from the server with the power off follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 181 4 Pull the
187. Setup Utility EBSU provides an easy to use interface for flashing firmware partitioning the hard disk installing diagnostic tools configuring storage controllers and running other EFI utilities A NOTE You can use EBSU to update firmware for many different devices in the system A Smart Array Controller is shown as an example To update the Smart Array Controller firmware 1 Power on the server The server boots to EFI The EFI Boot Manager may be used from the enhanced interface grey background or the legacy interface black background 2 Load the HP Smart Setup media into the server DVD drive 3 From the EFI Boot Menu select Internal Bootable DVD and press Enter EBSU starts and displays the Welcome screen Figure 3 25 EBSU Welcome Screen 3 Telnet 15 75 7000 147 y Le ope t the secup pos the doriumentatin HP ercorarada yeetoreing the fallnwing tanla in this mirri 1 Rew Lha milaliunis Configure carage cards a rtup nyptian Thank you for choocing Hewletc Packaed Endoy your new nteyrity carver 4 Select OK and press Enter to continue 5 From the main menu select Maintain Firmware and press Enter Figure 3 26 EBSU Main Menu Telnet 16 09 144 105 EL E Paiubo us Pirima 6 Inthe Maintain Firmware screen use the tab key to scroll down to the Device section Core I O Card Configuration 113 7 Use the down arrow key to scroll down to the Smart Array Controller item in the
188. Shell command Use Figure 6 28 TPM Location on I O Board to determine if there is a TPM on the I O board assembly If so record the TPM settings to transfer to the replacement I O board assembly See the HP UX operating system documentation for instructions I O Backplane Upgrade 265 Back up the current TPM settings See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information TIP Running the info iocommand from the EFI shell will allow you to record the device codes given in HEX for your I O devices This may be helpful in verifying I O cards after the upgrade Shutting Down the Operating System See Chapter 4 page 123 for this procedure Powering Off the Server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 93 for this procedure Removing the I O Backplane See Removing the I O Board Assembly page 225 for this procedure Moving Backplane Components a Move the Trusted Platform Module See Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module page 233 for this procedure b Move the I O Voltage Regulator Module See Removing and Replacing the I O Voltage Regulator Module page 232 for this procedure c Move the Core I O Board See Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board page 236 for this procedure d Move the LAN Core I O Card See Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O Card page 241 for this procedure e Move the SAS Core I O Card Q TIP Ifyou
189. Side 0 1A 1B 4 Side 1 1A 1B The DIMM slot IDS are the same for both 8 DIMM memory carrier boards Unique slots are identified within the carrier by the side in which they reside For example slot 0A is identified as slot 0A side 0 or slot OA side 1 Figure 3 9 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 8 DIMM memory carrier board Figure 3 9 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order The 24 DIMM memory carrier has two sides labeled side 0 and side 1 each of which contains a memory carrier board The 24 DIMM memory carrier can contain up to six quads of memory DIMM quads are loaded in order of size from largest to smallest capacity DIMM quads are loaded in a certain way to balance the memory capacity between the two sides of the memory carrier starting with side 0 If you have more than two quads of memory to install load the first quad into slots 0A 0D of side 0 and load the second quad into slots 0A 0D of side 1 For the third and remaining quads of memory see Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines page 70 The DIMM slot IDS are the same for both 24 DIMM memory carrier boards Unique slots are identified within the carrier by the side in which they reside For example slot 0A is identified as slot 0A side 0 or slot 0A side 1 Figure 3 10 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 24 DIMM memory carrier board Installing Additional Components 69 Figure 3 10 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs
190. Slot IDs Memory Carrier Side 0 Memory Carrier Side 1 Example 1 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 2 GB 2 1 1A 1B 1C 1D 1GB 3 1GB 4 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 5 512 MB 6 Example 2 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2GB 1 1 GB 2 1 1A 1B 1C 1D 512 MB 4 1 GB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 5 Example 3 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 1 GB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 512 MB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 4 Example 4 0 0A OB 0C 0D 2 GB 1 512 MB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 512 MB 5 512 MB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 6 512 MB 4 Installing Memory we IMPORTANT You must pull the ac power plugs on the server every time you modify the DIMMs If you do not pull the ac power plugs the system does not display the correct DIMM information To install memory follow these steps 1 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 57 ES NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open 2 Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 65 Installing Additional Components 71 ES NOTE To avoid damage to the handles HP recommends rotating the handles inward and snapping them into place when servicing the system DIMMs or any time the carrier is out of the chassis Before replacing the memory carrier press the button to release the extraction ha
191. Supply Condition Off No ac power applied to any power supply Off No ac power applied to a specific power supply Flashing green 1 Hz ac standby power is present Steady green Power supply dc outputs are functioning correctly Flashing amber 1 Hz Power supply has failed includes overvoltage overcurrent overtemperature and fan failure I O VRM Table 5 21 lists the I O power events that light the diagnostic panel LEDs Table 5 21 1 O Power Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs da S aa regan I O power Type 02h 02h 07h 03h pee e on A voltage on the I O power VOLTAGE DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE CRU is assembly is out of range too inadequate low Cooling Subsystem The three fan cooling zones located in the rx3600 chassis provide N 1 redundancy for the chassis using three identical dual fan assembly CRUs In turn each dual fan assembly FRU provides additional N 1 redundancy for the fan cooling zone it cools The fan assembly CRUs are identified in the chassis as fans 1 2 and 3 both for logging and for fault identification on the diagnostic LED panel Cooling Subsystem Behavior EL The BMC chip located on the core I O board FRU controls fan speed based on ambient air temperatures chip temperatures server configuration and fan operation or failure Airis drawn through the front of the chassis and pushed out the rear by the cooling fans NOTE You can display fan status remotely using the iLO 2 MP ps comman
192. TE For more information on the integrated lights out management processor see the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide Extensible Firmware Interface EFI Provides an interface between the operating system and the firmware Use the EFI to configure options such as the server boot order before the server loads an operating system Table 3 9 lists the elements required to start a console session Table 3 9 Elements Required to Start a Console Session Console Element Description ac power standby power The server must have ac power to provide console functionality See Applying Standby Power to the Server page 80 Server hardware components Includes the iLO 2 MP and console cable connectors Console cable Links the server console to the console device Console device Provides display and input functionality using components such as monitors keyboards and mouse devices Console emulation software Emulates the output from the server console and displays the output on the console device screen Console Setup 81 IMPORTANT Windows 2003 Server places the video controller into a non standard resolution with a refresh rate of 55Hz Some LCD monitors are not capable of rendering a screen with refresh rates lower than 60Hz Use one of the following methods to resolve this issue e Use a monitor capable of 55Hz refresh rates Virtually all analog monitors and t
193. The dedicated core I O board slot is not hot pluggable CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Core I O Board we IMPORTANT The replacement core I O board may not be the same as the current core I O board If the server is running an operating system other than Windows or Linux the current core I O board may not have a VGA connector The replacement core I O board always ships with a VGA connector The VGA connector may not be functional depending on the server operating system However when you run system discovery utilities such as MAPPER the output includes VGA To remove the core I O board follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 Disconnect all external cables attached to the board 3 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 4 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 5 Disconnect the internal USB cable attached to the core I O board 6 Remove the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw counterclockwise until it is free from the chassis VAN CAUTION Do not rock the board side to side during removal or you can damage the slot pins P
194. Web at http ww hp com racksolutions Select mounting information from the menu then select Mounting in non HP racks Installing the Server into a Pedestal Mount The server ships with a pedestal mount if you order the rackless configuration option The pedestal mount is packaged in a separate carton that is attached to the server carton To change the server from a rack mount to a rackless configuration you need a Server Rackless Mount Kit The rackless mount kit comes with the HP Integrity rx3600 Rack to Pedestal Conversion Guide Follow the steps in the HP Integrity rx3600 Rack to Pedestal Conversion Guide to attach the pedestal mount to the server Connecting the Cables This section provides information on the cables that power the server and provide LAN connectivity for the server This section addresses the following topics e AC Input Power page 79 e LAN page 80 78 Installing the System AC Input Power The server can receive ac input from two different ac power sources If two separate power sources are available you can plug the server into the separate power sources increasing system reliability if one power source fails The power receptacles are located at the rear of the chassis They are labeled PWR 0 and PWR 1 You can install a maximum of two bulk power supplies BPS in the server Installing two BPSs in the server provides 1 1 redundancy meaning that if one BPS fails there is still enough po
195. X 66 MHz card in slot 7 and you hot plug a PCI 33 MHz card into slot 8 the operation fails The new PCI 33 MHz card does not initialize and the slot powers down because you cannot change bus speed during hot plug operations The new card has a slower bus speed than the current card NOTE If the server is rebooted in this configuration both cards initialize to run at PCI 33 MHz The system firmware can only change the bus capability down to the lowest common value 2 If there is a PCI 33 MHz card in slot 7 and you hot plug insert a PCI X 66 MHz card into slot 8 the new card works but it runs at PCI 33 MHz 3 If the server is powered off and you insert a PCI 33 MHz card into slot 7 that shares a common bus with a PCI X 66 MHz card in slot 8 then both cards run at PCI 33 MHz when the server powers up Table 6 3 lists the PCI PCI X card slot frequency and bus mode compatibility for shared slots Table 6 3 PCI PCI X Card Slot Frequency Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slots Current PCI Bus Cards to be installed Mode and Frequency for the PCI 33 PCI 66 PCI X 66 PCI X 133 PCI X 266 Current Card in a Shared Slot PCI 33 MHz Compatible Compatible7New Compatible New Compatible New Compatible New card running at card running at card running at card running at PCI 33 MHz PCI 33 MHz PCI 33 MHz PCI 33 MHz PCI 66 MHz Incompatible Compatible New Compatible New Compatible New Compatible New frequency card ru
196. ache Cache Slot CPUs Speed Size Size 0 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None 1 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None Example D 17 info mem command Shell gt info mem MEMORY INFORMATION DIMM A DIMM B DIMM Current DIMM Current 0 1024MB Active 1024MB Active 1 s ta E J sate a 3 as Active Memory 2048 MB Installed Memory 2048 MB 332 Utilities Family Model hex Rev Processor State Active Active Example D 18 info io command Shell gt info io I O INFORMATION BOOTABLE DEVICES Order al 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Media Type CDROM Bus Dev Fne 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 02 00 02 00 00 03 00 20 01 00 20 01 01 20 02 00 40 01 00 40 01 01 80 01 00 EO 01 00 EO OL 01 EO 02 00 Path Vendor ID 0x1033 0x1033 0x1033 0x1095 0x8086 0x1000 0x1000 0x14E4 0x1000 0x1000 0x14E4 0x103C 0x103C 0x1002 ID 0x0035 0x0035 Ox00EO 0x0649 0x1229 0x0030 0x0030 0x1645 0x0021 0x0021 0x1645 0x1290 0x1048 0x5159 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 02 02 01 XX XX XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci
197. ads are loaded in a certain way to balance the memory capacity between the two sides of the memory carrier starting with side 0 If you have more than two quads of memory to install load the first quad into slots 0A 0D of side 0 and load the second quad into slots 0A 0D of side 1 For the third and remaining quads of memory see Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines page 211 The DIMM slot IDS are the same for both 24 DIMM memory carrier boards Unique slots are identified within the carrier by the side in which they reside For example slot 0A is identified as slot 0A side 0 or slot OA side 1 Figure 6 16 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 24 DIMM memory carrier board 210 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 16 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines Use the following rules and guidelines when installing memory Install DIMMs in pairs in the 8 DIMM memory carrier and in quads in the 24 DIMM memory carrier Ensure all DIMMs within a pair or quad are identical Install quads in order of capacity from largest to smallest For example install all 2 GB quads before 1 GB or smaller quads and install all 1 GB quads before 512 MB quads Side 0 must have equal or greater memory capacity than side 1 Install DIMM pairs or quads based on the following rul
198. ain access to the HP Integrity rx3600 that is installed in an approved rack For rack installation instructions review the document titled Installation Guide Mid Weight Slide Kit 5065 7291 You can access this document at Accessing a Rack Installed Server 179 WARNING Ensure that all anti tip features are employed front and rear anti tip feet installed adequate ballast properly placed and so on are employed prior to extending the server from the rack Extending the Server from the Rack ES NOTE Ensure that there is enough area approximately 1 5 meters 4 5 ft to fully extend the server from the front of the rack To extend the server from the rack follow these steps 1 3 4 A Remove the T25 screws with the orange tags that fasten the front of the server to the rack Figure 6 1 Remove the large orange screws from the rear of the rack located on the left and right server slide rails The server will not slide forward if these screws are not removed Flip out the two pull handles located on both ends of the front bezel Figure 6 1 Slowly pull the server forward by the handles until it is fully extended NOTE The server is fully extended when the rail clips are locked in place and the top cover is completely accessible Figure 6 1 Rack Screw Locations
199. al control registers within the Zx2 PDH Local Bus Adapters LBA and HBA chips This process is referred to as programmed I O It is initiated by logical CPUs executing external LOAD STORE instructions Both system firmware and the OS kernel use this method to initiate DMA transfers I O Messages e Use the SEL to identify low level I O subsystem faults if LEDs on the diagnostic panel are not lit IPMI events in the SEL and FPL provide the logical ACPI path of the suspect I O subsystem CRU To determine the physical PCI slot number see Table 5 25 e For configuration errors for example no core I O HBAs installed or working see Supported Configurations page 155 e Diagnostic messages are reported for high level I O subsystem errors All fatal I O subsystem errors cause global MCAs HP UX provides its own path with the physical rope number of the suspect I O subsystem CRU To determine the physical PCI slot number see Table 5 25 Table 5 23 and Table 5 24 lists the I O card events that light and may light the diagnostic panel LEDs Table 5 23 1 O Card Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs T O card Type 02h 03h 05h 01h Overcurrent on PCI BMC Possible short circuit on CURRENT _ LIMIT EXCEEDED slot the I O card or I O slot I O assembly Type 02h 02h 07h 03h The voltage on the BMC A voltage on the I O VOLTAGE DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE CRU is inade
200. alline Core TOC ads ratios 268 Installing the HP Eight Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter cooonoconocnncnoonconnconoranonnnronarancnnnrn nenas 269 Installing the HP Smartt Artay POD iaa a a a a arab 270 Installing the HP Smart Array PAD Ri i 271 Completing the Adapter Installation on AIP UX aaa 272 Completing the Adapter Installation on Windows and LiNUX cccconnoconcnonnnonoranonanronarancnnnranorass 274 Installing the HP Smartt Array PSO ata aa var A aa aa ea 275 Windows Instala iOm Seda caso 275 Connecting the Controller to Other Devices ccimintoicaio ii 276 Completing the Adapter Installation pa cis 276 Li Toalla anaa thee aii bat 277 Connecting the Controller to Other Devices interina 278 Completing the Adapter Instala tt o IE accents 279 10 Table of Contents Processor Uperades ls A ic 279 Upgrading Verses Adding Dn iaa 280 A NO 281 Opera Aa oe 281 E Core O Cad Ulea dde vets 283 Integrated RAID cn cis haan aso acess A AA 283 A 283 Global Hot Spares A A A A AA 283 HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller vino a a ti 283 INVERSE US I VELL it st a 283 Flashing Firmware on First Controle tcc cuscstaseynss citan quicio ry evedeaarintentiyts vavancavumebetyeeneyd 284 Flashing BIOS and EFI Driver on the First Controller illo ibi 285 Common Questions About Flashing Firmware success soci ici inn ie ii 285 Viewing the VPD Information for EFI Driver and RISC FirmwWare ooconcccnncnnnonanonccinnanananinness 285 EPEC Command
201. alth indicator turns green when the BMC powers on Internal health indicator turns green when the BOOT_START event is received from system firmware NOTE BOOT START can be determined by LED states on the I O backplane board The system health indicator turns green when the firmware leaves exit boot services and the server starts to boot an OS Troubleshooting Tools 147 The health LEDs are driven by the BMC the System Power LED is driven solely by hardware BMC code determines the state of the Internal and External Health LEDs The iLO 2 MP code examining incoming events using its event dictionary determines the state of the System Health LED External Health LED The front panel External Health LED indicates the status of the components that are externally serviceable It is used to monitor the power supply Whenever the external health LED is lit the corresponding FRU for the failed component also lights ES NOTE Failures that cause the External Health LED to light do not cause the Internal Health LED to light These two LEDs cover failures of different components Table 5 5 lists the External Health LED states Table 5 5 External Health LED States LED Color Flash Rate State Off Off Health good on all external CRUs or system power is off Green Steady System power is on externally serviceable components accessible from front or back such as fans and power supplies are healthy Amber 1 Hz An externall
202. amage to the extraction handles 3 Pull up on the extraction handles and rotate them outward 90 degrees Figure 3 7 The handles latch into the open position with an audible click 4 Lift the memory carrier assembly out of the chassis Figure 3 7 ES NOTE To avoid damage to the handles HP recommends rotating the handles inward and snapping them into place when servicing the system DIMMs or any time the carrier is out of the chassis Before replacing the memory carrier press the button to release the extraction handles Use the handles to replace the memory carrier into the chassis Figure 3 7 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Extraction Handles Extraction Handle Release Button Access Door SS Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly A CAUTION Ensure that the processor board assembly is fully seated before you replace the memory carrier assembly The processor board assembly access door must be flush with the front bezel To replace the memory carrier assembly follow these steps 1 Ensure the extraction handles are positioned in the outward unlocked position 2 Align the memory carrier assembly with the front and rear chassis guide slots 66 Installing the System ES NOTE Assembly side 0 is on the left and assembly side 1 is on the right as viewed from the front of the chassis 3 Slide the memory carrier assembly into the chassis until it begins to seat into the socket lo
203. ample gt SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node RSNVMS How many minutes until final shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO yes When will the system be rebooted shortly via automatic reboot Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REBOOT_CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system Shutdown options NONE s console 22233366 OPCOM 12 JUL 2005 18 47 51 01 3 5 S S SSSS Operator status for operator _RSNVMSSOPAO CENTRAL PRINTER TAPES DISKS DEVICES CARDS NETWORK CLUSTER SECURITY NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 does not support the POWER_OFF shutdown option Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows This section describes how to boot and shut down Microsoft Windows on entry class HP Integrity servers and how to add Windows entries to the system boot options list Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List page 132 Booting the Microsoft Windows Operating System page 133 Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 134 Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List EL NOTE The operating system installer auto
204. an result in damage to the server Removing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Divider To remove a PCI PCI X PCle card divider follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 CAUTION When extracting the card divider ensure you release the locking tabs completely or you can damage them If you damage the tabs the divider does not seat properly when you reinsert it Use a tool to carefully push the two tabs that attach the card divider to the I O board assembly Pull the card divider up sharply by the handle to disengage it from the I O board assembly Figure 6 9 Removing and Replacing PCI PCI X PCle Card Dividers 191 Figure 6 9 PCI PCI X PCle Card Divider Removal and Replacement Card Divider ha Card Divider Handle Locking Tabs Rear Of Chassis Front Of Chassis Replacing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Divider To replace a PCI PCI X PCle card divider follow these steps 1 Insert the PCI PCI X PCle card divider locking tabs into the slots on the I O board assembly 2 Push down firmly to seat the card divider into the slots on the I O board assembly 3 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 4 If rack installed slide the ser
205. anagement Controller BMC chip located on the core I O board CRU controls the flow of 12 V dc power to the server CRUs You can both control and display power supply status remotely with the iLO 2 MP pc and ps commands respectively The server powers on as follows e The Power LED on the front panel glows steady amber when one or two bulk power supplies are plugged into nominal ac voltage The 3 3 VDC housekeeping voltage comes on and stays on whenever ac power is present e The BMC iLO 2 MP flash memory and chassis intrusion circuits are reset after the 3 3 V dc housekeeping voltage stabilizes e The BMC monitors the power button on the front panel e When the power button is pressed or when a Wake on LAN WOL signal is asserted the BMC signals the bulk power supplies to fully power on e 12 V dc comes up and all the cooling fans and the various VRMs power on sequentially e The BMC signals that the server is ready to come out of reset e The server comes out of reset e The zx2 chip resets all components connected and the server begins the boot process Power LED Switch The front panel system power LED indicates system power status It is incorporated with the power button The power button has a momentary switch that is recessed to prevent accidental powering on or off If the OS is running press the power button for less than four seconds to gracefully shut down the OS and power off the system Press the power button for
206. and If you issue the help command with the bch option it displays a list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI POSSE commands It instructs you to repeat the command line followed by a menu name for more information on that menu If you issue help within the bch option and a menu name it displays a list of commands that appear under that BCH menu You can then issue help followed by bch the menu name and a BCH command name to display information about that command This points you to the EFI command that has taken the place of that BCH functionality or will inform the user that the functionality no longer exists Alternately enter help followed by bch and a BCH command name to go straight to that command 320 Utilities Example D 1 help command Shell gt help List of classes of commands boot Booting options and disk related commands configuration Changing and retrieving system information devices Getting device driver and handle information memory Memory related commands shell Basic shell navigation and customization scripts EFI shell script commands Type help followed by a class name for a list of commands in that class Type help followed by command name for full documentation Example D 2 help bch command Configuration help bch co INformation help bch in PAth help bch pa ScRool help bch sr SEArch help bch sea SERvice help bch ser BOot help bch bo HElp help bch he RESET help bch reset MAin
207. and BCH Command Parameters PA RISC Definition Equivalent PA RISC These commands are found in all other menus info boot Boot PRI HAA ALT lt path gt Boot from specified path help lt command gt HElp lt menu gt lt command gt Display help for specified command or menu reset RESET Reset the server to allow reconfiguration of complex exit at EFI Shell MAin MAin Return to the main menu 318 Utilities EFI Boot Manager PAth PRI HAA ALT CON KEY lt path gt Display or modify a path change boot order Table D 1 EFl Commands continued EFI Shell Command BCH Command BCH Command Parameters PA RISC Definition Equivalent PA RISC bcfg SEArch ALL Search for boot devices bcfg SEArch DIsplayoIPL lt path gt Search for boot devices many commands ScRoll ON OFF Display or change scrolling offer a b capability parameter to cause 25 line breaks COnfiguration autoboot AUto BOot SEarch STart ON OFF Display or set the auto start flag info boot BootID lt processor gt lt bootid gt Display or set processor boot identifier EFI Boot Manager _ Boot info Display boot related information autoboot BootTimer 0 200 Seconds allowed for boot attempt cpuconfig CPUCONFIG lt cpu gt ON OFF Configure or deconfigure processor conconfig CON
208. anel if necessary 2 Support the power supply with both hands and slide it into the empty slot until it clicks into place Figure 3 3 we IMPORTANT Ensure the power supply is flush with the adjacent power supply or metal filler panel Figure 3 3 Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply Rear Chassis View Removing and Replacing Hot Swappable Disk Drive Fillers There are disk drive fillers installed on the front of the server for all slots that do not contain a disk drive Installing Additional Components 59 we IMPORTANT For cooling purposes always leave disk drive fillers in slots that do not contain a disk drive Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler To remove a hot swappable disk drive filler follow these steps 1 Squeeze the tabs on the front of the filler to release it from the slot in the drive bay 2 Pull gently until the filler slides out of the chassis Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler To replace a hot swappable disk drive filler follow these steps 1 Orient the disk drive filler so that the release tab is on the left side of the filler and the airflow holes are on the right side of the filler 2 Insert the filler into the slot guides and slide the filler into the slot until it clicks into place and is fully seated Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive A s Y Q There are eight hot pluggable disk drives located in the front of the server You can replace the hot
209. arate LAN port from the system LAN port It requires a separate Console Setup 83 84 LAN drop IP address and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system Figure 3 18 shows the server rear ports Figure 3 18 Server Rear Ports Console IOIOI Auxilia y IOIOI O iLO 2 MP RS 232 Serial VGA Port QM Link and Activity LED Port DB 9F to DB 9F No iLO 2 MP access EFI Standby Power cable only MP Self Test Connected to emulation terminal device PC General Use Serial Port laptop or ASCII Printers etc terminal 10 Base T 100 Base T USB 2 0 Ports Mode LED LO 2 MP LAN Port any USB device 10 100 LAN BMC Heartbeat MP Heartbeat Table 3 11 lists the appropriate connection method required connection components and connectors to the host console Use this table to determine your physical connection method Installing the System Table 3 11 Physical Connection Matrix Connection Method Required Connection Components RS 232 serial port 1 Host console 2 RS 232 serial port DB 9F to DB 9F cable 3 Emulation terminal device for example a PC laptop or ASCII terminal LAN port 10 100 LAN cable Determining the LO 2 MP LAN Configuration Method To access the iLO 2 MP through the iLO 2 MP LAN the iLO 2 MP must acquire an IP address The way the iLO 2 MP acquires an IP address is dependent upon whether DHCP is enabled or disabled on the server a
210. ard carefully or you can damage the plastic insulator material on the back of the board ES NOTE Use the guide posts located on the chassis and keyways located on the interconnect board to help you with the interconnect board removal and replacement procedures 1 Place the interconnect board onto the guide posts Insert your fingers into the board handle and push the board toward the rear of the chassis until it plugs into the socket on the midplane board Figure 6 36 3 Replace the SAS backplane See Replacing the SAS Backplane Board page 249 4 Guide the interconnect board air baffle into the chassis and snap it into place Figure 6 35 A CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 5 Reconnect the SAS data and power cables into the connectors on the SAS backplane Figure 6 34 6 Replace the display board See Replacing the Display Board page 245 7 Replace the SAS disk drives See Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 190 252 Removing and Replacing Server Components 8 Replace the DVD drive See Replacing the DVD Drive page 203 9 Reconnect the USB cable into the connector on the display board Figure 6 30 10 Replace the air
211. are Interface Boot Manager 317 point to the file to be loaded These variables contain application specific data that is passed directly to the EFI application EFI variables provides system firmware with a boot menu that points to all the operating systems even multiple versions of the same operating system The EFI Boot Manager enables you to control the server boot environment Depending on boot option configuration after the server is powered up the Boot Manager presents you with different ways to bring up the system For example you can boot to the EFI Shell to an operating system located on the network or residing on media in the server or to the EFI Boot Maintenance menu The following options are available in the EFl Boot Manager menu Boot from a File Automatically adds EFI applications as boot options or enables you to boot from a specific file When you select this option the system searches for an EFI directory If the EFI directory is found then it looks in each of the subdirectories below EFI In each of those subdirectories it looks for the first file that is an executable EFI application Each of the EFI applications that meet this criterion can be automatically added as a boot option In addition legacy boot options for A and C are also added if those devices are present You can also launch a specific application without adding it as a boot option In this case the EFI Boot Manager searches the root directories and
212. are not migrating PCI X SAS core I O skip this procedure PA 266 Upgrades See Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Card page 239 for this procedure f Move PCI PCI X Cards See Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 228 for this procedure Installing New SAS Core I O TIP If you are not installing new SAS core I O skip this procedure Section page 268 contains installation procedures for new SAS core I O cards There are four types of SAS core I O cards supported on the server e Half length generic PCI X SAS card supported on HP UX and Open VMS see Installing the HP Eight Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter page 269 for installation instructions e Full length PCI X SAS card with RAID capability supported on Windows and Linux see Installing the HP Smart Array P600 page 270 for installation instructions e Full length PCIe SAS card with RAID capability supported on HP UX OpenVMS Windows and Linux see Installing the HP Smart Array P400 page 271 for installation instructions e Full length PCIe SAS card with RAID capability able to connect to external storage supported on Windows and Linux see Installing the HP Smart Array P800 page 275 for installation instructions Installing the New I O Backplane IMPORTANT System information is stored on the I O board assembly You must write the serial number and model string information to the new I O board after installat
213. array is inactive Synchronize Array To perform a synchronization of the IM array press Enter on Synchronize Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y for yes or N for no This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The array is inactive e The array does not need to be resynchronized e The adapter s MPT firmware does not support the feature e Non IR firmware is used e IR is disabled The array is inactive Activate Array To perform an activation of an IM array press Enter on Activate Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y for yes or N for no Core I O Card Configuration 105 Delete Array To perform the deletion of the currently displayed IM array press Enter on Delete Array The screen prompts you to ask if you want to perform this action Press Y for yes and N for no Identifier Displays the identifier of this array Type Displays the RAID type Scan Order Displays the scan order of the array Size MB Displays the size of this array Status Displays the status of this array Exit the SAS Configuration Utility Screen As some changes only take effect when you exit the utility it is important to always exit the utility properly To exit the utility follow these steps 1 To return to the Adapter List from Adapter Properties press ESC 2 To exit the utility from the Adapter List press ESC A NOTE A similar exit s
214. art Exchange Part Customer Self Number Number Number Repair Processors AB576 2100B CPU module 1 4 GHz 12 MB Cache AB576 2100B AB576 69017 BY AB576AX AB577 2100B CPU module 1 6 GHz 18 MB Cache AB577 2100B AB577 69018 BY AB577AX AD391 2100C CPU 1 67 GHz 18MB dual core AD391 2100B AH241 6900A BY AD391AX AD390 2100C CPU 1 42 GHz 12MB dual core AD390 2100B AH240 6900A BY AD390AX Memory DIMMs AB563AX 512 MB DIMM AD326A AB563 69001 BY AB564AX 1 GB DIMM AD327A AB564 69001 BY AB565AX 2 GB DIMM AD328A AB565 69001 BY AB566AX 4 GB DIMM AD329A AB566 69001 BY PCI X and Core I O Cards AB352 60003 PCI X 2 Port GbE core card AB352 67003 n a BY 435234 001 PCI X serial attach SCSI adapter 435709 001 n a BY 336685 001 PCI X SAS RAID controller P600 370855 001 n a BY 309522 001N SAS controller cache P600 309522 001 n a BY 307132 001 SAS controller battery P600 307132 001 n a BY 012760 002 PCIe SAS RAID controller P400 405832 001 n a BY 012764 004 256 Cache module P400 405836 001 n a BY 258 Customer Replaceable Units Information Table A 2 CRU List continued Manufacturing Part Description Replacement Part Exchange Part Customer Self Number Number Number Repair 408658 001 Battery cable assembly 11 5 409124 001 n a BY 381573 001 Battery BBWC NiMH 3 6 V P400 amp 398648 001 n a BY P800 381572 001 PCIe
215. ary Page O Integrated Lights Out Advanced Function Tabs lt sym sais ETT MITES UTA A Navigation Bar Display Screen Status Summary General System Power Latest System Event Log Entry Firmware Revisions iLO MP BMC EFI System Firmware iLO IP Address Date amp Time Locator LED O on Boot completed 03 Nov 2004 11 41 57 E 03 10 02 26 01 10 01 10 15 255 99 64 11 03 2004 14 23 48 O WI Select the Web interface functions by clicking the Function tabs at the top of the page Each function lists options in the Navigation Bar on the left side of the page Click an option link to display data in the Display screen and click Refresh to update the display Click the Remote Console tab The remote console provides the following options to access the console e Aserial console that behaves similarly to the TUI of the following section e The virtual KVM console The iLO 2 MP Web interface has a robust help system To launch iLO 2 MP help click the Help tab in the Display screen or click the at the top right corner of each page to display help about that page Accessing the Host Console With the TUI CO Command This section provides the steps to access the host console using the text user interface TUI To access the host console through the iLO 2 MP follow these steps 1 2 Log in using your user account name and password at the login page At the iLO 2 MP login prompt
216. as been determined and the OS is running normally 146 Troubleshooting Table 5 4 Advanced Entry Class Troubleshooting continued Step 8a Symptom Condition Action Machine Check Abort MCA Front panel LEDs indicate that the server detected a fatal error that occurs during server operation it cannot recover from using OS recovery routines system health is the server reboots the OS flashing red internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Capture the MCA dump with the EFI command errdumpmca If the system can boot the OS you can capture binary MCA dump files online 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for information The problem is fixed when the MCA does not repeat or the source of the MCA has been determined and repaired 8b Machine Check Abort MCA The front panel LEDs indicate that the server detected a fatal front occurs during server operation side bus error caused by MBEs reading cache or DIMM or by any server reboot of OS is prevented parity in the I O path between SBA LBA or HBA system health is ff int l health is flashi t l health is stead NOTE The troubleshooting off internal health is flashing amber external health is steady green and power is steady green acuons f
217. ase T 100 Base T Mode LED iLO 2 MP LAN Port 10 100 LAN held for at least four seconds The following values are reset to factory defaults when the button is held for at least four seconds e Serial terminal baud rate settings e User names and passwords Core I O Board Ports Table 1 6 lists a description of the core I O board ports shown in Figure 1 14 Table 1 6 Core I O Board Ports Port Description 10 Base T 100 Base T LAN LAN port dedicated for remote access to the iLO 2 MP Auxiliary Serial Local serial port Console Serial LO 2 MP Local serial port that provides a console connection to the server USB Two public USB 2 0 ports used primarily to connect to a keyboard and mouse for console input functions Windows and Linux operating systems only VGA optional VGA port used primarily to connect to a monitor that displays console output Windows and Linux operating systems only iLO 2 MP Status LEDs Table 1 7 shows the states and status of the iLO 2 MP status and LAN LEDs Table 1 7 iLO 2 MP Status and LAN LEDs iLO 2 MP LED States Status Standby power Solid green Standby power is on Amber iLO 2 MP self test running iLO 2 MP Self test Off Self test completed iLO 2 MP Heartbeat Flashing green Operational and functional BMC Heartbeat Flashing green Operational and functional Blinking green Activity Link Status Solid green Link with no activity Off No link Solid amber 100 M
218. astic cover Disconnect the USB cable from the connector on the display board Figure 6 30 Remove the DVD drive See Removing the DVD Drive page 202 Locate the knurled thumbscrew behind the DVD drive that holds the display board in place Figure 6 30 Turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise until the board releases from the chassis Remove the top two screws from the right side of the bezel Pull the bezel out from the chassis approximately one half inch so that the display board can clear the locator and power buttons Figure 6 30 CAUTION Do not pull the bezel out from the chassis more than one half inch Do not use the USB connector as a handle to remove the display board Failure to observe these cautions can result in damage to server components Hold the bezel out from the chassis and use the diagnostic panel light guide as a handle to simultaneously push the board to the left to unplug it from the socket on the interconnect board NOTE Use the guide pins on the chassis and the L shaped keyways on the display board to help you with the display board removal procedures Slide the board toward the rear of the chassis until it stops against the guide pins Tilt the board toward the front of the chassis and lift it out at an angle Removing and Replacing the Display Board 243 14 Remove the diagnostic panel light guide by squeezing the plastic tabs until they disengage from the slots on the board Figure 6 32
219. ation SAS Port Indicates the associated SAS Port 0 to N as configured on this adapter Link Status Indicates the PHY link status Possible values are e Enabled Unknown Link Rate e PHY Disabled e Enabled negotiation failed e Enabled SATA OOB Complete e Enabled 1 5 Gbs e Enabled 3 0 Gbs Discovery Status 32 bit hexidecimal value indicating the discovery status for the PHY or Expander Currently defined values are e Discovery completed successfully 0x00000000 e Loop Detected 0x00000001 e Unaddressable device exists 0x00000002 e Multiple Ports 0x00000004 e Expander Error 0x00000008 e SMP Timeout 0x00000010 e Out of route entries 0x00000020 e SMP Response Index Does Not Exist 0x00000040 e SMP Response Function Failed 0x00000080 e SMP CRC error 0x00000100 Device Identifier Indicates the ASCII device identifier string extracted from the device s Inquiry Data Scan Order Indicates the scan order for this device equivalent of a SCSI ID for parallel SCSI Device Information Indicates if a device is SAS SAS Address Indicates the SAS Address of this device Link Error Setting e Invalid DWORDs Number of invalid dwords that have been received outside of PHY reset sequences since the last PHY Link Error Reset e Loss of DWORD Sync Number of times since the last PHY Link Error Reset that dword synchronization was lost and the link reset sequence occurred 298 Core I O Card Utilities e Running Di
220. atus Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 S VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example D 12 conconfig 3 off command To disable a console Shell gt conconfig 3 off CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index Status Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 NC VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example D 13 conconfig 3 on command To enable a console Shell gt conconfig 3 on CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index Status Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 S VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 iocontig Use this command to deconfigure or reconfigure I O components or settings Syntax ioconfig lt fast_init mps_optimize wol gt lt on off gt Parameters lt fast_init gt specifies device connection policy setting lt mps optimize gt specifies PCIe MPS optimization setting lt wol gt specifies system wake on lan setting lt on off gt specifies to configure or deconfigure a feature or component Operation The ioconf ig file is used to retain information on system s I O configuration across reboots The ioconfig file is created by insf at install time and is modified by insf rmsf and ioscan when devices are added or removed The only purpose of the ioconfig file to maintain configuration information when the system is not running 326 Utilities default Example D 14 ioconfig command Shell gt io
221. b link Link Speed Off 10 Mb link 1 The LED is solid amber when ac power is first applied It remains solid amber for a few seconds until the iLO 2 MP completes its self test the LED then turns off System LAN The system LAN functionality is provided by the LAN core I O card The ports on the LAN core T O card are two RJ 45 style 10 Base T 100 Base T 1000 Base T system LAN ports Table 1 8 show the system LAN link status and speed LEDs states and status Controls Ports and LEDs 43 Table 1 8 System LAN Link Status and Speed LEDs LED State Link Status Blinking green Activity Link status Solid green Link with no activity Off No link Solid orange 1000 Mb Link speed Solid green 100 Mb Off 10 Mb Power Supply The server can have one or two power supplies labeled PSO and PS1 Each power supply has an ac input receptacle and an LED that shows the power state of the server Figure 1 13 page 41 The server has three power states standby power full power and off Plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the chassis to achieve the standby power state To bring the server to full power either activate the power using the iLO 2 MP PC command or push the power button To bring the server to the off state unplug the power cords For more information on power states see Power States page 93 Table 1 9 lists the power supply LED states Table 1 9 Power S
222. baffle Figure 6 33 11 Replace the clear plastic cover 12 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 13 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 14 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 we IMPORTANT Serial number and model string data information is stored on both the interconnect board and the I O board When you install a new interconnect board you must copy this information from the I O board to the new interconnect board 15 Respond YES to prompts regarding copying information onto the new board 16 Verify the serial number and model string data information copied onto the new interconnect board a Boot to EFI b Enter service mode Shell gt sysmode service Current System Mode ADMIN You are now in SERVICE mode c Use the sysset command to verify that all values are set Shell gt sysset System Information Manufacturer hp Product Name server rx3600 Product Number AB463A Secondary Product Number is Identical Serial number SGH43442VB Secondary Serial Number is Identical UUID 3C33C58E 2E5A 11D8 A33B 4188COAEFAE2 Valid Secondary UUID is Identical Product ID 0x301 Removing and Replacing the Midplane Board The midplane board is attached to the main bulkhead in the center of the chassis It provides a connection between the p
223. by power will be supplied on either hence the BMC will power up when the power supplies are plugged in The BPSO_AC_OK and BPS1_AC_OK signals indicate whether the ac voltage to the power supplies is within the required range If neither BPSO_AC_OK nor BPS1_AC_OkK is asserted then the BMC should log an event and prevent the system from turning on Power Button The power button on the rx3600 is a momentary contact push button The BMC polls the front panel power button at a rate of at least 2 Hz The power button is an input to the System Power State Management If the system is off a single button press will turn on the system If the system has booted to an OS and a short button press is detected a graceful shutdown request will be sent to the system by pulsing ACPI_PWR_BTN_L when the ACPI bits are set to note the O S has shut down the BMC will perform a hard power down If the system has not booted to an OS or if a long 5 second button press is detected the system will do an immediate hard power off System Power State Management The system power may be controlled from the power button an IPMI Chassis command Wake On LAN loss or gain of ac Power On Sequence 1 Update the cache of DIMM SPD information 2 Ensure that the memory board is detected and that the cpu board has a processor in socket 0 If these FRUs are not detected the BMC logs an event against the Missing Device sensor sensor 0x15 3 Check foraBPSO_AC_OKoraBPS1_AC_O
224. card divider by the handle and pull upward to eject the PCI PCI X PCle card from the slot Grasp the PCI PCI X PCle card by the edges and lift it out of the chassis CAUTION When inserting the PCI PCI X PCle card be careful that you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the other MRLs this shuts down that PCI PCI X PCle card slot If you do this push the attention button again within five seconds to cancel the shutdown Also ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can fail after power is reapplied to the slot Insert the PCI PCI X PCle card into the empty slot and use firm even pressure to seat the card in the slot Reconnect all internal and external cables to the PCI PCI X PCle card Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card if it is full length Activate the PCI PCI X PCle card and slot a Press the red attention button located on the MRL of the appropriate slot and the power LED starts to blink b Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady on NOTE After pushing the attention button you have five seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the attention button again After five seconds pressing the attention button initiates slot powerdown for online replacement OLR of the card Replace the top cover
225. cated on the processor board A CAUTION Do not apply excessive force when closing the extraction handles and seating the memory carrier assembly into the socket on the processor board Manipulate the extraction handles with care Failure to observe these cautions can result in damage to the extraction handles and other server components 4 Rotate the extraction handles inward and press the handles straight down until they snap into the locked position 5 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 58 Installing System Memory DIMMs A System memory or DIMMs are located on a pair of memory boards inside the memory carrier assembly WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Figure 3 7 page 66 shows the memory carrier assembly removed from the chassis Figure 3 8 shows the memory carrier with the s
226. cessor install tool Rotate the cam counterclockwise 180 degrees half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket CAUTION Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket Remove any protective packaging from the processor NOTE Protective covers are installed to protect connector pins Save the covers for future use Inspect the processor pins and verify that the pins are not bent Align the alignment holes on the processor with the alignment posts on the processor cage and carefully lower the processor onto the processor socket Figure 3 14 CAUTION Do not press the processor into the socket When properly aligned the processor pins seat into the socket No additional pressure is required You can damage pins if too much pressure is applied Lock the processor into the socket on the processor board Figure 3 14 a Unfasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver from the tool holder on the processor board b Insert the processor tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink c Rotate the processor tool clockwise 180 degrees A CAUTION Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket d Refasten the processor install tool to the tool holder on the processor board Reconnect the processor power cable into the connector cable that attaches directly to the proces
227. cessors four cores A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Intel Montvale processors cannot be intermixed with similar Montecito processors Processor speed and cache size must be identical for all processors in a system Whether upgrading replacing or adding an additional processor to ensure compatibility use processors with identical part numbers Failure to observe this caution results in performance degradation or system failure CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Processor Load Order The server can have up to two dual core processors on the processor board The slots on the processor board are labeled Module 0 and Module 1 Table 3 7 lists the processor load sequence Table 3 7 Processor Load Order Dual Core Processor 1 Module 0 2 Module 1 Required Tools To install processors use the processor install tool fastened to the processor board Installing a Dual Core Processor To install a dual core process
228. ch m is the number of minutes e now to immediately shut down this is equivalent to using 0 to wait zero minutes For details see the shutdown 8 Linux manpage Also see the Linux manpage for the poweroff command To shutdown Linux follow these steps 1 Log in to Linux running on the system you want to shut down 2 Issue the shutdown command with the desired command line options and include the required time argument to specify when the operating system shutdown is to occur For example shutdown r 20 shuts down and reboots the system in twenty minutes 138 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System 5 Troubleshooting This chapter provides preferred strategies procedures and tools for troubleshooting rx3600 server error and fault conditions This chapter addresses the following topics e Methodology page 139 e Troubleshooting Tools page 147 e Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 e Supported Configurations page 155 e CPU Memory and SBA page 158 e System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 e Cooling Subsystem page 166 e Common I O Backplane page 167 e Management Subsystem page 170 e T O Subsystem page 171 e Booting page 173 e Firmware page 174 e Server Interface page 174 e Environment page 175 e Reporting Your Problems to HP page 175 Methodology General Troubleshooting Methodology Th
229. chassis and lift it off the chassis Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel 215 Figure 6 18 Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel Plastic Server Label Screw Location gt lt PE F E no ee a J amp Front Bezel Replacing the Front Bezel To replace the front bezel follow these steps Align the bezel slots with the tabs on the chassis Slide the bezel from right to left to lock it into place Tilt the bezel toward the chassis until it is flush with the chassis Flip in the two pull handles located on both ends of the front bezel Replace the three screws that attach the bezel to the right side of the chassis Replace the three screws that attach the bezel to the left side of the chassis Reinsert the plastic label with the notched end on the bottom and push it into the slot in the bezel 8 Slide the processor board assembly into the chassis until it begins to seat into the socket located on the midplane board 9 Push the processor board access door upward until it locks into position 10 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 205 11 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 12 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 13 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94
230. cifies the maximum number of devices attached to the adapter for which to install a pre OS IO interface Max Spin ups Specifies the maximum number of targets that can be simultaneously spinning up The IOC must delay by the time indicated in spin up delay field before starting spin up of the next set of targets A value of zero in the Maximum Target Spinups field is treated the same as a value of one IO Timeouts Specifies the time which the host uses to timeout I Os for the following devices with Non Removable Media e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type OER Simplified Direct Access IO Timeouts Removable Specifies the time which the host uses to timeout I Os for the following devices with Removable Media e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 05h CD ROM e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type OEh Simplified Direct Access 296 Core I O Card Utilities IO Timeouts for Sequential Devices IO Timeouts for Other Devices LUNs to Scan for Block Devices LUNs to Scan for Block Devices Removable LUNs to Scan for Sequential Devices LUNs to Scan for Other Devices Spinup Properties Screen Specifies the time Time in seconds 0 999 0 means no timeout which the host uses to timeout I Os for the following devices e SCSI Device Type 01h Sequential Access Specifies the ti
231. config Deconfigure or reconfigure IO components or settings IOCONFIG fast_init wol on off fast_init Specifies device connection policy setting mps optimie Specifies PCIe optimization setting wol Specifies System Wake On LAN setting on off Specifies to configure or deconfigure a feature or component Note 1 If fast_init is enabled firmware will connect only the minimum set of devices during boot This feature might cause boot failure disable this feature if failure occurs 2 A reboot is required for PCIe MPS sptimiation changes to take effect 3 Any pending Wake On LAN request will not be cleared until reboot if the setting is changed to disabled System will clear pending Wake On LAN requests each time the system reboots if the setting is disabled Examples To display the current settings fs0 gt ioconfig Fast initialization Enabled MPS optimization Disabled System Wake On LAN Disabled To display the current device connection policy setting fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init Fast initialization Enabled To disable fast initialization fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init off Fast initialization Disabled To enable the System Wake On LAN setting fs0 gt loconfig wol on System Wake On LAN Enabled Enables you to restore non volatile memory NVM to default values and clear NVM storage values Syntax default efi sal default clear bmc efi sal Parameters clear clears NVM storage val
232. core I O cards SAS core I O cards and the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card Slots 1 and 2 are not hot pluggable Install only supported PCI X SAS and LAN core I O cards in slots 1 and 2 Depending upon the number and type of SAS core I O cards installed on the system the Gigabit Ethernet LAN core I O card may be installed in slot 10 Slots 3 and 4 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 3 and 4 is PCI X 266 MHz Slots 5 and 6 are nonshared slots The maximum speed for cards in slots 5 and 6 is PCI X 133 MHz Slots 7 8 9 and 10 are shared slots These four slots are limited by bus mode or frequency related incompatibilities If you use different modes such as PCI instead of PCI X or different card speeds in a shared bus environment the slot automatically downgrades to the lesser mode or speed The maximum capability of each slot is PCI X 66 MHz See Shared Slots page 197 for more information Some PCI PCI X failures result in I O path logging These paths help to indicate the source of the error and can be included in the error message or logged into console or event logs Table 6 1 describes the PCI PCI X I O paths for the server Table 6 1 PCI PCI X I O Paths Slot Function Location HP UX Device Path EFI Device Path with Path as viewed from rear of chassis 1 SAS core Left most 0 4 1 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 16 I O card slot private nearest to power supply 2 Dual port 2nd
233. creen is used when exiting most other screens and can be used to save settings The exit screen shows some options that are grey indicating that they are not available You can only select the available options The exit choices are as follows e Are you sure you want to exit e Cancel Exit e Save changes and reboot e Discard changes and reboot e Exit the Configuration Utility and Reboot CFGGEN Utility The cfggen utility is a command line utility that runs in the Linux EFI and Windows Pre Installation WinPE environments It is a minimally interactive program that you execute from a command line prompt or a shell script The results from invoking this utility are communicated through the program status value that is returned when the program exits Use the cfggen utility to create IM storage configurations on SAS controllers Some cfggen commands work only with SAS adaptors in the EFI environment Starting CFGGEN Thecfggenutility is located on the HP IPF Offline Diagnostic and Utilities CD To use cfggen follow these steps 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Boot the system to the EFI Shell prompt 3 From the EFI Shell prompt change to the CD drive shell gt fs0 Enter fs0 gt 4 Change to the directory that containscfggen efi fs0 gt cd EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK Enter fs0 EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK gt From this directory use c ggen 106 Installing the System A CFGGEN Operation The cfggen command is n
234. cting the Server 55 Installing Additional Components This section describes how to install components into the server that are not factory integrated Most servers are pre configured with all components installed prior to shipping from the HP factory If you do not have additional components to install go on to Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal Mount page 78 This section addresses the following topics e Removing and Replacing the Top Cover page 56 e Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 57 e Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply page 58 e Removing and Replacing Hot Swappable Disk Drive Fillers page 59 e Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 60 e Installing a PCI PCI X PCle Card page 62 e Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 65 e Installing System Memory DIMMs page 67 e Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly page 73 e Installing a Dual Core Processor page 74 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover This section describes how to remove and replace the server s top cover Removing the Top Cover 56 To remove the top cover follow these steps 1 Unlock the cover release lever Figure 3 1 by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise 2 Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover from the chassis Figure 3 1 page 57 ES NOTE Th
235. d Within HP Integrity rx3600 servers temperature sensors report chassis temperatures to the BMC which controls fan speed based on this information Table 5 22 lists the cooling subsystem events that light the diagnostic panel LEDs 166 Troubleshooting Table 5 22 Cooling Subsystem Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs Fans 1 3 Type 02h 0Ah 07h 01h The fan has failed or BMC Replace the fan COOLING UNIT WARNING is degrading Fans 1 3 Type 02h 0Ah 07h 02h The fan has failed BMC Replace the fan COOLING_UNIT_FAILURE and no longer meets minimum cooling requirements Common I O Backplane This subsection provides information on troubleshooting issues with the eight public and two private PCI X slots I O Subsystem Behavior The I O subsystem transfers blocks of data and instruction words between physical shared memory and virtual memory system disks disk array The system boot is the first time blocks of data and instructions words are transferred into physical shared memory from a local disk or DVD or from a remote disk on another server using multiple LAN transfers This process is referred to as Direct Memory Access DMA It is initiated by I O devices located in core I O or on Host Bus Adapter HBA I O cards and does not involve any logical CPUs The I O subsystem also transfers data between the internal registers within each CPU core and the intern
236. d The status LED is not monitored by the OS Lightpipes on the disk drive transmit light to these apertures from LEDs on the inside rear of the hot swap mass storage cage Verify that the activity LED shows the correct activity indication for all disk drives that you installed 1 Power on the server and attached monitor 2 During the boot sequence watch the activity LED on each hard disk drive e The LED quickly cycles from amber to green and stays steady green until the drive spins up e When the drive is finished spinning up the LED turns off 3 Ifthe activity LED stays illuminated steady green on a disk drive after the drive spins up the drive cage may not be correctly installed To check the installation follow these steps a Power off the server and unplug the ac power cords and cables b Verify that the SAS interface is correctly installed c Reconnect the ac power cords and cables Power on the server and repeat steps 1 and 2 If any activity LEDs remain lit contact HP T O Subsystem 171 4 If the activity LED on a disk drive does not illuminate during the boot cycle the disk drive may be installed incorrectly or its lightpipes may be damaged Check the lightpipe on the disk drive as follows a Remove the disk drive b Inspect the lightpipes for damage If a lightpipe is damaged contact HP A CAUTION The lightpipes are fragile Be careful not to damage them when you inspect them or when you reinsert the di
237. d a problem with the de power rail not coming up after the power switch was turned on You have now reached the point where the failed Field Replaceable Unit FRU or FRUs has been identified and needs to be replaced You must now perform the specific removal and replacement procedure and verification steps See Chapter 6 Removing and Replacing Server Components page 177 for information A NOTE If multiple FRUs are identified as part of the solution a fix cannot be guaranteed unless all identified failed FRUs are replaced There may be specific recovery procedures you must perform to finish the repair For example if the core I O board FRU is replaced restore customer specific information ES NOTE Always check the iLO 2 MP system event logs SEL in the case of a blinking yellow or red front panel LED before replacing any hardware NOTE For system level 3 5 alerts the attention condition on the system LED can be cleared by accessing the logs using the s1 command available in the MP Main Menu To access the iLO 2 MP from the console serial port enter Control B or ESC Recommended Troubleshooting Methodology The recommended methodology for troubleshooting a server error or fault is as follows 1 Consult the system console for any messages emails or other information pertaining to the server error or fault 2 View the front panel LEDs Power External Health Internal Health and System Health eithe
238. d access the HPUX EFI loader Type help for help HPUX gt At the HPUX EFI HPUX gt enter the boot is vmunix command to boot HP UX in single user mode HPUX gt boot is vmunix gt System Memory 4063 MB loading section 0 A AS E gaat A A A E al SA complete loading section 1 pr A complete Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 127 loading symbol table loading System Directory boot sys to MFS loading MFSFILES Directory bootfs to MFS Launching stand vmunix SIZE Text 25953K Data 3715K BSS 3637K Total 33306K Console is on a Serial Device Booting kernel Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them a Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu b To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main Menu Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode To boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want
239. d in CPU socket 0 on the processor board CRU and its threads must be enabled by user actions You can install an additional identical processor in CPU socket 1 Processor Module Behaviors All enabled CPUs and their threads become functional when the system powers on Each thread acquires instructions from the CPU instruction and data caches to complete early self tests and rendezvous The CPU communicates with the PDH until memory is configured After the memory is configured the CPUs communicate with memory Local machine check abort MCA events cause the physical CPU core and one or both of its logical CPUs within that processor module to fail while all other physical CPUs and their logical threads continue operating Double bit data cache errors in any physical CPU core cause a Global MCA event that causes all logical threads and physical CPUs in the server to fail and reboot the operating system Processor Problem Identification e A diagnostic LED only lights for physical CPU core errors when a specific processor module is isolated If there is any uncertainty about a specific CPU the CRU LED on the diagnostic panel is not lighted Check the SEL for any errors or warnings e For physical configuration errors for example when there is no processor module installed in CPU socket 0 all the CRU LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel light for all the missing processor modules e Nodiagnostic messages are reported for single bit errors tha
240. dapter List screen also identifies the adapter Main area The main area for presenting data This area has a cursor for item selection and horizontal and vertical scroll bars if necessary Footer area Provides general help information text Figure C 1 provides a map of how screens are accessed in the DRVCFG utility Figure C 1 Accessed Screens in the DRVCFG Utility Adaptor List Adaptor Properties SAS Typology Device Properties Exit Screen Advanced Adaptor Properties Spinup Properties Select New Array Type Advanced Device Properties Array Manage Array Device Format Device Verify DRVCFG Screens PHY Properties Adapter List Screen The Adapter List screen displays when the configuration utility is first started This screen displays a scrolling list of up to 256 SAS controllers in the system and information about each 286 Core I O Card Utilities of them Use the arrow keys to select a SAS controller and press Enter to view and modify the selected SAS controller s properties You can view and modify the SAS controller whether it is enabled or disabled You can use the Boot Support setting in the Adapter Properties menu to change the status of this setting You must reconnect the EFI Driver in order for a new Boot Support setting to take effect The following are the descriptions for the Adapter List screen Adapter Indicates the specific SAS
241. dated Question This image does not contain a valid nvdata when I try to flash the firmware why Answer You are expected to concatenate a proper nvdata image on to the firmware MPTUTIL keeps you from flashing an image without one To concatenate nvdata and firmware you need to run the mptutil o d 64it_ 1 fw sas106x dat output fw command e 64it_l fw isthe firmware image without a nvdata image e sas106x dat is the nvdata image This file depends on the type rev of HBA on which the firmware is used e output fwis the name of the file created with the firmware and nvdata concatenated This concatenated image can be used for all boards of this type or revision Question How do I program multiple cards in a system from the command line Answer MPTUTIL EFI does not support this Question Can I program a new flash and option ROM in the same command line argument Answer Yes Run the mptutil f lt firmware_name gt b lt option_rom_name gt command Viewing the VPD Information for EFI Driver and RISC Firmware To view the VPD information for the EFI driver and RISC firmware enter mptutil o vpd c Oatthe fsO gt prompt EFl Commands To configure an Integrated Mirror IM Array on the SAS Controller use the following EFI commands e DRVCFG GUI interface e CFGGEN command line interface A NOTE If you are not using the IM functionality do not follow these procedures DRVCFG Utility 98 To configure an IM o
242. dicates the size of the array in MegaBytes Bay Displays the bay in which devices are located Device Identifier Displays the device identifier RAID Disk Specifies the devices disks that make up an IM array If RAID Disk is Yes the device is part of an IM array if No the device is not part of an IM array This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The device is not large enough to mirror existing data on the primary drive e This disk has been selected as the hot spare for the IM array Hot Spr Specifies whether a device is the hot spare for an IM array If hot spare is Yes the device is used as a hot spare for the IM array if No the device is not used as a hot spare for the IM array Only one hot 102 Installing the System Drive Status Pred Fail Size MB View Array Screen spare per IM array is permitted A hot spare is not required in an IM You can specify a hot spare at array creation or any time after creation provided the array is made up of five disks or fewer This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The array already has a hot spare e The array is made up of the maximum number of devices six e The device isn t large enough to mirror existing data on the primary The hot spare drive must be greater than or equal to
243. ding to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of batteries in a fire Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Removing the Core I O Board Battery WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server we IMPORTANT Before removing the system battery record all boot and LAN configuration settings Find the settings using the INFO ALL EFI command You must reset these values after replacing the battery To remove the core I O board battery follow these steps 1 ON OSD Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 181
244. down gracefully To shut down Windows Server 2003 use one of the following methods e Shutting Down Windows from the Start Menu page 134 e Shutting Down Windows from the Command Line page 134 Shutting Down Windows from the Start Menu Select Shut Down from the Start menu and select either Restart or Shut down from the pull down menu The Restart menu item shuts down and restarts the system The Shut down menu item shuts down the system You can use this method when using a graphical interface to the system Shutting Down Windows from the Command Line You can issue the shutdown command from a command prompt through the Special Administration Console SAC or from any other command line The Windows shutdown command includes the following options s Shuts down and powers off the system This is the equivalent of Start gt Shut Down Shut down To power on the system use the iLO 2 MP PC command r Shuts down and restarts the system This is the equivalent of Start gt Shut Down Restart a Aborts a system shutdown t xxx Sets the timeout period before shutdown to xxx seconds The timeout period ranges from 0 600 with a default of 30 134 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System See the help shutdown Windows command for details To shutdown Windows from the command line follow these steps 1 Log in to Windows running on the system that you want to shut down For example access the syst
245. dware and firmware EFI supports boot devices uses a flat memory model and hides platform and firmware details from the OS A NOTE EFI and Pre OS System Environment POSSF are similar EFI is an Intel specification whereas POSSE is the HP implementation that aids HP support EFI consolidates boot utilities similar to those found in PA RISC systems such as the Boot Console Handler BCH and platform firmware into a single platform firmware EFI enables the selection of any EFI OS loader from any boot medium that is supported by EFI boot services An EFI OS loader supports multiple options on the user interface EFI supports booting from media that contain an EFI OS loader or an EFI defined system partition An EFI defined system partition is required by EFI to boot from a block device Figure D 1 EFI Boot Sequence EFI EFI OS Loader Application Bootcode EFI API EFI Image Boot Services Load Terminate Platform Init OS Loader Load Standard Drivers and Boot from Operation Firmware Application Ordered List Handed Off to Platform Loaded of EFI OS OS Loader Initialization Iteratively Loaders Application Program Interface API specified Value add implementation The EFI Boot Manager loads EFI applications including the OS first stage loader and EFI drivers from an EFI defined file system or image loading service Non volatile RAM NVRAM variables Extensible Firmw
246. e DIMMs If you do not pull the ac power plugs the system does not display the correct DIMM information To install memory follow these steps 1 A Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 212 Removing and Replacing Server Components ES NOTE To avoid damage to the memory carrier extraction handles HP recommends rotating the handles inward and snapping them into the locked position when servicing the system DIMMs or any time the carrier is out of the chassis Before replacing the memory carrier press the button to release the extraction handles Use the handles to replace the memory carrier into the chassis 5 Complete the following memory installation prerequisite tasks before installing the memory a Determine the DIMM load order as appropriate for the 8 DIMM or 24 DIMM memory carrier For more information see Memory Load Order page 20
247. e Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor page 218 280 Upgrades Firmware Before upgrading the processor ensure the server is at the required system firmware level Check the system firmware version by executing the info fw command at the EFI Shell prompt EL NOTE HP recommends using the latest version of firmware Go to http www hp com support itaniumservers to download firmware updates Operating systems we IMPORTANT Check the HP IT Resource Center ITRC web site at http itre hp com for any required OS patches HP UX HP UX supports the processor upgrade at the following minimum release levels e HP UX 11 23 0706 e HP UX 11 31 0709 OpenVMS OpenVMS must be upgraded to OpenVMS V8 3 1H1 to support the processor upgrade Windows Windows supports the processor upgrade Linux Linux supports the processor upgrade If you choose to move any I O cards or storage during this upgrade Linux must be reinstalled Processor Upgrades 281 282 C Core I O Card Utilities This appendix provides information on core I O cards that need additional configuration This appendix addresses the following topics e Integrated RAID page 96 e HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller page 96 e MPTUTIL Utility page 96 e DRVCFG Utility page 98 e CFGGEN Utility page 106 e Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers page 109 e SAUPDATE Utility
248. e current bus configuration The following are common configuration scenarios for cards that use shared slots These examples also apply to slots 9 and 10 because they are shared both use a common bus 1 If there is a PCI X 66 MHz card in slot 7 and you hot plug insert a PCI 33 MHz card into slot 8 the operation fails The new PCI 33 MHz card does not initialize and the slot powers down because you cannot change bus speed during hot pluggable operations The new card has a slower bus speed than the current card Installing Additional Components 63 ES NOTE If the server is rebooted in the new configuration both cards initialize to run at PCI 33 MHz This is because the system firmware can only change the bus capability down to the lowest common value If there is a PCI 33 MHz card in slot 7 and you hot plug insert a PCI X 66 MHz card into slot 8 the new card works but it runs at PCI 33 MHz If the server is powered off and you insert a PCI 33 MHz card into slot 7 with a PCI X 66 MHz card is installed in slot 8 then both cards run at PCI 33 MHz when the server powers up Table 3 2 lists the PCI PCI X card slot frequency and bus mode compatibility for shared slots Table 3 2 PCI PCI X Card Slot Frequency and Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared Slots 4 Current PCI Bus Cards to be Installed Mode and Frequency for the PCI 33 PCI 66 PCI X 66 PCI X 133 PCI X 266 Card in a Shared Slot PCI 33 MHz Compatible C
249. e in MB Physical hard disks Target ID Initiator at ID 63 Target on ID 1 Device is a Hard disk Enclosure Slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Target on ID 4 302 Core I O Card Utilities SAS1068 2 00 09 00 1 10 01 00 1 Serial Attached SCSI 63 Okay OKY 8 1 Online ONL 34732 71132960 HP DG036A8B53 HPD6 3LC04757000085425VFK SAS Device is a Hard disk Enclosure slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Target on ID 5 Device is a Hard disk Enclosure slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Target on ID 6 Device is a Hard disk Enclosure slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Target on ID 7 Device is a Hard disk Enclosure slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Target on ID 9 Device is a Hard disk Enclosure slot Target ID State Size in MB in sectors Manufacturer Model Number Firmware Revision Serial No Drive Type Enclosure Logical ID Numslots 1 5 4 Ready RDY 70007 143374738 HP DG072A8B54 HPD6 3LB02CXH00008523E832Z SAS 1 4 5 Ready RDY 70007 1
250. e a feature or component Note 1 If fast_init is enabled firmware will connect only the minimum set of devices during boot This feature might cause boot failure disable this feature if failure occurs 2 Any pending Wake On LAN request will not be cleared until reboot if the setting is changed to disabled System will clear pending Wake On LAN requests each time the system reboots if the setting is disabled Examples To display the current settings fs0 gt ioconfig Fast initialization Enabled System Wake On LAN Disabled To display the current device connection policy setting fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init Fast initialization Enabled To disable fast initialization fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init off Fast initialization Disabled To enable the System Wake On LAN setting fs0 gt loconfig wol on System Wake On LAN Enabled baud Sets the baud rate and communication settings for a universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UART 322 Utilities Syntax baud lt index gt lt baudrate gt Parameters lt index gt 0 through the total number of UARTS minus one baud rate lt baudrate gt Operation Use this command to change the speed for a UART in the system This command works for all UARTs visible to EFI POSSE If the UART is part of processor dependent hardware PDH space and is initialized by the core firmware this command communicates the settings to core firmware so the UART can be i
251. e changes to Output Input and Error menus for proper operation Table D 5 Console Output Devices Device Select Serial A Serial 1 Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 iLO 2 MP Serial Console Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 111 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 iLO 2 MP VGA Port Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 2 10 e Each option is identified with an EFI device path Not all options are available depending on the configuration of the system and the options available Device paths can differ slightly on different product models e On both serial device examples UART 9600 indicates the current baud rate of the serial device which can be changed with the EFI Shell baud command VenMsg Vt100 is the current emulation type Several different terminal emulation protocols are supported as described in the previous example e Only one terminal emulation type PcAnsi Vt100 and so on can be selected for each serial console but multiple serial consoles can be selected at once Select Active Console Input Devices A Use this option to define the devices that are used to provide input to the system console This option displays the console devices on the system This can include a standard keyboard and mouse and a serial port for receiving output from a terminal emulation package on a laptop Several different terminal emulation protocols are supported When you change serial devices you must make changes to Output Input and Er
252. e cover release lever also disengages the memory carrier assembly cover The memory carrier assembly cover can remain in place while servicing any components except for the memory carrier assembly and the processor board assembly 3 Slide the cover toward the rear of the server until the tabs release from the slots in the chassis 4 Lift the cover off the chassis Installing the System Figure 3 1 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover Top Cover Cover Release Lever Latch Unl atch s Memory Carrier Assembly Cower Replacing the Top Cover A NOTE Always replace the memory carrier assembly cover before replacing the top cover To replace the top cover follow these steps 1 2 4 5 6 Ensure the memory carrier assembly cover is in place Ensure the cover release lever is in the open position and that the memory cover is firmly seated or the top cover cannot be installed Figure 3 1 Align the tabs of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis Insert the tabs into the slots Slide the cover forward until it is flush with the front of the chassis Push the cover release lever down into the latched position Figure 3 1 Lock the cover release lever Turning the cam 90 degrees clockwise Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover This section describes how to remove and replace the memory carrier cover Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover To remove
253. e main Boot Options Maintenance menu e Enter Selects an item after using the arrow keys to highlight the item e Save Settings to NVRAM Saves your changes NOTE The options shown here are examples Your system may have different options available based on the system configuration and installed hardware components All devices in the server are represented by paths in the EFI Shell To identify the correct socket or disk drive use the following tables Table D 3 Server Sockets Socket Path 1 PCI Acpi HWP0002 400 pci 000 2 PCI Acpi HWP0003 400 pci 000 Table D 4 Server Drives Drive Path SCSI Disk Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 100 Scsi Pun0 Lun0 SCSI Disk Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 101 Scsi Pun0 Lun1 Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 200 ATA Primary Master Boot From a File A Use this option to manually run a specific application or driver NOTE This option boots the selected application or driver one time only When you exit the application you return to this menu This option displays the file systems on your server or workstation and enables you to browse these file systems for applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the efi extension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on the network Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 343 For example Boot From a File Select a Volume NO VOLUME LABEL Acpi HWP0002 0
254. e skipped In this example the Smart Array 6400 controller is updated and the Smart Array 5300 is skipped fs0 gt saupdate UPDATE all CYBORG234 BIN Replace CYBORG234 BIN with the name of your firmware file The following screen displays showing the controllers that are updated and skipped kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Updating controller in Seg 1 Bus 51 Dev 4 Func 0 Current firmware version 1 92 Percentage completed 100 Activating firmware now this may take several minutes Resetting and reinitializing controller Retrieving firmware version this may take several minutes Current controller firmware version is 2 34 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Firmware Image is not suitable for HP Smart Array 5300 Controller at Seg 1 Bus 20 Dev 1 Func 0 After updating the firmware cycle the power on the system and on any external JBODS connected to the Smart Array HBAs Use HELP or to display usage text program version number and build date Enter saupdate HELP or Smart A
255. e supported DIMM sizes for the server e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB Table 6 5 lists the supported memory configurations for the server 208 Removing and Replacing Server Components Table 6 5 Supported Memory Configurations Memory Carrier Type Memory Boards Installed Minimum Memory Maximum Memory Configuration Configuration 8 DIMM memory carrier Two 4 DIMM memory 2 GB one pair two 1 GB 32 GB four pairs eight 4 standard boards DIMMs GB DIMMs 24 DIMM memory carrier Two 12 DIMM memory 2 GB one quad four 512 96 GB six quads 24 X 4 GB optional high capacity boards MB DIMMs DIMMs Memory Load Order When installing memory use a minimum of one pair in the 8 DIMM carrier and one quad in the 24 DIMM carrier of like sized DIMMs Insert additional DIMMs into 8 or 24 DIMM memory carriers in the next available pair or quad in order of capacity from largest to smallest Install DIMMs into the appropriate slots on the 8 and 24 DIMM memory carrier boards each slot has a unique ID Use Figure 6 15 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 210 or Figure 6 16 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 211 to determine where to install DIMMs on the memory board CAUTION Failure to observe the following cautions results in system degradation or failure e Do not mix DIMM sizes or types within a pair or quad e Load DIMM quads in order of capacity from largest to smallest For examp
256. e that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items Do not wear clothing subject to static charge buildup such as wool or synthetic materials If installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit HP 9300 1155 Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards Safety Information 53 Installation Sequence and Checklist Table 3 1 lists the server installation steps Follow these steps in sequence to install the server Table 3 1 Installation Sequence Checklist Step 1 Description Completed Unpack and inspect the server shipping container Inventory the contents using the packing slip Install additional components shipped with the server Install the server into a rack or pedestal mount Connect cables
257. e with the SMASH SM CLP page 93 e Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA page 93 Accessing the iLO 2 MP With the Web Browser we Web browser access is an embedded feature of the iLO 2 MP The iLO 2 MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port It requires a separate LAN drop IP address and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system IMPORTANT Make sure you use the MAC address to the iLO 2 MP LAN and not the MAC address to the server core LAN Before starting this procedure you must have the following information e IP address for the iLO 2 MP LAN e Host name this is used when messages are logged or printed To interact with the iLO 2 MP through the Web GUI follow these steps 1 Open a Web browser and enter the host name or the IP address for the iLO 2 MP 2 Login using your user account name and password at the login page Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Web Login Page Integrated Lights Out 2 Advanced HP Integrity User name Password This is a private system Do not attempt to login unless you are an authorized user Am i unauthorized access and use may be monitored and can result in criminal or ci ition under applicable law ivil pr Copyright Hewle Packard Company 1999 2006 All Rights Reserved Accessing the Host Console 91 Help Click Sign In The Status Summary page Figure 3 20 displays after login Figure 3 20 Status Summ
258. ecifications 48 emulation device configuring 88 extender board memory see memory carrier assembly extender board processor see processor board assembly extensible firmware interface see EFI external health LEDs 37 F fans introduction 31 N 1 31 removing 184 replacing 185 firmware downloading and installing 120 introduction 35 operating system requirements 35 updating 265 firmware flash ebsu 310 mptutil 283 saupdate 307 front control panel LEDs 37 front display panel 34 see also display board introduction 34 front panel control port and LED locations 36 functional overview 36 H handle controller 340 hard disk drive see disk drive hard disk drive modules 171 hard drive problems 119 HBA RISC firmware update 97 284 HDD see disk drive hot pluggable components 179 hot pluggable disk drive see disk drive hot pluggable disk drive filler see disk drive filler hot swappable components 178 hot swappable disk drive module 171 hot swappable fan see fans hot swappable power supply see power supply HP Eight Port SAS Host Bus Adapter completing installation 270 connecting devices 270 installing 269 overview 269 preparation 269 updating firmware 270 HP Smart Array P400 completing installation HP UX 272 274 Linux 274 Windows 274 connecting device 272 controller board installation 271 overview 271 preparation 271 HP Smart Array P600 completing installation
259. ed at the rear of the chassis LEDs are incorporated into the pushbuttons to save space Both buttons are toggle switches Push it once to turn on the LED and push it again to turn off the LED Press either the front panel UID Button LED or enter the iLO 2 MP and LOC commands to light both the rear panel LEDs Diagnostics Panel LEDs The Diagnostics Panel improves serviceability by enabling you to look in a single location for the LEDs that provide failing FRU locating and mapping information These amber LEDs are only lit when a failure occurs otherwise they are not lit A label on the panel is oriented similarly to the orientation of the components within the server A diagnostic LED exists for each FRU in the system including all DIMMs Figure 5 2 displays the diagnostic panel LEDs Figure 5 2 rx3600 Diagnostic Panel LEDs 0 1 Processor 0 ProcessorCarrier O O Memory Carrier O 1 O Assembly O O Disk Backplane O O MATO Interconnect Display O Table 5 11 lists diagnostic panel LED states 150 Troubleshooting Table 5 11 Diagnostics Panel LED States Off Off CRU health is assumed good Amber Steady CRU health last known to be bad Customer Replaceable Unit Health LEDs In addition to the front panel diagnostic LEDs CRUs provide additional diagnostic LEDs CRU LED order and layout is product dependent gt NOTE If multiple error conditions occur all applicable CRU lights activate The most cr
260. ee Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 4 Disconnect the internal SAS cables attached to the card 5 Remove the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw counterclockwise until it is free from the chassis 6 SAS RAID card only pull the gate latch toward the front of the chassis to unlock the SAS core I O card 7 Grasp the card by the edges and lift it out of the chassis Replacing the SAS Core I O Card 240 To replace the SAS core I O card follow these steps 1 Insert the replacement card into the dedicated SAS core I O card slot a Insert the tab at the base of the card bulkhead into the slot in the chassis b Align the card connectors with the slots on the I O board c Apply firm even pressure to both sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot 2 SAS RAID card only close the gate latch to secure the end of the SAS RAID card 3
261. elcome screen Figure C 7 EBSU Welcome Screen Telnet 15 75 200 142 Welcome to the EFI Based Setup Utility EBSU gt The EBSU simplifies the following tasks updating firmware configuring 1 0 cards partitioning hard disks and installing the operating system For more information on first time setup see the setup poster the Smart Setup Guide located in the documentation section of the Smart Setup CD or go to http www hp com support itaniumservers HP recommends performing the following tasks in this order 1 Read the documentation 2 Configure the storage cards 3 Use the Express setup option Thank you for choosing Hewlett Packard Enjoy your new Integrity server 310 Core I O Card Utilities 4 Select OK and press Enter to continue 5 From the main menu select Maintain Firmware and press Enter Figure C 8 EBSU Main Menu Maintain Firmware 6 Inthe Maintain Firmware screen use the tab key to scroll down to the Device section Use the down arrow key to scroll down to the Smart Array P600 item in the list 8 Press Enter to display detailed information about the device N Figure C 9 EBSU Maintain Firmware Screen All devices with flashable firmware that were detected in this system are shown in the list helow Group of devices are flashed ay bil Devices prefixed by cannot be flashed in this program but help shown upon selection Select devices amp groups to flash Ae Fay ENTER items sho
262. em console and use the SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the system 2 Check to see whether any users are logged in Use the query user or query session command 3 Issue the shutdown command and the appropriate options to shut down the Windows Server 2003 on the system Use one of the following options when shutting down Windows e To shut down Windows and reboot issue the following command shutdown r e To shut down Windows and power off server hardware issue the following command shutdown s ES NOTE To reboot a powered off system you must power on the system using the PC command at the iLO 2 MP Command menu e To abort a shutdown issue the following command shutdown a For example shutdown r t 60 c Shut down in one minute This command initiates a Windows system shutdown and reboot after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the system Booting and Shutting Down Linux This section covers booting and shutting down Linux on entry class HP servers Procedures for Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server are included in this section e To add a Linux entry to the boot options list see Adding Linux to the Boot Options List page 135 e To boot Linux on entry class HP Integrity servers use the following procedures See Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linu
263. emoving the Top Cover To remove the top cover follow these steps 1 If rack installed fully extend the server out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 2 Unlock the cover release lever by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise 3 Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover from the chassis Figure 6 3 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover 181 ES NOTE The cover release lever also disengages the memory carrier assembly cover for removal You can have the memory carrier assembly cover in place while servicing any components except for the memory carrier assembly and the processor board assembly 4 Slide the cover toward the rear of the server until the tabs release from the slots in the chassis 5 Lift the cover off the chassis Figure 6 3 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover Top Cover Cover Release lt i Lever Latch Unlatch ON Assembly Cover Replacing the Top Cover EL NOTE Replace the memory carrier assembly cover before replacing the top cover To replace the top cover follow these steps 1 Ensure the cover release lever is in the open position Figure 6 3 2 Align the tabs of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis and insert the tabs into the slots 3 Slide the cover forward until it is flush with the front of the chassis push firmly 4 Push the cover release lever down into the la
264. ent Server Problems page 119 e DVD Problems page 119 e Hard Drive Problems page 119 e Console Problems page 120 e Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware page 120 Troubleshooting Methodology The server was tested prior to shipping Failures encountered during installation can be due to damage that occurred in transit Reseating connectors can clear problems that result from rough handling If you are installing components or assemblies compatibility problems or incorrect installations can be the cause of the problems If you are installing components or assemblies check that items are correctly installed and that all connectors are fully engaged If the unit does not power on check the power source before proceeding If a problem is encountered during initial operation remove any add in or optional components and retest the server before continuing Verify basic server operation before installing additional cards and configuring software and hardware for the server requirements Troubleshooting is based on observation of server status indications and error messages and by checking system event logs You can observe the LED indicators on the front and rear of the Installation Troubleshooting 117 server Error messages are displayed on local and remote consoles System history console event and history logs is available through the iLO 2 MP and is accessed through the console
265. entering the main Boot Manager menu Select this option to boot an option that only needs to be booted once without changing any other setting in the main Boot Manager menu This is a one time operation and does not change the permanent system boot settings Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 345 This option displays the file systems that are on your system and lets you browse these file systems for applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the efiextension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on the network To restore the default BootNext setting select Reset BootNext Setting For example Manage BootNext setting Select an Operation EFI Shell Built in Current OS Reset BootNext Setting Save Settings to NVRAM Help Exit VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 FOD2992B5AA9 Boot0000 Set Auto Boot TimeOut Use this option to set the amount of time the system pauses before attempting to launch the first item in the Boot Options list For example Set Auto Boot Timeout Select an Option Set Timeout Value Delete Disable Timeout Help Exit Interrupting the timeout during the countdown stops the Boot Manager from loading any boot options automatically If there is no countdown set you must select boot options manually e To set the auto boot timeout value in seconds select Set Timeout Value and enter the desired value e To disable the timeout function se
266. equirements Confirm environmental requirements For more information on server electrical physical space and environmental requirements see the HP Integrity rx3600 Server Site Preparation Guide and the Generalized Site Preparation Guide Installing the System Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage HP shipping containers protect their contents under normal shipping conditions After the equipment arrives carefully inspect each carton for signs of shipping damage Shipping damage constitutes moderate to severe damage such as punctures in the corrugated carton crushed boxes or large dents Normal wear or slight damage to the carton is not considered shipping damage If you find shipping damage to a carton contact your HP customer service representative immediately Unpacking the Server To unpack a server follow these steps 1 Read the instructions printed on the outside top flap of the carton remove the banding and the outer carton from the server pallet 2 Remove all inner accessory cartons and the top foam cushions leaving only the server we IMPORTANT Inspect each carton for shipping damage as you unpack the server Checking the Inventory The sales order packing slip lists all the equipment shipped from HP Use this packing slip to verify that all the equipment has arrived A NOTE To identify each item by part number see the sales order packing slip Returning Damaged Equipment If the equipment
267. er See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing System Memory System memory or DIMMs are located on a pair of memory boards inside the memory carrier assembly A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing or replacing system memory Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing System Memory To remove system memory follow these steps 1 ES Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the process
268. er button has no effect If the server is off and power is connected to server power supplies the front panel power LED blinks at a 1 Hz rate In this state standby power is available to server circuits but main power is off Table 3 19 describes what happens when the server is off and you press the power button Table 3 19 Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off CO Server Does Not Power On A The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held in and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the system NOTE If the server is off and power is not connected to server power supplies pressing the power button has no effect Power problems during installation are usually related to the installation process If the server does not power on check the LED indicators on the power supply 118 Installing the System EFI Menu is Not Available If you cannot access the EFI from either the main disk partition or the CD use the following tools to help solve the problem e Front panel LEDs e iLO2MP Console messages System event logs SEL Operating System Does Not Boot If the operating system does not boot but you are able to reach the EFI from either the main disk partition or the CD use the following tools to help solve the problem e Using the EFI Shell check the system logs and
269. er Supply page 58 e Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler page 188 e Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 188 e Removing and Replacing PCI PCI X PCle Card Dividers page 190 e Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card page 192 e Removing and Replacing the DVD Drive page 202 e Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 203 e Removing and Replacing System Memory page 206 e Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel page 215 e Removing and Replacing the Processor Board Assembly page 217 e Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor page 218 e Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly page 225 e Removing and Replacing the System Battery page 230 e Removing and Replacing the I O Voltage Regulator Module page 232 e Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module page 233 e Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board page 236 e Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board Battery page 238 e Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Card page 239 e Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O Card page 241 e Removing and Replacing the Display Board page 242 e Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board page 246 e Removing and Replacing the Interconnect Board page 250 e Removing and Replacing the Midplane Board
270. er on the system using the PC command at the iLO 2 MP Command menu e To shut down HP UX and reboot the system issue the shutdown r command Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS This section describes the procedures for booting and shutting down HP OpenVMS on entry class HP Integrity servers and procedures for adding HP OpenVMS to the boot options list e To add an HP OpenVMS entry to the boot options list see Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options List page 129 e To boot HP OpenVMS on an entry class HP Integrity server see Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Boot Manager page 130 e To shut down HP OpenVMS see Shutting Down HP OpenVMS page 131 Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options List On HP Integrity servers you can use the following procedures to manage boot options list entries for HP OpenVMS You can add the efi vms vms_loader efi loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or the EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance Menu A NOTE The operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list To add an HP OpenVMS item to the boot options list from the EFI Shell follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to access the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu select the Exit from the
271. ere are multiple entry points to the troubleshooting process depending on your level of troubleshooting expertise the tools processes and procedures available and the type of system fault or failure Typically you select from a set of symptoms ranging from very simple System LED is blinking to the most difficult Machine Check Abort for example MCA has occurred The following is a list of symptom examples e Front Panel LED blinking e System Alert present on console e System will not power on e System will not boot e Error or event message received e Machine Check Abort MCA occurred Next you narrow down the observed problem to isolate the failure to a specific part of the server so that you can perform more detailed troubleshooting For example e Problem Front Panel LED blinking Methodology 139 ES NOTE The Front Panel Health LEDs will be flashing amber with a warning indication or flashing red with a fault indication System Alert on console Analyze the alert by using the system event log SEL to identify the last error logged by the server Use the iLO 2 MP commands to view the SEL using either the iLO 2 MP s serial text interface telnet SSH or web GUI on the iLO 2 MP LAN At this point you will have a good idea about which area of the system requires further analysis For example if the symptom was system will not power on the initial troubleshooting procedure may have indicate
272. ered on Each slot is physically separated with a divider that contains a card extraction mechanism and a mechanical retention latch MRL Slots 3 10 on the 10 slot PCI PCI X IOBP and slots 5 10 on the 10 slot PCI PCI X PCle IOBP support HP server traditional OL hot plug operations PDHP slots rely on the facilities of DHPC Dual Hot plug Controller FPGAs to enable OL hot plug functionality See Table 1 1 page 27 and Table 1 2 page 28 for details LEDs Attention LEDs doorbell buttons and power LEDs for each hot pluggable PCI PCI X PCle slot are located on the PCI bulkhead at the rear of the server chassis Server Subsystems 25 Wake on LAN Wake on LAN a hardware feature that enables the remote power on of computers through special network packets is enabled in core PCI PCI X slots one and two Ropes Ropes is an HP proprietary custom bus interface It clocks data packets across long length nets using source synchronous clocking schemes There are eighteen signals bundled per Ropes group of which there are a total of 16 in the rx3600 Each group is capable of 0 5GB s peak bandwidth Table 1 1 page 27 and Table 1 2 page 28 display the association of the Ropes group s to the PCI slot HBA to which they connect Figure 1 1 page 26 is a block diagram of the PCI PCI X I O subsystem and Figure 1 2 page 27 is a block diagram of the PCI PCI X PCle I O subsystem Figure 1 1 1 O Subsystem Block Diagram ose Unified Core IO
273. es 1 Load pairs or quads into the memory carrier in order starting with slot 0 and ending with slot 2 2 Install the first pair or quad in side 0 Install the second pair or quad in side 1 4 For the remaining pairs or quads a If both sides of the memory carrier contain the same capacity of memory install the next pair or quad in side 0 b If side 0 contains more memory capacity than side 1 install the next quad in side 1 c If side 1 is full install the remaining quads in side 0 Table 6 7 shows several examples of proper memory carrier loading order Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 211 we IMPORTANT The number in parenthesis indicates the order in which the quads are loaded Table 6 7 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Loading Examples Installing Memory Quad Number Quad Slot IDs Memory Carrier Side 0 Memory Carrier Side 1 Example 1 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 2 GB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 1 GB 3 1 GB 4 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 5 512 MB 6 Example 2 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 1 GB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 512 MB 4 1 GB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 5 Example 3 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 1 GB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 512 MB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 4 Example 4 0 0A 0B 0C 0D 2 GB 1 512 MB 2 1 1A 1B1C1D 512 MB 5 512 MB 3 2 2A 2B 2C 2D 512 MB 6 512 MB 4 we IMPORTANT You must pull the ac power plugs on the server every time you modify th
274. es Event Log Definitions The cause of an MCA event can be captured by system or BMC firmware in both the System Event Log SEL and Forward Progress Log FP Match these errors with MCA events using their timestamps For example the loss of a CPU VRM causes a CPU fault The MCA log does not provide definitive diagnosis of the problem Following are features and limitations of events and event logs e Event logs are the equivalent of chassis logs for status or error information output e Symbolic names are used in the source code for example MC_CACHE_CHECK e The hex code for each event log is 128 bits long with an architected format Some enumerated fields can be mapped to defined text strings All fields can be displayed in hex keyword or text mode e Events are created by firmware or OS code and are sent over the PDH bus to the BMC for storage in either or both of the SEL and FP logs e The iLO 2 MP can display event logs SEL events are sent from the BMC to the iLO 2 MP over the IPMB e Event logs can also be read back over the PDH bus by software for storage on disk Using Event Logs To access the event logs follow these steps 1 Connect to the system console 2 Enter Control B to access the MP Main Menu 3 Enter the s1 command to view event logs Accessing iLO 2 MP Event Logs The iLO 2 MP provides diagnostic and configuration capabilities See the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations G
275. es select the appropriate field and press Enter e Device Format e Device Verify You can perform the following actions from Device Properties e To cycle to the next device press N e To cycle to the previous device press P Device Identifier Indicates the ASCII device identifier string extracted from the device s Inquiry Data SAS Address Indicates the SAS Address of this device Serial Number Indicates the serial number for this device 294 Core I O Card Utilities we Elapsed Time Displays the total time elapsed since Format or Verify Operation started Percent Complete Graphical status bar display that indicates the current relative percentage complete of the operation Device Format and Device Verify Screens The Format and Verify screens have a similar layout To access the screens press Enter on the appropriate field from the Device Properties screen These screens include an elapsed time and status bar that begin incrementing once the operation is started enabling you to determine progress of the operation Device Identifier Indicates the ASCII device identifier string extracted from the device s Inquiry Data SAS Address Indicates the SAS Address of this device Serial Number Indicates the serial number for this device Elapsed Time Displays the total time elapsed since Format or Verify Operation started Percent Complete Graphical status bar display that indicates the current relative percentage complete of t
276. eshooting Entry Points Entry Point Subsection or Location Front panel Diagnostic panel LEDs Troubleshooting Tools page 147 System Event Log and Forward Progress Logs Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 offline and online Diagnostics INIT button Troubleshooting Tools page 147 System Event Analyzer SEA Troubleshooting Tools page 147 Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables The following troubleshooting tables are designed for use by both trained and untrained support personnel They should be the first tool used to determine the symptom s or condition of a suspect server Be aware that the state of the front panel LEDs can be viewed either locally or remotely by using the vfp command from the iLO 2 MP The tables are designed to cover troubleshooting symptoms from ac power on up to booting the operating system OS specifically in Steps 1 5 In most cases the Table 5 2 identifies the step number in Table 5 3 where troubleshooting should begin Alternatively you can skip Table 5 2 and start with Step 1 in Table 5 3 sequencing through the table steps to locate the symptom condition most descriptive of your current server status this will become the first step in your troubleshooting procedure Where appropriate an action or actions prescribed in the Action column of Table 5 3 will be followed by a reference to a corresponding subsection of this chapter for further information
277. essed for less than four seconds NOTE This step assumes BMC is running Both front panel system health and external health LEDs are flashing amber A fatal fault has been detected and logged attempting to power on the server system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady amber 1 Examine each power supply LEDs if the LED is not steady green replace power supply See System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 for information 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for events related to bulk power supplies See System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 for information The problem is fixed when the BMC s heartbeat LED is flashing green and the front panel LEDs are as follows system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady green A warning or critical failure was detected and logged after the server powered on system health is flashing amber internal health is off steady green external health is flashing amber and power is steady green 1 Examine each power supply LED If any power supply LED is not steady green replace the power supply See System Power BPS and I O VRM page 164 for information The problem is fixed when the iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is off steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green
278. essssessesstsrtsssesressssensesseseees 136 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Boot Manager MeNU oooccoocnnnonononccinnaninnnnnness 136 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shells at al ies 137 Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating SysteMiiciinicniinii rea des 137 Selecting a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu 137 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell ito 137 SPITE Down LINUX ti san E E A STE Aoc 138 Mou Es IN A as 139 Metodo Va ia as 139 General Troubleshooting Method ol As 139 Recommended Troubleshooting Methodology iii ii a eas 140 Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables iii ation Nal ea etete 141 Troubleshooting Tod Sapa a e A werent eeu 147 LEDS it AAA EA AAA AA AA whe non AA A tt AA 147 A dada E adh cy ae aces van EEEE VEREER SE ESEESE IER anaes dees 147 External He IIED aas EE a EASE EE EEEE tative de 148 Internal Health Ds iia 148 System Health A O contrac 149 Unit Identifier Button LED uvas ts O dad tad 150 Diagnostics Panel LEDS suicida 150 Customer Replaceable Unit Health LEDS custiatid i ints thats ieee 151 A e atear hvac E R EEE RE EEEE T E EE E pena aaa Ania EE ane eee 151 Online Diagnostics and Exeter eorne e e ti 151 Online Support Tool AD di eaten tak Was ue ue v A Ge ves ane arasta i ERE iR ea aate 152 Online Support Tools Listar A NEAN AA eai E 152 ite Online Support Tools arar eseteire a an pet Aita 152 Offline Suppor
279. et your passwords reset them by running using the iLO 2 MP lt Ctr1 N gt rscommand This commando resets the iLO 2 MP and resets the password A NOTE You can only run this command when directly connected to the server iLO 2 MP The Integrated Lights Out management processor iLO MP for entry class Integrity servers is an autonomous management subsystem embedded directly on the server It is the foundation 348 Utilities of the server s High Availability HA embedded server and fault management It also provides system administrators secure remote management capabilities regardless of server status or location The iLO MP is available whenever the system is connected to a power source even if the server main power switch is in the off position HP has used several different names over the years to describe the management functionality embedded in their servers including the management processor In addition HP uses the term management processor to refer to any embedded microprocessor that manages a system Management processor is a descriptive term such as server and iLO is a brand name or label such as Integrity Remote access is the key to maximizing efficiency of administration and troubleshooting for enterprise servers Integrity servers have been designed so all administrative functions that can be performed locally on the machine can also be performed remotely iLO enables remote access to the
280. example fs0 gt saupdate UPDATE 1 51 4 0 CYBORG234 BIN Replace CYBORG2 34 BIN with the name of your firmware file The following screen displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility 308 Core I O Card Utilities A UPDATE HELP or Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Updating controller in Seg 1 Bus 51 Dev 4 Func 0 Current firmware version 1 92Percentage completed 100 Activating firmware now this may take several minutes Resetting and reinitializing controller Retrieving firmware version this may take several minutes Current controller firmware version is 2 34 NOTE The UPDATE command will not prevent downgrade to a lower firmware version After updating the firmware cycle the power on the system and on any external JBODS connected to the Smart Array HBAs Exit status codes0 Success all When all is specified the utility downloads the firmware image to all the controllers to which the firmware image applies and updates the remaining controllers If an update operation fails for a controller the utility still updates the remaining controllers The example below shows the command to update all controllers for which the firmware image file applies The controllers for which the firmware image is not applicable ar
281. existing configuration Select New Array Type Screen The Select New Array Type screen enables you to view an existing array or create an Integrated Mirror array of two disks plus an optional hot spare e To go to the Create New Array screen select Create IM Volume e To go to the View Array screen select View an Existing Array Create New Array Screen The Create New Array screen enables you to create a new array To access the Create New Array screen press Enter on the Create IM Volume field from the Select New Array Type screen To create a new array follow these steps 1 Select one of the following options e To migrate to an IM array pressM This keeps the existing data and the disk is synchronized e To delete all data on all the disks in the array pressD This overwrites existing data when creating a new IM array and the disk is not synchronized 2 To create the array after the volume is configured pressc The system prompts you to save changes which creates the array During the creation process the utility pauses You are then taken back to the Adapter Properties screen The following are the descriptions for the Create New Array screen Array Type Indicates the type of array being created Array Size Indicates the size of the array in MegaBytes Bay Displays the bay in which devices are located Device Identifier Displays the device identifier RAID Disk Specifies the devices disks that make up an IM array I
282. f RAID Disk is Yes the device is part of an IM array if No the device is not part of an IM array This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The device is not large enough to mirror existing data on the primary drive e This disk has been selected as the hot spare for the IM array HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 289 Hot Spr Specifies whether a device is the hot spare for an IM array If hot spare is Yes the device is used as a hot spare for the IM array if No the device is not used as a hot spare for the IM array Only one hot spare per IM array is permitted A hot spare is not required in an IM You can specify a hot spare at array creation or any time after creation provided the array is made up of five disks or fewer This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The array already has a hot spare e The array is made up of the maximum number of devices six e The device isn t large enough to mirror existing data on the primary The hot spare drive must be greater than or equal to the size of any drive in any IM volume Drive Status XXXX OK Disk is online and fully functional Missing Disk is not responding Failed Disk has failed Initalizing Disk is initializing CfgOffln Disk is offline at host s request User Fail
283. f length generic SAS card PCI X Full length SAS card with RAID capability PCI X or PCIe Full length SAS card with RAID capability able to connect to external storage PCIe Removing and Replacing the SAS Core I O Card 239 A Slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for the PCI X core I O cards The LAN core I O card is installed either in slot 2 or slot 10 depending on the configuration PCIe SAS core I O cards are installed in slots 3 or 4 on the PCIe I O backplane WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION PCI PCI X slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for use by core I O cards Do not place any other PCI PCI X expansion cards in slots 1 and 2 Slots 1 and 2 are not hot plug capable CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the SAS Core I O Card A NOTE You may need to remove the LAN core I O card to access the SAS core I O card To remove the SAS core I O card follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables S
284. fan LED to turn off 2 Check the diagnostic LED that corresponds to the replaced fan unit Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit 185 e When the fan is functioning normally the LED is off e Ifthe fan fails the LED is lit 3 Replace the server top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply The server can have one or two hot swappable power supplies These power supplies are located at the rear of the server The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of one power supply You can install or replace a hot swappable power supply using the procedures in this section when system power is on or off A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing or replacing a power supply Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server EL NOTE A hot swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from or installed into the server The dc power to the server does not have to be off to install or replace a hot swappable power supply Power Supply Loading Guidelines The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of one power supply installed in slot PO or slot P1 You can install a second optional hot swappable power supply to provide 1 1 capability The left side viewed from the rear of the chassis hot swappable power supply is ide
285. figuration options 75 218 installing 75 223 introduction 29 load order 75 219 removing 219 required service tools 75 219 restrictions 75 219 280 upgrading 279 281 Processor Abstraction Layer see PAL processor board see processor board assembly processor board assembly removing 217 replacing 218 processor board assembly removing and replacing 73 R rack anti tip features 180 extending the server from 180 extension clearance 180 inserting the server into 180 screw locations 180 slide kit 179 rack installing server 78 rack mount server accessing 179 rackless see pedestal mount rear panel control port and LEDs locations 41 functional overview 40 remove and replace DIMMs 67 disk drive hot pluggable 60 extender board memory 65 memory extender board 65 PCI PCI X PCle cards 62 reset button iLO 2 MP 42 returning damaged equipment 55 RS 232 serial port using to configure iLO 2 MP 88 S safety information 262 safety information general 53 178 SAS features and capabilities 246 technology overview 246 SAS backplane board removing 247 replacing 249 sas controller 96 SAS core I O card removing 240 replacing 240 slot restrictions 240 supported card types 239 saupdate utility 110 SCSI setup utility 337 specifying parameters 337 SCSI adapter path 338 security access settings 90 optional component TPM 120 risk with DHCP enabled 90 setting up 90 serial at
286. firmware download boot has completed mptutil does this because the firmware only moves to the operational state if it is running from flash and not memory Operational state is needed to do everything else provided in the utility 284 Core I O Card Utilities Flashing BIOS and EFI Driver on the First Controller To update the EFI driver on the first controller follow these steps 1 Atthe f sO gt prompt entermptutil o g lt Bios File gt lt EFI_driver file gt c 0 2 At the fsO gt prompt enter reset The filename is optional and you are prompted for a filename if omitted Common Questions About Flashing Firmware Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer After I update firmware on my SAS HBA why doesn t the version string change in the menu The firmware you just flashed on the HBA does not run until a diagnostic reset occurs If you exit the utility and reenter it the version string is updated This image does not contain a valid nvdata when I try to flash the firmware why You are expected to concatenate a proper nvdata image on to the firmware mptutil keeps you from flashing an image without one To concatenate nvdata and firmware you need to run the mptutil o d 64it _1 fw sasl06x dat output fwcommand e 64it__l fw is the firmware image without a nvdata image e sas106x dat is the nvdata image This file depends on the type rev of HBA on which the firmware is used e
287. for both channels In this example the SCSI interface the ID is 0x0030 e Slot Identifies the physical card slot in the system where the SCSI interface is installed This is the same for both channels In this example the SCSI interface is on the system board therefore the slot number is xx e Path Identifies the device path In this example the SCSI interface path is Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 forchannel A and Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 1 for channel B Using the SCSI interface information from this example the combined information that tells you this is a SCSI interface are the following shown in bold for highlighting purposes 00 20 01 00 0x1000 0x0030 xx Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 00 20 01 01 0x1000 0x0030 xx Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 1 The vendor 0x1000 and device 0x0030 are the IDs for a SCSI interface Of the devices with those IDs this device has two channels Enc of 00 followed by Enc of 01 Also this SCSI interface has a non numeric XX slot indicating that it is on the system board From the EFI Shell prompt enter the following command to obtain the controller s handle for the SCSI interface Shell gt devtree A tree of all EFI capable devices installed in the system displays For example Shell gt devtree Device Tree Ctrl 04 Ctrl 0A Acpi HWP0002 0 Cctr1 12 Usb Open Host Controller Ctr1 13 Usb Open Host Controller Ctrl 14 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 2 Ctr1 15 PCI IDE ATAPI Controlle
288. g either of these methods e Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Boot Manager Menu page 136 e Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell page 137 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFl Boot Manager Menu 29 NOTE If Red Hat is booted from the iLO 2 MP set console ttySO0 at the elilo prompt to redirect console output to the iLO 2 MP 1 Select a Red Hat Enterprise Linux entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu 136 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System To load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system at the EFl Boot Manager menu select its entry from the list of boot options Selecting a Linux entry from the boot options list boots the operating system using ELILO EFI loader and the elilo conf file Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell 1 Access the EFI Shell From the system console select EFI Shell from the EFI Boot Manager menu to access the shell Access the EFI System Partition for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file systems f s0 s1 and so on that are known and mapped To select a file system to use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as fs3 enter s3 at the EFI Shell prompt Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFI loader If needed you can specify the loader s full path by entering
289. gable Disk Drive 189 8th drive load in bay 1 A CAUTION Drives are loaded in the factory starting with number 8 working from right to left and bottom to top If you have never changed your SAS configuration before you can safely move SAS devices downwards as a block If you have bays 6 7 and 8 occupied you can move them down to bays 1 2 and 3 without having the hardware paths change during a cold install or recovery while the system is shut down but you must move the disks in order and you cannot rearrange them For example you can move bay 6 to 1 7 to 2 and 8 to 3 After doing this you can safely populate the SAS enclosure from bay 4 onwards The same procedure can be performed on bays 9 to 16 s A TP When you receive an HP Integrity rx3600 or HP Integrity rx6600 server from HP if you Y ever plan to add other SAS devices into the system you should consider moving the SAS devices so they start in bay 1 going upwards instead of Bay 8 going downwards Y Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive A NOTE The replacement disk drive must have the same product number as the disk drive that you replace To install a hot pluggable disk drive follow these steps 1 Use Figure 6 8 to determine the next available disk drive installation slot Figure 6 8 Disk Drive Slot IDs 2 Remove the disk drive filler See Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler page 60 ES NOTE Save the disk drive filler for future u
290. gate latch toward the front of the chassis to completely unlock the PCI PCI X PCle card if it is full length 5 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead is fully exposed 6 Disconnect all external and internal cables attached to the PCI PCI X PCle card 7 Grasp the PCI PCI X PCle card divider by the handle and pull upward to eject the PCI PCI X PCle card from the slot 8 Grasp the PCI PCI X PCle card by the edges and lift it out of the chassis Installing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Offline A NOTE Before installing a PCI PCI X PCIe card ensure that you install the proper drivers for the PCI PCI X PCIe card To install a PCI PCI X PCle card with the server power off follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 181 4 Select an empty slot that is appropriate for the card you are installing For more information see PCI PCI X PCle Configurations page 194 and Figure 6 10 5 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall
291. ger drives is wasted because it is unavailable for data storage e The probability that an array will experience a drive failure increases with the number of physical drives in the array If you configure a logical drive with RAID 5 keep the probability of failure low by using no more than 14 physical drives in the array For conceptual information about arrays logical drives and fault tolerance methods and for information about default array configuration settings see the HP Array Configuration Utility User Guide at I O Cards and Networking Software at http docs hp com en netcom html Comparing the Utilities EL Table C 3 lists the supported features and procedures for the ACU and ORCA utilities NOTE A in the appropriate column indicates that the feature or procedure is supported while indicates that the feature or procedure is not supported Table C 3 ACU and ORCA Supported Features and Procedures ACU ORCA Supported Features Uses a graphical interface Yes No Available in languages other than English Yes No Available on CE Yes No Uses a wizard to suggest the optimum configuration for an unconfigured controller Yes No Describes configuration errors Yes No Suitable for configuration while online Yes No Suitable for configuration while offline No Yes Supported Procedures Creation and deletion of arrays and logical drives Yes Yes Assignment of R
292. gory Select your product from the servers listed Select your operating system Select the firmware category you want to download Download the firmware to a CD Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware To install the latest version of the firmware on the server follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Initiate a server console session See Accessing the Host Console page 91 Insert the CD with the copy of the latest version of the firmware Using the EFI Boot Manager menu boot to the drive that contains the CD with the updated firmware Follow the instructions to update the firmware Enabling the Trusted Platform Module This section provides instructions on how to enable the trusted platform module TPM This section addresses the following topics Introduction page 120 Enabling the TPM page 121 Introduction The TPM is an optional security component which enhances security capabilities for the server if it is running the HP UX operating system The TPM is a security chip that is unique to the server It performs key security processes independent of other hardware components The TPM creates and stores additional encryption keys from the root key of the system The encryption 120 Installing the System keys created by the TPM encapsulate system application encryption keys to provide an additional layer of security for sensitive system data The fundamental capabilities of the TPM include
293. greater than four seconds to power off the system immediately When the server is booting before the system has passed EFI_EXIT_BOOT_SERVICES the BMC powers off the server immediately when you press the button If the OS is not running or is hung or the BMC is not responding press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to power off the system To ensure that the system powers on correctly the power button must not be pressed again for four seconds after it powers off Table 5 19 lists the power LED states Table 5 19 Power LED States LED Color Flash Rate Definition None Off No ac power to the system Green Steady System power is on Amber Steady System is shut down but ac and standby power are available System Power BPS and I O VRM 165 2 NOTE For high availability and safety reasons the power LED is run directly from the power rails not under firmware control Power Supply Power LED There are 1 Hz flashing green POWER LED PWR located on each power supply which indicate that ac power is applied to the power supply and that housekeeping voltages are available in the server These LEDs light steady green when power is available from the power supplies to the server If a power supply LED flashes amber at 1 Hz the power supply has failed Table 5 20 lists the power supply LED states Table 5 20 Power Supply LED States Power Supply Power LED Power
294. gure duplicate IP addresses on different servers within the same network The duplicate server IP addresses conflict and the servers cannot connect to the network The LC command enables you to configure an IP address host name subnet mask and gateway address IMPORTANT Ensure you have a console connection through the RS 232 serial port or a network connection through the LAN to access the iLO 2 MP and use the LC command To assign a static IP address using the LC command follow these steps 1 ND OP amp Ensure the emulation software device is properly configured The terminal emulation device runs software that interfaces with the server The software emulates console output as it would appear on an ASCII terminal screen and displays it on a console device screen To ensure the emulation software is correctly configured follow these steps a Verify that the communication settings are configured as follows e 8 none parity e 9600 baud e None receive e None transmit b Verify that the terminal type is configured appropriately Supported terminal types are e hpterm e vtl00 e vtl00 e vt ut 8 we IMPORTANT Do not mix hpterm and vt100 terminal types at the same time There are many different emulation software applications Consult the help section of the emulation software application for instructions on how to configure the software options Determine the required connection components and the p
295. h fs0 monarch Processor current status 0 next boot status 0 To set the monarch processor to 1 fs0 monarch 1 Processor current status 0 next boot status 1 pdt Displays or clears the contents of the Page Deallocation Table PDT Syntax pdt clear Parameters lt clear gt clears the pdt Operation With no options specified pdt displays the PDT information for the system You must clear the PDT and reboot the system for memory reallocation and safe booting EFI POSSE Commands 335 Example D 22 pdt command Shell gt pdt PDT Information Last Clear time PDT has not been cleared Number of total entries in PDT 50 Number of used entries in PDT 0 Number of free entries in PDT 50 Number of single bit entries in PDT 0 Number of multi bit entries in PDT 0 Address of first multi bit error x0000000000000000 Example D 23 pdt clear command Shell gt pdt clear Are you sure you want to clear the PDT y N y Shell gt Shell gt pdt PDT Information Last Clear time 10 21 01 5 00p Number of total entries in PDT 50 Number of used entries in PDT 0 Number of free entries in PDT 50 Number of single bit entries in PDT 0 Number of multi bit entries in PDT 0 Address of first multi bit error 0x0000000000000000 sysmode Displays or modifies the system mode Syntax sysmode lt normal admin service gt Parameters lt normal gt sets system mode to normal lt admin gt sets system mode to
296. h heartbeat LEDs are off check the power supplies midplane board FRU and I O backplane board FRU LAN Connection Problems See I O Subsystem page 171 To locate these LEDs see Management Subsystem page 170 Environment Ambient intake air temperature is often different from ambient room temperature Measure the operating temperature and humidity directly in front of the cabinet cooling air intakes in addition to ambient room conditions Within the server temperature sensors report chassis temperature to the BMC The BMC controls fan speed based on this information Temperature sensors are found on the display panel where a thermal sensor detects the ambient room temperature This sensor s reading is the main parameter used to regulate fan speed under normal conditions Table 5 32 provides environmental specifications for rx3600 servers Table 5 32 rx3600 Environmental Specifications Parameter Operating Range Recommended Maximum Rate of Non Operating Range Operating Range Change Temperature 5 35 degrees C up to 20 25 degrees C up to 10 degrees C hr 40 degrees to 70 5000 feet 5000 feet with tape 20 degrees degrees C C hr without tape Relative humidity 15 80 at 35 degrees C 40 60 at 35 degrees C 30 per hour noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing Reporting Your Problems to HP HP customer care can help you solve server problems and if necessary initiate a
297. h sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot 2 Replace the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw clockwise until it tightens to the chassis Removing and Replacing the LAN Core I O Card 241 3 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 4 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 5 Reconnect all external cables to the card 6 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the Display Board The display board is a combination board that supports the following server components e Power switch and status LEDs e DVD drive e Front panel USB port e Diagnostic panel The display board attaches to an interconnect board that functions as a link between the midplane board and the display board The display board contains the power switch and the following status LEDs e Power LED e System health LED e Internal health LED e External health LED e Locator LED For more detailed information about front panel LED behavior see Controls Ports and LEDs page 36 The display board includes a USB connector that supports USB 2 0 480 Mbps The diagnostic panel provides failure identification for each component that has a detectable error associated with it For more information on the
298. h so that the display board can clear the locator and power buttons Figure 6 30 CAUTION Do not pull the bezel out from the chassis more than one half inch Failure to observe this warning can result in damage to server components Hold the bezel out from the chassis and simultaneously push the board to the right to plug it into the socket on the interconnect board Locate the knurled thumbscrew behind the DVD drive that holds the display board in place Turn the screw clockwise until the board is secured into place Figure 6 30 Install the diagnostic panel light guide Figure 6 30 a Align the diagnostic panel light guide tabs with the slots on the display board b Push down firmly on the light guide until it seats onto the board Replace the top two right side bezel screws Figure 6 30 Replace the DVD drive See Replacing the DVD Drive page 203 Reconnect the USB cable into the connector on the display board Figure 6 30 Replace the air baffle Figure 6 33 Replace the clear plastic cover Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board Serial attached SCSI SAS is a new faster version of the industry standard SCSI technology
299. he directory in which these files are located for example fs0 gt cd EFI HP TOOLS IO CARDS SmartArray IMPORTANT Both saupdate efi and the firmware image file must be located in the same directory If they are not copy them both to the EFI partition Run the saupdate efi using the fs0 gt saupdate command Pe Gt iS se If you are not using the Offline Diagnostic CD Download the SA EFI update utility saupdate efi and copy it to the EFI partition Download the firmware and copy it to the EFI partition Boot the system to the EFI Shell and change directories to the EFI partition Run the saupdate efi using the using the s0 gt saupdate efi command The following screen displays The version of the utility displays on the second line kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Syntax saupdate lt operation gt lt parameters gt Commands You can use the following operations with saupdate 110 Installing the System 7 LIST gt UPDATE UPDATE all HELP or List Use LIST to display all detected Smart Array controllers along with the active firmware versions fs0 gt saupdate LIST kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update U
300. he majority of LCD monitors are capable of this e Use a LAN based client to remotely access the server s iLO2 Integrated Remote Console vKVM feature for the installation Setup Checklist Use the checklist in Table 3 10 to assist you with the console setup process Table 3 10 Setup Checklist Step Action X Standard and Advanced 1 Preparation 1 Determine access method to select and connect cables 2 Determine LAN configuration method and assign IP address if necessary 2 Configure the iLO 2 MP LAN There are three methods to configure the LAN for iLO 2 MP access DHCP with DNS ARP Ping e RS 232 serial port 3 Log on to the iLO 2 MP Log in to the iLO 2 MP from a supported Web browser or command line using the default user name and password 4 Change default user name and Change the default user name and password on the administrator password account to your predefined selections 5 Set up user accounts Set up the user accounts if using the local accounts feature 6 Set up security access Set up the security access settings 7 Access the host console Access the host console using method of choice Advanced 1 Activate Advanced Pack Features Activate advanced features by entering a license key 1 For details on Advanced Pack Features see the HP Integrity iLO 2 MP Operations Guide Console Setup Flowchart 82 Use this flowchart as a guide to assist in the console setu
301. he operation Formatting If enabled a low level formatting on a disk drive is allowed on the Device Format screen Low level formatting completely and irreversibly erases all data on the drive To begin the format press F IMPORTANT Formatting defaults the drive to a 512 byte sector size even if the drive had previously been formatted to another sector size CAUTION Once format has begun you cannot stop or cancel the action Verifying The Verify screen enables you to verify all of the sectors on the device If needed you can reassign defective Logical Block Addresses LBAs To start the verification press Enter Advanced Device Properties Screen The Advanced Device Properties screen enables you to view and modify infrequently accessed device settings To access Advanced Device Properties press Enter on the Advance Device Properties field from the Advanced Adaptor Properties screen HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 295 Figure C 6 Advanced Adaptor Properties Screen 4 HP iLO Remote Serial Console Window jangogsp Microsoft Internet Explorer provided a a amp Zoom In Out Settings Advanced Device Properties You can perform the following actions from Advanced Device Properties e To set default values for all items on this screen press Enter on Restore Defaults e To toggle between LUN 0 and All in any LUN field press or LUN 0 scans only LUN 0 All scans all LUNs Max Devices Spe
302. hot spare disk You must make sure the capacity of the hot spare disk is greater than or equal to the capacity of the smallest disk in the logical drive An easy way to verify this is to use the DISPLAY command CAUTION See rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks DELETE The DELETE command sets the controller configuration to factory defaults This command also deletes any existing IR volumes HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 301 Syntax cfggen lt controller gt delete noprompt Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation After entering the DELETE command the system prompts you and asks if you want to proceed with the command Enter Yes if you want to proceed DISPLAY This DISPLAY command displays information about controller configurations controller type firmware version BIOS version volume information and physical drive information Syntax cfggen lt controller gt display filename Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 filename Valid filename to store output of command to a file Sample Output Read configuration has been initiated for controller 0 Controller type EFI BSD version Firmware version Channel description Initiator ID Maximum physical devices Concurrent commands supported IR volume 1 Volume ID Status of volume RAID level Siz
303. hot swappable components e Fan units e Power supplies e Disk drive fillers 178 Removing and Replacing Server Components Hot Pluggable Components A component is defined as hot pluggable if you can remove it from the chassis while the server remains operational Software intervention is required prior to removing a hot pluggable component A NOTE Hot pluggable components are marked with red touch points The following are hot pluggable components e Disk drives e PCI PCI X PClIe cards Cold Swappable Components To remove and replace cold swappable components or components that are neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable shut down the operating system and power off the server For complete instructions on shutting down the operating system and powering off the server see Chapter 4 page 123 A NOTE Cold swappable components are marked with blue touch points The following are cold swappable components e Front bezel e DVD drive e Memory carrier assembly e Memory DIMMs e Processor board assembly e Dual core processors e I O board assembly e System battery e I O voltage regulator module e Trusted Platform Module e PCI PC X card divider e Core I O board e Core I O board battery e SAS core I O card e LAN core I O card e Doorbell board e Display board e SAS backplane board e Interconnect board e Midplane board Accessing a Rack Installed Server The following procedure explains how to g
304. hr 31 W 106 BTU hr Each additional SAS HD 17 W 58 BTU hr 17 W 58 BTU hr Each additional I O Card 30 W 102 BTU hr 29 W 99 BTU hr Physical and Environmental Specifications This section provides the temperature humidity requirements noise emission and air flow specifications for the HP server Operating temperature and humidity ranges may vary depending on the installed mass storage devices High humidity levels can cause improper disk operation Low humidity levels can aggravate static electricity problems and cause excessive wear of the disk surface Physical and Environmental Specifications 49 50 Table 2 5 Environmental Specifications system processing unit with hard disk Parameter Operating temperature Value 5 C to 35 C 41 E to 95 E Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Over temperature shutdown 40 C 104 F Operating humidity 15 to 80 relative noncondensing Storage humidity 90 relative noncondensing at 65 C Acoustic Noise Emission ISO 9296 1 Typical configuration at room temperature 25 C Table 2 6 Physical and Environmental Specifications Sound Power Level LwAd 7 3B Sound Pressure Level LpAm 57 1dB Altitude Operating altitude 0 to 3000 m 10 000 ft max Storage altitude 0 to 4572 m 15 000 ft max
305. ia AS AAA AA 170 Manageability Reset Buona aaa 170 Manageability Status LED A AS A AA AO AA 171 NO A O EEDE EA EEEE EAE ESEE EE Eii 171 Verifying Hard Disk Drive Opera OM tinte DA abit ke 171 TAN SINE D recs A GE Mtoe A A AA casa an tae 172 HBA Bulkhead LAN LEDS hinian a E ia 172 BOONE Sa A res 173 NOA 174 Identifying and Troubleshooting Firmware Problems ooonnccciocanicnnoonononacinnnnannnonncnnacanncnnnaninnon 174 FPitmware UPA Sa AAA tua hives AAA ned ies toa A 174 Servers A eae each ashe aba d ete taas shOU aE cae thn aa OTe ewes AAS esas ee es 174 Troubleshooting the Server Intente nia dadas 175 Environment A to ds 175 Reporting Your Problems to AL A eta A A ea A a 175 Online UPPER tants eh Aine RA AA 176 Phone SUP PO dra a escanea 176 Collecting Information Before Contacting Support aia A 176 6 Removing and Replacing Server Componennts ssssssssecseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeneneenens 177 Reguired Service Toolsin re moere eis aes A Panes towne A Aa 177 S fety InformatioN s easi ee coh ats anr AE aa r TE REEE EE NE Ea E EE AEREE E EEE r EES ena E sats 178 HP Integrity rx3600 Component Classifiations coctisiotcas nacos anar oir 178 Hot Swappable COMPONEN Sui EAS ia 178 Hot Plug rable COMPONER A A RA a AAA 179 Gola SWwappable Components das 179 Mecessinp a Rack lnstalled Ser A AAA AAA AAA 179 Extending the Server froma te Rata a e A elas bea 180 Inserting the Server into the Rack A to 180 Aecessing a Pedestal Installed Servera ab
306. ice Press Enter to initiate booting using the selected boot option Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main Menu Booting HP OpenVMS from the EFI Shell To boot HP OpenVMS from the EFI Shell environment follow these steps 130 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP OpenVMS a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select EFI Shell menu to access the EFI Shell environment Issue the map command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems are typically listed as s0 s1 and so on Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP OpenVMS For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed Also the file system number can change each time it is mapped for example when the system boots or when the map r command is issued When
307. ide cover removed Figure 3 8 Memory Carrier Assembly with Side Cover Removed Retaining Slot Retaining Slot Installing Additional Components 67 Memory Installation Conventions 68 Before installing memory read and understand the following memory installation conventions e Supported DIMM sizes and memory configurations e DIMM load order e DIMM slot IDs Supported DIMM Sizes and Memory Configurations The standard server configuration includes an 8 DIMM memory carrier which contains two 4 DIMM memory boards An optional high capacity memory configuration is also available a 24 DIMM memory carrier containing two 12 DIMM memory boards System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards The minimum server configuration requires at least one memory pair in the 8 DIMM memory carrier and one memory quad group of four DIMMs in the 24 DIMM memory carrier The following are the supported DIMM sizes for the server e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB Table 3 4 lists the supported memory configurations for the server Table 3 4 Supported Memory Configurations Memory Carrier Type Memory Boards Installed Minimum Memory Maximum Memory Configuration Configuration 8 DIMM memory carrier Two 4 DIMM memory 2 GB one pair two 1 GB_ 32 GB eight 4 GB DIMMs standard boards DIMMs 24 DIMM memory carrier Two 12 DIMM memory 2 GB one quad four 512 96 GB 24x4 GB DIMMs optional high capacity boards MB DIMMs Me
308. ility must be in the drive to allow device mapping The EFI utility and firmware image files are located in the root directory or in a subdirectory on the CD 2 The CD drive displays in the list of mapped devices as fs0 To change to this device enter fs0 shell gt fs0 fs0 gt 3 To determine the current version of the firmware follow these steps a At the EFI Shell enter mptutil from the directory that contains mptutil efi The following example indicates that the EFI Serial Attached SCSI card utility version is 1 01 12 00 fs0 EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK gt mptutil MPTUTIL 1 01 12 00 Vendor Device Choice ID ID Bus Device 0 1000h 0054h 14h 01h LSI Logic SAS1068 Host Adapter 1 Refresh b Press Enter 4 To update the firmware use the mptutil command 5 Reset the controller fs0 gt reset The mptutil commands and functions are listed in Table 3 15 and described in the following sections Table 3 15 MPTUTIL Commands and Functions Command Function mptutil f lt firmware_file gt Updating HBA RISC firmware on the controller mptutil o g lt x86_file gt lt fcode_file gt Updating EFI driver on first controller mptutil o vpd c 0 Viewing VPD information Parameters in lt gt are optional A space is required between command line options and their parameters The following sections describe the mptut il commands and functions Flashing Firmware on First Controller To update the
309. imum of total IM disks on a controller reached No SMART Disk doesn t support SMART cannot be used in an RAID array Wrg Intfc Device interface SAS differs from existing IM disks Pred Fail Indicates whether device SMART is predicting device failure Yes No Size MB Indicates the size of the device in megabytes megabyte 1024 x 1024 1 048 576 If the device is part of a two disk array this field reflects the size of the array not the size of the individual disk If the device is part of a three or more disk array this field is the size that the disk makes up within the array When creating a striped array the usable size of the array is determined by the number of drives times the size of the smallest drive in the array In arrays consisting of different sized drives excess space on larger drives are unusable Manage Array Screen The Manage Array screen enables you to manage the current array To access the Manage Array screen select the appropriate field and press Enter on the Manage Array field from the View Array screen The Manage Array screen enables you to perform the following actions Manage Hot Spare To display a Hot Spare Management screen that has the same layout as the Create New Array screen press Enter on Manage Hot Spare This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The array is inactive e The array is at its maximum number of devices e Non IR firmware is used e IR is disabled The
310. in a rack be sure that the equipment and rack are stable before beginning the installation procedure Slots 1 and 2 are dedicated for the PCI X core I O cards The LAN core I O card is installed either in slot 2 or slot 10 depending on the configuration PCIe SAS core I O cards are installed in slots 3 or 4 on the PCIe I O backplane Cabling The cables that are required to connect the adapters and controllers to other devices are provided with most HP server products that need them Table B 3 lists some cables that can be used with these adapters and controllers All HP cables are keyed so that they cannot be installed incorrectly Table B 3 Cable kit part numbers Type of Cable Description Part Number Internal SAS SATA Multi lane A cable 389647 B21 Internal SAS SATA Host fan cable 389650 B21 Internal SAS SATA Target fan cable 389653 B21 Internal SAS SATA Multi lane B cable 389659 B21 268 Upgrades Table B 3 Cable kit part numbers continued Internal SAS SATA Multi lane 76 cm 30 in cable 389662 B21 Internal SAS SATA Multi lane 48 cm 19 in cable 391330 B21 Additional cables can be ordered from an authorized HP reseller or authorized HP service provider If the cable that you need is not listed here or if you need additional ordering information see the HP website at http www hp com This chapter contains the following topics e Installing the HP Eight Internal Port SAS Host Bus Adapter
311. ing the procedures in this section when power is on or off A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server ES NOTE A hot swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from or installed into the server The dc power to the server does not have to be off to install or replace a hot swappable power supply Power Supply Loading Guidelines The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of one power supply installed in either slot PO or slot P1 You can install a second optional hot swappable power supply to provide 1 1 capability The left side viewed from the rear of the chassis hot swappable power 58 Installing the System supply is identified as PO and the second hot swappable power supply is identified as P1 Figure 3 3 A CAUTION When a second power supply is not used the empty power supply slot must remain covered with the supplied metal filler panel Failure to observe this caution can result in damage due to overheating Install the hot swappable power supply into the server before attaching the new power cord Failure to observe this caution can result in damage to the server Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply To install a hot swappable power supply on the front of the server follow these steps 1 Remove the metal filler p
312. invalid SFW IO_UNKNOWN_PCIXCAP VAL PCIXCAP value T O card Type E0h 141d 26d PCIXCAP sampling SFW IO PCIXCAP SAMPLE ERROR error T O card Type E0h 123d 26d Expected I O host SFW IO_CHECK LBA MISSING ERR bridge LBA is missing T O card Type E0h 619d 26d Expected I O host SFW IO_CHECK LBA DEConFIG_ERR bridge LBA is deconfigured T O card Type E0h 133d 26d I O LBA clear error SFW IO LBA CLEAR ERR FAILED failed T O card Type E0h 144d 26d T O SBA clear error SFW IO SBA CLEAR ERR FAILED failed T O card Type E0h 146d 26d PCI X slot power on SFW IO SLOT POWER on ERROR error T O card Type E0h 145d 26d PCI X slot has an SFW IO_SLOT_POWER_DEFAULT_ERROR incorrect default power state T O card Type E0h 136d 26d T O host bridge LBA SFW IO LBA RESET ERROR is inaccessible because rope reset failed to complete T O card Type E0h 130d 26d PCI clock DLL error SFW IO DLL ERROR T O card Type E0h 143d 26d T O rope reset failed to SFW IO ROPE RESET ERROR complete 168 Troubleshooting Table 5 24 1 O Card Events that May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs continued Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs T O card Type E0h 7346d PCIe link failed to train SFW CC _IODISC_ LBA LINK TRAIN ERR T O card Type E0h 73564 PCIe link is not SFW IO PCIE LINK SUBOPTIMAL running at maximum capable bandwidth Table 5 25 and list the PCI slot rope ACPI paths Table 5 25 PCI PCI X Slot Rope ACPI Paths
313. ion See Removing the I O Board Assembly page 225 for this procedure 10 11 12 Power up to EFI See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 93 for this procedure a Verification from EFI 1 Respond YES to prompts regarding copying information onto the new board 2 Verify the serial number and model string data information copied onto the new T O board a Boot to EFI b Enter service mode using the following command Shell gt sysmode service Current System Mode ADMIN You are now in SERVICE mode c Use the sysset command to verify that all values are set Shell gt sysset System Information Manufacturer hp Product Name server rx3600 Product Number AB463A Secondary Product Number is Identical Serial number SGH43442VB Secondary Serial Number is Identical UUID 3C33C58E 2E5A 11D8 A33B 4188C0AEFAE2 Valid Secondary UUID is Identical Product ID 0x301 b Enable the TPM 1 Access the EFI Shell 2 Enter info sec to display the server security settings on the screen The TPM is disabled by default 3 Enter secconfig to display a list of configurable security settings 4 Enter secconfig tpm on to enable the TPM c Verify the system board replacement and operation using either the iLO 2 MP or EFI commands Viewing Warnings To view warning access the EFI shell and run the info warning command Verifying I O cards To verify the I O cards access the EFI shell and run
314. is 2 34 The UPDATE command will not prevent downgrade to a lower firmware version After updating the firmware cycle the power on the system and on any external JBODS connected to the Smart Array HBAs Exit status codes0 Success UPDATE all When all is specified the utility downloads the firmware image to all the controllers to which the firmware image applies and updates the remaining controllers If an update operation fails for a controller the utility still updates the remaining controllers Core I O Card Configuration 111 The example below shows the command to update all controllers for which the firmware image file applies The controllers for which the firmware image is not applicable are skipped In this example the Smart Array P600 controller is updated and the Smart Array 5300 is skipped fs0 gt saupdate UPDATE all CYBORG234 BIN Replace CYBORG2 34 BIN with the name of your firmware file The following screen displays showing the controllers that are updated and skipped kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Updating controller in Seg 1 Bus 51 Dev 4 Func 0 Current firmware version 1 92 Percentage completed 100 Activating firmware now this may take several minutes Resetting and rei
315. is normal system behavior and is not an error Enter Execute lt item gt Executable items are indicated by highlighted text and a different background color Press Enter to execute the field s associated function Configuration Utility Screens All SAS BIOS configuration utility screens contain the following areas starting at the top of the screen Header area Identifies the utility and version number Menu area Gives the title of the current screen and on screens other than the Adapter List screen also identifies the adapter Main area The main area for presenting data This area has a cursor for item selection and horizontal and vertical scroll bars if necessary Footer area Provides general help information text Figure 3 22 page 99 provides a map of how screens are accessed in the drvdfg utility Figure 3 22 Accessed Screens in the drvdfg Utility Adaptor List Adaptor i Properties Exit Screen SAS Typology Device Properties Advanced Adaptor Select New Array Type Properties Create New n Array View Array Advanced Spinup a Device PHY Properties Properties Properties Manage Array Core I O Card Configuration 99 DRVCFG Screens Adapter List Screen The Adapter List screen displays when the configuration utility is first started This screen displays a scrolling list of up to 256 SAS controllers in the system and information about each
316. itical error determines the front panel LED state Diagnostics A suite of offline and online support tools are available to help you to troubleshoot system problems If the OS is already running use the online support tools If the OS cannot be booted use the offline support tools If possible shut down the OS only when online troubleshooting fails The offline support tools are available either from the EFI partition or from the IPF offline Diagnostics and Utilities CD IPF systems only Once the problem preventing booting has been resolved boot the OS use the online support tools for any further testing If you cannot reach the EFI from either the main disk or from a CD use the visual fault indicators console messages and system error logs to troubleshoot the problem Online Diagnostics and Exercisers Online support tools enable centralized error archiving and hardware inventory as long as the agents or providers that support them are installed on the managed server On HP UX systems the legacy tools within Onl ineDiag are supported The online support tools on HP UX 11i v2 include the Support Tool Manager STM tools and the Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM features added by SysFaultMgmt The STM suite of tools includes the following Information Information modules create a log of information specific to one device including e Product identifier e Description of the device e Hardware path to the device e Vendor e Onboa
317. ity available may be limited Adapter Properties Screen The Adapter Properties screen enables you to view and modify adapter settings To scan the SAS controller s devices select a SAS controller and press Enter The Adapter Properties screen displays Figure 3 23 Adapter Properties Screen Enabled BLS 6 US 100 Installing the System Use the arrow keys to select RAID Properties and press Enter to view the Select New Array Type screen To access the following screens use the arrow keys to select the screen and press Enter on the appropriate field e RAID Properties e SAS Topology e Advanced Adapter Properties The following are the descriptions for the Adapter Properties screen Adapter Indicates the specific SAS Controller type PCI Address Displays the PCI Address assigned by the system BIOS to the adapter e Bus value range 0x00 OxFF 0 255 decimal e Device value range 0x00 Ox1F 0 31 decimal e Function range 0x00 0x7 0 7 decimal FW Revision Displays the MPT firmware version and type in the format x xx xx xx yy where X XX XX XX refers to the FW version and yy refers to the type The currently supported type is IR 1 SAS Address Displays the SAS Address assigned to this adapter FW Revision Displays the Fusion MPT firmware version and type IR or IT Status Indicates whether an adapter is eligible for configuration utility software control or is reserved for control by other software Enabled Disabled o
318. ity included All operating systems are presented with the same interface to system firmware and all features are available to the operating system User Interface The Itanium processor family firmware employs a user interface defined by an HP standard called Pre OS System Startup Environment POSSE The POSSE shell is based on the EFI standard shell Several commands were added to the standard EFI Shell to support HP value added functionality Event IDs for Errors and Events The system firmware generates event IDs for errors events and forward progress to the iLO 2 MP through common shared memory The iLO 2 MP interprets and stores event IDs Reviewing Firmware 35 these events helps you diagnose and troubleshoot problems with the server For more information see Chapter 5 page 139 Controls Ports and LEDs This section provides a basic description of the controls ports and LEDs found on the front panel and rear panel of the HP Integrity rx3600 For more information on LED functions and descriptions see Chapter 5 page 139 This section addresses the following topics e Front Panel page 36 e Storage and Media Devices page 38 e Diagnostic Panel page 39 e Rear Panel page 40 Front Panel The front panel of the server includes controls ports and LEDs commonly used when the server is operational Figure 1 8 shows the control port and LED locations on the server front panel Figure
319. ivers utilities software and documentation for HP Integrity servers are available on the support page of the HP Web site at http www hp com support itaniumservers Connecting External Storage we IMPORTANT Not all OSs or Smart Array cards support external drives To connect external storage follow these steps Power off the server Connect an external SAS cable to the external port of the controller NOTE You do not have to disconnect any internal drives on shared internal port 11 because the controller preferentially discovers devices attached to port 1E However drives on the shared internal port are unavailable until you disconnect the external storage device Tighten the lock screws on the cable connector Attach the other end of the cable to the SAS input connector of the external storage enclosure IMPORTANT Drives that are to be used in the same array must be of the same type either all SAS or all SATA Parallel SCSI drives cannot be used with this controller Tighten the lock screws on the cable connector Power on the enclosure Power on the server SAS Cable Part Numbers If you require additional cables order them by the option kit number listed in Table C 2 Table C 2 SAS Cable Part Numbers Cable Length Option Kit Number Cable Assembly Number 1 0 m 3 3 ft 389664 B21 361317 001 2 0 m 6 6 ft 389668 B21 361317 002 4 0 m 13 ft 389671 B21 361317 004 6 0 m 20 ft
320. ix drives of different capacities within the same array The configuration utility treats all physical drives in an array as if they have the same capacity as the smallest drive in the array The excess capacity of any larger drives is wasted because it is unavailable for data storage e The probability that an array will experience a drive failure increases with the number of physical drives in the array If you configure a logical drive with RAID 5 keep the probability of failure low by using no more than 14 physical drives in the array For conceptual information about arrays logical drives and fault tolerance methods and for information about default array configuration settings see the HP Array Configuration Utility User Guide at I O Cards and Networking Software at http docs hp com en netcom html Comparing the Utilities Table 3 17 lists the supported features and procedures for the ACU and ORCA utilities Table 3 17 ACU and ORCA Supported Features and Procedures ACU ORCA Supported Features Uses a graphical interface Yes No Available in languages other than English Yes No Available on CD Yes No Uses a wizard to suggest the optimum configuration for an unconfigured controller Yes No Describes configuration errors Yes No Suitable for configuration while online Yes No Suitable for configuration while offline No Yes Core I O Card Configuration 115 Table 3 17 ACU and ORCA Supported
321. k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k In this example the Smart Array Controller dev ciss5 has ROM firmware revision 1 96 Installing Core I O Cards 273 Update the Smart Array controller firmware by using the sautil command The sautil command syntax for updating Smart Array Controller firmware is sautil lt device file gt download ctlr fw lt fw_image gt where lt device_file gt The controller device file lt fw_image gt The file path for the firmware version you want to install on the Smart Array Controller When you enter the sautil lt device file gt download_ctlr_fw lt fw_image gt command the currently installed firmware version is listed along with the firmware version you selected to replace it with You can either proceed with the download or cancel sautil dev ciss5 download_ctlr_ fw INCPTR_2 02 2 42 PAK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK RK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KEK KK KKKRKKEKEKE kkkk KKKK SAUTILSupportutilit y kkkk KKKK for the HP SmartArray RAID Controller Family KKKK KKKK version A 02 11 KKK KK x xx C Copyright 2003 2006 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkk kkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkk DRIVER INFORMATION Driver State y c lt 24sie darn Geese eee dad READY
322. kkkkkkxkkk End of SAUTIL Output kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkk Completing the Adapter Installation on Windows and Linux To update the firmware on the server controller or hard drives use Smart Components These components are available on the Firmware Maintenance CD A more recent version of a particular server or controller component might be available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support 1 2 3 274 Upgrades Find the most recent version of the component that you require Components for controller firmware updates are available in offline and online formats Follow the instructions for installing the component on the server These instructions are given with the CD and are provided on the same Web page as the component Follow the additional instructions that describe how to use the component to flash the ROM These instructions are provided with each component Installing the HP Smart Array P800 On HP Integrity rx3600 and rx6600 servers the HP Smart Array P800 is supported by Windows and Linux operating systems It should be installed in PCle slot 3 or 4 For more information including configuring and diagnosing array problems refer to the HP Smart Array P800 Controller for Integrity Servers User Guide which can be found in the I O Cards and Networking Software collection under Smart Array at http w docs hp com The
323. l Components 73 Figure 3 12 Removing the Processor Board Assembly e pi A A Z Processor Board A A sembly Carrier Tray Grasp Here Mes a EN Processor Board Assembly Access Door Release Button _ Processor Board Assembly Access Door Processor Board Assembly Carrier Tray Grasp Here Front Chassis View Replacing the Processor Board Assembly To replace the processor board assembly follow these steps 1 Align the edges of the processor board assembly with the assembly guides in the chassis 2 Slide the processor board assembly into the chassis until it begins to seat into the socket located on the midplane board 3 Push the processor board access door upward until it locks into position 4 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 66 5 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 58 Installing a Dual Core Processor The server uses dual core processors Each processor contains two cores that function as separate processors Dual core processors double the processing power of the server while maintaining the physical dimensions of a single processor 74 Installing the System The server can contain one or two dual core processors that provide the following configuration options e 1P 2C One processor two cores e 2P 4C Two pro
324. l Health LEDs do not indicate whether the server is booted e Covers the wide range of faults for which the software and firmware do not definitively state that a FRU must be reseated or replaced External and Internal Health LEDs do not light unless the software or firmware makes a solid determination that a FRU must be reseated or replaced Table 5 9 lists the system health LED states Table 5 9 System Health LED States LED Color Flash Rate State Off Off System is off or system is booting firmware with no failures since the SEL logs were last examined Green Steady System has finished the firmware boot and an OS is booting or running with no failures since the SEL logs were last examined Amber 1 Hz A warning or critical failure has been detected and logged Red 2 Hz A fatal fault has been detected and logged Table 5 10 lists the iLO 2 MP strings in the VFP for the four states of the system health LED Troubleshooting Tools 149 Table 5 10 VFP System Health Description LED Color State Off None Green The OS is booting or running Flashing amber Warning or critical fault Check the logs for details Flashing red Fatal fault The system crashed or cannot boot Check the logs for details Unit Identifier Button LED The UID Button LED enables you to identify a specific system in a rack or data center environment one UID Button LED is located in the front panel and a second is locat
325. l components on accessory boards A WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces allow the internal system components to cool before touching them I O Backplane Upgrade Procedure The following is a checklist for upgrading the server Table B 2 I O Backplane Upgrade Checklist Step 1 Action X Update the Operating System as necessary 2 Update Firmware to the latest revision e SFW e BMC e iLO2 MP e FPGA e vBios me 0 Shutdown the Operating System Perform a complete backup al Power down the Server Remove the I O backplane Move all components to the new I O backplane e Trusted Platform Module e T O Voltage Regulator Module e Core I O Board e SAS Core I O e LAN Core I O e Any other compatible I O cards Install new core I O if necessary Install the new I O backplane T O Backplane Upgrade 263 Table B 2 I O Backplane Upgrade Checklist continued Step Action 10 Power to the EFI onto the new I O board e Enable the TPM e Verify the system board replacement and operation e Verify the serial number and model string data information copied 11 View any warnings 12 Verify all I O cards are recognized 13 Install the Operating System if necessary 14 Boot to the Operating System 1 HP UX Windows and Linux require reinstallation of the OS with the upgrade of the IOBP See Figure B 1 page 2
326. le if you have a quad of 2 GB DIMMs and a quad of 1 GB DIMMs install the quad of 2 GB DIMMs first 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order The 8 DIMM memory carrier has two sides labeled side 0 and side 1 each of which contains a memory board The 8 DIMM memory carrier can contain one to four pairs of memory Pairs of memory are divided equally between the two sides of the memory carrier For example if you have two pairs of memory to install load two DIMMs in slots OA and OB of side 0 and load two DIMMs in slots OA and OB of side 1 Table 6 6 lists the 8 DIMM memory carrier load order Table 6 6 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order Pair Number Memory Carrier Side Slot ID 1 Side 0 0A OB 2 Side 1 0A OB 3 Side 0 1A 1B 4 Side 1 1A 1B The DIMM slot IDS are the same for both 8 DIMM memory carrier boards Unique slots are identified within the carrier by the side in which they reside For example slot OA is identified as slot OA side 0 or slot OA side 1 Figure 6 15 shows the DIMM slot IDs for the 8 DIMM memory carrier board Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 209 Figure 6 15 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order The 24 DIMM memory carrier has two sides labeled side 0 and side 1 each of which contain a memory board The 24 DIMM memory carrier can contain up to six quads of memory DIMM quads are loaded in order of size from largest to smallest capacity DIMM qu
327. le Disk Drive LEDs Status LED Activity LED Table 1 5 lists the hot pluggable disk drive LEDs and states shown in Figure 1 10 Table 1 5 Hot Pluggable Disk Drive LEDs Activity LED Status LED Disk Drive State Off Off Offline or not configured Solid green Off Normal operation no activity Flickering green Off Normal operation disk read or write activity Off Flashing amber at constant 1 Offline no activity predictive failure Hz Solid green Flashing amber at constant 1 Online no activity predictive failure Hz Flickering green ame amber at constant 1 Disk activity predictive failure Z Off Solid amber Offline no activity critical fault Off Solid blue Offline drive selected by locator function Flashing green at Off Drive rebuilding constant 1 Hz 38 Overview 1 The drive status LED is blue when you use various software utilities such as online diagnostics and SAS drive configuration tools Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Slot Availability LEDs The hot pluggable disk drive slot availability LEDs are located on the front bezel in the center of the disk drive slots Figure 1 11 The illuminated LEDs indicate connection and power of the group of SAS disk drive slots to a SAS controller Figure 1 11 shows the hot pluggable disk drive slot availability LEDs Figure 1 11 Hot Pluggable Disk Drive Slot Availability LEDs Slot Availability LEDs DVD Drive The server has one DVD drive o
328. lect Delete Disable Timeout A NOTE When this option is selected the server does not automatically boot The server stops at the EFI boot menu and waits for user input Select Active Console Output Devices Use this option to define the devices that display output from the system console This list includes the VGA monitor and a serial port for directing output to a terminal emulation package A NOTE Multiple consoles are not supported for HP UX or Windows Use the Smart Setup CD to switch between COM A and the iLO 2 MP on Windows systems For example Select the Console Output Device s 346 Utilities Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg PcAnsi Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg VtUtf 8 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg PcAnsi Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg VtUtf 8 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 2 0 indicates a currently selected device This menu is identical to the Console Error Devices menu The server does not support different configurations for Output and Error console When you make changes to either Output or Error console menus you must make the identical change in the other menu When you change serial devices you must mak
329. less an IP address has ever been acquired using DHCP Once an IP address is assigned using DHCP ARP Ping is permanently disabled When you use DHCP and DNS you can connect to the iLO 2 MP by typing the default host name in your browser rather than an IP address only if the following applies Console Setup 85 we e DHCP must be enabled DHCP is enabled by default e You are using a DHCP server that provides the domain name e The primary DNS server accepts dynamic DNS DDNS updates e The primary DNS server IP address has been configured through the DHCP server IMPORTANT You must know the DNS domain name which is served out by the DHCP server unless it s domain is local or the same domain To configure the iLO 2 MP using DHCP and DNS follow these steps 1 Obtain the factory set host name from the iLO 2 MP Media Access Protocol MAC address label on the server The default host name is 14 characters long consisting of the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address as in this example mp0014c29c064f This address is assigned to the iLO 2 MP core IO board The core IO board has a unique MAC address that identifies the hardware on the network EA IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address to the core IO board and not the MAC address to the server core LAN card 2 Connect the LAN cable from the server to an active network port wv Apply ac power to the server 4 Open a browser
330. list 8 Press Enter to display detailed information about the device Figure 3 27 EBSU Maintain Firmware Screen ces witli 3 in hiy valen ore eden in the lise balan oup of davices ave flached tean Device prefixed hy cannot be floghcd in this progran but help i sliman upon seiectinn Select devices E groups tn linsh msing NTE 4 items show hints SPACE viwis release mules viwoy nure gelection itenc Select all everything vill he Cleshed Deuesdsut all vluar all velevtiun nore devices 4 63 1 Annagenent lrocessar RK E 63 28 EBSU displays the firmware update screen for the selected device e The version number in the first column ROM Firmware Version is the one currently installed on your system e The version number in the second column ROM Version on Disk is the one available on your Smart Setup media Figure 3 28 EBSU Maintain Firmware Update Screen A Telnet 16 89 144 185 Array POR vards Lu he Seleen all ayvapyching vill be flashed Deselect all claar all salections lxi MAA HCH HHI MH Ganre ar E 9 Compare the two version numbers and perform one of the following options e If the number in the first column is the same or higher than the number in the second column your installed firmware is current You do not need to update the firmware for this device You can exit EBSU and quit this procedure e If the number in the first colum
331. lled to protect connector pins Save these covers for future use Inspect the processor pins and verify that the pins are not bent Align the alignment holes on the processor with the alignment posts on the processor cage and carefully lower the processor onto the processor socket Figure 6 22 and Figure 6 23 CAUTION Do not press the processor into the socket When properly aligned the processor pins seat into the socket No additional pressure is required Damage to the pins can occur if too much pressure is applied Lock the processor into the socket on the processor board Figure 6 22 a Unfasten the processor install tool from the tool holder on the processor board b Insert the processor tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink c Rotate the processor tool clockwise 180 degrees d Refasten the processor install tool to the tool holder on the processor board Reconnect the processor power cable to the connector cable that attaches directly to the processor board Figure 6 21 224 Removing and Replacing Server Components 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Close the processor cage Figure 6 20 page 220 a Grasp the processor cage handle and rotate the cage closure inward toward the rear of the assembly until itis completely closed b Apply adequate force to push the handle down until it is flush with the cage Replace the processor board assembly See Replacing the Processor Boa
332. lots on the PCI PCI X PCle backplane Slots 7 and 8 are shared slots on the PCI PCI X backplane Slots 9 and 10 are shared slots on both blackplanes and are half length Core I O LAN may occupy slot 10 oF WN For more information on shared slots see Table 6 3 page 198 Upgrading the I O backplane may require reinstalling the Operating System See Figure B 1 to determine if OS reinstallation is required I O Backplane Upgrade 261 Figure B 1 OS Reinstallation Flowchart Determine the Operating System Being Used Operating System Must Be Reinstalled For Upgrade Core I O to the System Changing the Slot Location of Any PCI X Core I O Operating System Must Be Upgraded but Reinstallation is Not Necessary For Upgrade Required Service Tools Service of this server requires one or more of the following tools e Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit P N 9300 1155 e 1 4 inch flat blade screwdriver e ACX 15 Torx screwdriver e ACX 10 Torx screwdriver Safety Information A Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage removing and replacing server components Voltages can be present within the server Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components to prevent injury and to prevent damage to the server CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attemp
333. low these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter the CO command to access the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition fsX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the HP UX loader is EFI HPUX HPUX EFI on the device you are accessing 3 At the EFI Shell environment use the befg command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list bcfg boot dump Displays all items in the boot options list for the system bcfg boot rm Removes the item number specified by from the boot options list bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot list bcfg boot add file efi Description Add a new boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Descri
334. lowing information describes how to install the server into an HP rack or an approved non HP rack HP Rack HP servers that are installed into racks are shipped with equipment mounting slides An installation guide comes with each set of slides HP 3 7U Quick Deploy Rail System Installation Instructions for HP Products Follow the steps in this installation guide to determine where and how to install the server into the rack The following are additional instructions for installing the HP Integrity rx3600 server into the rack 1 The cable management arm CMA is factory configured to mount on the left side of the server as viewed from the rear of the chassis You must switch the CMA from a left to a right mount configuration The CMA is mounted on the right side of the server to ensure easy removal of the power supplies 2 Remove two T25 screws with the orange tags from the server bezel one screw from the same location on each side of the server The screws are located behind the pull handles 3 Remove the large orange screws from the rear of the rack located on the left and right server slide rails The server will not slide forward if these screws are not removed Non HP Rack The guide Mounting in non HP racks enables you to evaluate the installation of HP equipment into non HP racks Use this guide when you need to qualify whether you can install maintain and service any HP equipment in a non HP rack The guide is located on the
335. lug directly into sockets on the processor board when the memory carrier assembly is fully seated Table 1 3 lists the two types of supported memory carriers and the memory configurations of each carrier Table 1 3 Supported Memory Configurations Memory Carrier Type Memory Boards Installed Minimum Memory Maximum Memory Configuration Configuration 8 DIMM memory carrier Two 4 DIMM memory 2 GB one pair two 1 GB 32 GB eight 4 GB DIMMs standard boards DIMMs 24 DIMM memory carrier Two 12 DIMM memory 2 GB one quad four 96 GB 24x4 GB DIMMs optional high capacity boards 512 MB DIMMs The server supports the following DIMM sizes e 512 MB e 1 GB e 2 GB e 4 GB Figure 1 3 is a block diagram of the 8 DIMM memory carrier that shows data addresses and controls that flow through the CEC and to and from the processors Server Subsystems 29 Figure 1 3 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Block Diagram Data Strobe ta Strobe e Ie T C E G Data Siobe AAA Figure 1 4 is a block diagram of the 24 DIMM memory carrier that shows data addresses and controls that flow from the processors through the CEC and memory mux to the DIMMs 30 Overview Figure 1 4 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Block Diagram LI if i ii i cello JE E mal a i MT T ig 1 NA Cooling There are three system fans assemblies that cool the server The fans are redundant hot swappable and intercha
336. matically adds an entry to the boot options list To add a Microsoft Windows entry to the system boot options list follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to access the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Microsoft Windows For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Microsoft Windows loader is efi microsoft winnt50 ia64ldr efi and it is on the device you are accessing 132 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System ES NOTE You must only initiate this loader from the EFI Boot Menu not from the EFI Shell 3 List the contents of the EFI Microsoft WINNT50 directory to identify the name of the Windows boot option file Boot 00nn that you want to import into the system boot options list fs0 gt 1s EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Directory of fs0 EFI Microsoft WINNT50 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 s3 12 18 03 08 16a 354 B
337. me Internally the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware functionality The firmware incorporates the following main interfaces Processor Abstraction Layer PAL PAL provides a seamless firmware abstraction between the processor and system software and platform firmware System Abstraction Layer SAL SAL provides a uniform firmware interface and initializes and configures the platform Extensible Firmware Interface EFI EFI provides an interface between the operating system and the platform firmware EFI uses data tables that contain platform related information and boot and run time service calls that are available to the operating system and its loader to provide a standard environment for booting Advanced Configuration and Power ACPI provides a standard environment for configuring Interface ACPI and managing server systems ACPI moves system power configuration and management from the system firmware to the operating system and abstracts the interface between the platform hardware and the operating system software This enables each to evolve independently of the other The firmware supports HP UX 11i version 2 June 2006 release Linux Windows and OpenVMS 8 3 operating systems through the Itanium processor family standards and extensions and has no operating system specific functional
338. me Time in seconds 0 999 0 means no timeout which the host uses to timeout I Os for devices other than e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 01h Sequential Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 05h CD ROM e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type 0Eh Simplified Direct Access Controls LUN scans for the following devices with Non Removable Media e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type OER Simplified Direct Access Controls LUN scans for the following devices with Removable Media e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 05h CD ROM e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type OER Simplified Direct Access Controls LUN scans for the following devices e SCSI Device Type 01h Sequential Access Controls LUN scans for all devices other than the following e SCSI Device Type 00h Direct Access e SCSI Device Type 01h Sequential Access e SCSI Device Type 04h Write Once e SCSI Device Type 05h CD ROM e SCSI Device Type 07h Optical e SCSI Device Type OER Simplified Direct Access To access Spinup Properties press Enter on the Spinup Properties field from the Advanced Adaptor Properties screen This screen enables you to view and modify spin up specific settings Spin up refers to the disk drives getting
339. more information 6 Backup the TPM security information See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information gt Enabling the Trusted Platform Module 121 122 4 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System This chapter covers procedures for booting and shutting down operating systems on entry class HP Integrity servers HP supports the following operating systems e HP UX 11i Version 2 B 11 23 e HP Open VMS 164 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 e Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 e SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 This chapter addresses the following topics e Configuring System Boot Options page 123 e Booting and Shutting Down HP UX page 124 e Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS page 129 e Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 132 e Booting and Shutting Down Linux page 135 Configuring System Boot Options This section discusses the system boot options you can configure on entry class HP servers including the boot options list and the autoboot setting for the server A NOTE To better follow the instructions in this chapter you should be familiar with the boot paths Boot Options List This section discusses the system boot options you can configure on entry class HP Integrity servers including the boot options list and the autoboot setting for the server The boot options list is a list of loadable items available for you to select from the EFI
340. mory Load Order When installing memory use a minimum of one pair in the 8 DIMM memory carrier and one quad in the 24 DIMM memory carrier of like sized DIMMs Insert additional DIMMs into the memory carriers in the next available pair or quad in order of capacity from largest to smallest Install DIMMs into the appropriate slots on the memory carrier board each slot has a unique ID Use Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 10 to determine where to install DIMMs on the memory carrier board CAUTION Donot mix DIMM sizes or types within a pair or quad Load DIMM pairs and quads in order of capacity from largest to smallest For example if you have a quad of 2 GB DIMMs and a quad of 1 GB DIMMs install the quad of 2 GB DIMMs first Failure to observe these cautions results in system degradation or failure 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order The 8 DIMM memory carrier has two sides labeled side 0 and side 1 each of which contains a memory carrier board The 8 DIMM memory carrier can contain one to four pairs of memory Pairs of memory are divided equally between the two sides of the memory carrier For example if you have two pairs of memory to install load two DIMMs in slots OA and OB of side 0 and load two DIMMs in slots OA and OB of side 1 Table 3 5 lists the 8 DIMM memory carrier load order Installing the System Table 3 5 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order Pair Number Memory Carrier Side Slot ID 1 Side 0 0A 0B 2 Side 1 0A 0B 3
341. n Example D 15 info all command Shell gt info all SYSTEM INFORMATION Date Time Oct 31 2003 22 03 39 Manufacturer hp Product Name server bl60p Product Number A9901A Serial Number MYJ3350026 UUID System Bus Frequency 200 MHz PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION of L3 L4 CPU Logical Cache Cache Slot CPUs Speed Size Size 0 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None 1 1 1 GHz 1 5 MB None MEMORY INFORMATION DIMM A DIMM B DIMM Current DIMM Current 0 1024MB Active 1024MB Active 1 Sates a S 2 soes ds 3 is She ee Active Memory 2048 MB Installed Memory 2048 MB I O INFORMATION BOOTABLE DEVICES Order Media Type Path Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID 48B4F371 E34C 11D6 A8D6 07A8C14CB68B Family Model hex Rev 1F 01 B1 1F 01 B1 Path 20 03 10 31 22 03 39 Processor State Active Active EFI POSSE Commands 329 00 00 01 00 0x1033 0x0035 00 00 01 01 0x1033 0x0035 00 00 01 02 0x1033 0x00E0 00 00 02 00 0x1095 0x0649 00 00 03 00 0x8086 0x1229 00 20 01 00 0x1000 0x0030 00 20 01 01 0x1000 0x0030 00 20 02 00 0x14E4 0x1645 BOOT INFORMATION 330 Utilities Monarch CPU Current Preferred Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings AutoBoot OFF Timeout is disabled Boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable OS is not speedy boot aware Selftest Setting early cpu Run this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run thi
342. n Sequence and Checklist page 54 Unpacking and Inspecting the Server page 54 Installing Additional Components page 56 Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal Mount page 78 Connecting the Cables page 78 Console Setup page 80 Accessing the Host Console page 91 Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 93 Core I O Card Configuration page 95 Installation Troubleshooting page 117 Enabling the Trusted Platform Module page 120 Safety Information Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures Voltages can be present within the server even when it is powered off Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD Follow the safety precautions listed below to ensure safe handling of components to prevent injury and to prevent damage to the server When removing or installing any server component follow the instructions provided in this guide If installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component when power is applied fans are running reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating If installing a hot pluggable component complete the required software intervention prior to removing the component If installing an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle WARNING Ensur
343. n is less than the number in the second column your installed firmware is older than the version on your Smart Setup media You must update the firmware for this device Proceed to Step 9 and continue from there 114 Installing the System ES NOTE The utility does not allow you to flash the firmware if the installed version is the same or higher than the version on the Smart Setup media 10 Use the tab key to scroll down into the Device section and highlight the device name 11 Press Enter to select the device this puts an X inside the box on the left side of the device name 12 Use the tab key to move to the OK selection and press Enter The firmware update begins and proceeds automatically to completion Configuring the Array HP provides two utilities for manually configuring an array on a Smart Array controller e ORCA a simple ROM based configuration utility e Array Configuration Utility ACU a versatile browser based utility that provides maximum control over configuration parameters 2 NOTE To copy a particular array configuration to several other servers on the same network use the Array Configuration Replicator ACR or the scripting capability of ACU ACR is provided in the SmartStart Scripting Toolkit available on the HP Web site at http www hp com servers sstoolkit Whichever utility you use the following limitations apply e For the most efficient use of drive space do not m
344. n the SAS controller follow these steps Starting the DRVCFG Utility To start thedrvdfgconfiguration utility follow these steps 1 Select the EFI Shell from the console menu Installing the System 2 Typedrvcfg s and press Enter Using the DRVCFG Utility The configuration utility uses several input keys F1 F2 HOME END and so on that may not be supported by all terminal emulation programs Each of these keys has an alternate key that performs the same function Review the terminal emulation program documentation to verify which input keys are supported If problems occur using any of the function keys or HOME END PGUP PGDN it is recommended that the alternate keys be used There are general key inputs throughout the configuration utility that apply on all screens F1 Help Context sensitive help for the cursor resident field Arrow Keys Select Item Up down left right movement to position the cursor Home End Select Item Up down left right movement to position the cursor Change Item Items with values in brackets are modifiable Numeric keypad and numeric keypad minus update a modifiable field to its next relative value Esc Abort Exit Escape aborts the current context operation and or exits the current screen User confirmation is solicited as required if changes have been made by user If you are using a serial console pressing Esc causes a delay of several seconds before it takes effect This
345. nMeanl e a ee ed o RA e E 113 EBSU Maintain Firmware Screen cccccccccccecccssccceccesceceessecccsecscecseesesccseeseseecseescecsesseseseseass 114 EBSU Maintain Firmware Update Screenincsictcssnsssnisecssousetenadecnuestrtenke tu nana tra dear 114 ORCA Mai Men A tee Sate ole pet S Leila nt a 116 Front Pare EDS a a td ld ale en anes 141 rx3600 Diagn stie Panel BD Sala 150 1x3600 with PCI PCI X I O System Block Diagrams ccc tsacosisdecscevasscieuphvecestaaedccebivesecaoe sted cass tees 156 rx3600 with PCI PCI X PCle I O System Block DiagraM coonoocncnccnonnccnnoconncnananonncrnnoconaconncncnnoos 157 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot TD Siz moriria ia 163 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot LDS cu aia warts 164 Rack Screw LA ds 180 Server im Pedestal Kbs id lili Etc 181 15 6 4 6 5 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 B 1 C 1 C 2 C 4 C 5 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 C 11 16 Removing and Replacing the Top Coven ii AA cid 182 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly CovVer oooconncccnoconocnnionanonccinnanananinnon 183 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan UNit ooonoccnoccconcanicnnonncnanaconncinnaninnonn 185 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power SUpplY coonconoconconocnnncnonnnonoranonanonanonacannrn nora 187 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable
346. nd To disable autoboot issue the setboot b off command Booting and Shutting Down HP UX This section covers booting and shutting down HP UX on entry class HP Integrity servers e To add an HP UX entry to the boot options list see Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List page 124 e To boot HP UX use the following procedures Booting HP UX From the EFI Boot Manager page 125 describes the standard ways to boot HP UX Typically this results in booting HP UX in multi user mode Booting HP UX in Single User Mode page 127 describes how to boot HP UX in single user mode Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode page 128 describes how to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode e To shut down the HP UX operating system see Shutting Down HP UX page 128 Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List This section describes how to add an HP UX entry to the system boot options list You can add the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 124 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System EL NOTE The operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list To add an HP UX boot option when logged in to HP UX use the setboot command For more information see the setboot 1M manpage To add an HP UX item to the boot options list from the EFI Shell fol
347. nd if DHCP and DNS services are available to the server See Table 3 12 for possible scenarios Once you have determined the iLO 2 MP access you must determine how you will configure the iLO 2 MP LAN in order to acquire an IP address There are three methods available e DHCP DNS e ARP Ping e RS 232 serial port Table 3 12 provides all the possible scenarios to consider Use this table to help you select the appropriate LAN configuration method to obtain an IP address Table 3 12 LAN Configuration Methods DHCP DNS RS 232 Serial Port MP LAN Configuration Method LC command Yes Yes No DHCP Yes Yes Yes DHCP or RS 232 serial port No No No ARP Ping No Yes No ARP Ping No Yes Yes ARP Ping or RS 232 Yes No Yes RS 232 serial port No No Yes RS 232 serial port or ARP Ping Yes No No Cannot set up the LAN Reconsider your criteria Once you have determined how you will configure the iLO 2 MP LAN in order to acquire an IP address you must configure the iLO 2 MP LAN using the selected method Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS A DHCP automatically configures all DHCP enabled servers with IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses All HP Integrity entry class servers with the iLO 2 MP are shipped from the factory with DHCP enabled HP recommends using the DHCP and DNS method to simplify access to the iLO 2 MP NOTE You can use ARP Ping regardless of the status of DHCP un
348. ndles Use the handles to replace the memory carrier into the chassis 3 Complete the following memory installation prerequisite tasks before installing the memory a Determine the DIMM load order as appropriate for the 8 DIMM or 24 DIMM memory carrier For more information see Memory Load Order page 68 b Use Figure 3 9 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 69 or Figure 3 10 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 70 to determine the DIMM slots to populate c Read understand and follow the general guidelines to install memory in the server See Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines page 70 4 Lay the memory carrier assembly on side 0 or side 1 so that the memory carrier side that contains the DIMM slots that you will install DIMMs into faces upward Figure 3 8 page 67 5 Remove the memory carrier assembly side cover a Press the release tabs Figure 3 8 page 67 on both sides of the extraction handle release button until the side cover releases from the top center of the assembly b Rotate the side cover slightly to free the tabs from the retaining slots at the base of the assembly Figure 3 8 page 67 c Lift the side cover off the assembly 6 Install the DIMMs Figure 3 11 a Align the DIMM with the slot located on the memory board and align the key in the connector with the notch in the DIMM b Push on each end of the DIMM firmly and evenly until it seats into the slot
349. nected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing or replacing the DVD drive Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the DVD Drive To remove the DVD drive follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 Insert a paper clip or pin that fits into the hole to the left of the DVD drive and push firmly to eject the drive out of the bay Figure 6 11 Pull the DVD drive straight out to remove it from the chassis Figure 6 11 202 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 11 DVD Drive Removal and Replacement DVD Release Front Chassis View Replacing the DVD Drive To replace a DVD drive follow these steps 1 Insert the DVD drive and push it straight into the drive bay until it clicks into place Figure 6 11 2 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly The memory carrier assembly encloses the system DIMMs There are two different memory carrier assemblies available for this server e 8DIMM memory carrier assembly e 24 DIMM memory carrier assembly The 8 and 24 DIMM memory ca
350. nformation Verifier Exerciser Diagnostic Expert System Yes No No No No CPU FPU No No Yes No Yes Memory Yes No Yes No No Graphics Yes Yes Yes No No Core I O LAN Yes Yes Yes Yes No Disks and Arrays Yes Yes Yes No No Tape Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Magneto optical Yes No No No Yes drives Add on network I O Yes Yes Yes No Yes cards Add on mass storage Yes No No No No T O cards Linux Online Support Tools Online support tools are provided through Insight Manager IM7 on Linux hosted systems The exact coverage of these tools is the same as for the current A 32 implementation The IPF version of Insight Manager IM7 has been re architected to take advantage of current standards for example WBEM WMI CDM CIM XML Offline Support Tools List Table 5 13 lists offline support tools Table 5 13 Offline Support Tools List Offline Tool Functional Area CPUDIAG Processor diagnostic MEMDIAG Memory diagnostic MAPPER System mapping utility TITANDIAG SBA LBA chipset PERFVER Peripheral verifier DFDUTIL SAS SCSI disk firmware update utility 152 Troubleshooting Table 5 13 Offline Support Tools List continued Offline Tool Functional Area DISKUTIL Disk test utility non destructive COPYUTIL Data copy utility DISKEXPT Disk expert utility IODIAG I O diagnostics launch facility Executes third party diagnostics and runs BIST if available CIODIAG2 Core I
351. ng and modifying settings for the adapter is allowed but the information and functionality available may be limited Boot Support Specifies whether an adapter is eligible for configuration utility software control or is reserved for control by other software Enabled BIOS amp OS Enabled BIOS Only Enabled OS Only or Disabled e Enabled BIOS amp OS SAS controller is controlled by both the BIOS and OS driver e Enabled BIOS Only SAS controller is controlled only by the BIOS This setting may not be supported by all OS drivers For example it is not possible to disable an adapter in a Windows driver e Enabled OS Only SAS controller is controlled only by the OS driver e Disabled SAS controller is not controlled by the BIOS when the SAS controller is loaded However the adapter is still visible through the configuration protocol Changes to the Boot Support setting are reflected in the Status field of the Adapter List menu The new setting will do not take effect until the BIOS is reloaded system reboot RAID Properties Screens There are four screens within RAID properties To access the screens select RAID Properties from the Adapter Properties screen The Select New Array Type screen displays 288 Core I O Card Utilities Figure C 3 Select New Array Type Screen 3 HP iLO Remote Serial Console Window jangogsp Microsoft Internet Explorer provided E s K Zoom In Out Settings View Existing Array_ fiew the
352. ngeable You service the fans through the top of the chassis The fans are N 1 meaning that the server has three fans but can operate for a very limited time with two fans running If the time threshold is reached the server automatically shuts down to prevent an overtemperature condition Server Subsystems 31 Figure 1 5 Cooling Fans Power 32 The server power subsystem is designed to provide high availability with 1 1 power supply redundancy Figure 1 6 is a block diagram of the power subsystem including voltage labels for ER n aN E 20 ER XIA WE each main server subsystem that requires power Overview Figure 1 6 Power Subsystem Block Diagram System POL Converters r 12506 MA uu NOT I Unified Core jV3P3 is called Processor BP V3P3 PCI e a Two hot swappable ac dc power supplies generate main system power and a standby power voltage One active power supply is sufficient to operate the system at maximum load Each power supply receives ac power through the integrated ac inlet The system can operate at 100 240 VAC and achieve 1 1 redundancy The power supplies are power factor corrected and the maximum dc power output of the power system is 1095 watts Service the hot swappable power supplies are serviced by sliding them out the rear of the chassis Applying system power in normal customer usage the rx3600 runs on 100 to 240 V Stand
353. nitialized with the new settings on the next boot System default is 9600 baud Other communication parameters are listed in Table D 2 Table D 2 Communications Parameters Parameter Value RECEIVE_FIFO_DEPTH 1 TIMEOUT 1000000 PARITY No parity DATA_BITS 8 STOP_BITS 1 CONTROL_MASK 0 boottest Interacts with the speedy boot variable enabling it to be set appropriately Displays status of all speedy boot bits Run all tests Skip all tests for a normal boot time for a faster boot time Displays status of specific Speedy Boot bit Syntax boottest boottest on boottest off boottest test boottest test on off Parameters test booting valid early cpu late_cpu platform chipset io_hw mem_init mem_test Sets or clears a specific Speedy Boot bit Enable disable bit Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Each test can be set or cleared system firmware response to BOOTING If OS Speedy Boot aware set to on early CPU selftests late CPU selftests system board hardware tests CEC tests EFI driver Core I O tests memory initialization full destructive memory tests EFI POSSE Commands 323 Example D 6 boottest command Shell gt boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable Selftest Setting booting valid On OS speedy boot aware early cpu Run this test late _cpu Run this
354. nitializing controller Retrieving firmware version this may take several minutes Current controller firmware version is 2 34 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Firmware Image is not suitable for HP Smart Array 5300 Controller at Seg 1 Bus 20 Dev 1 Func 0 After updating the firmware cycle the power on the system and on any external JBODS connected to the Smart Array HBAs HELP or Use HELP or to display usage text program version number and build date Enter saupdate HELP or saupdate Error Messages The following is a list of error messages under various situations e When keyword LIST or UPDATE is misspelled or extra parameters are specified Error Syntax Error Usage saupdate LIST or saupdate UPDATE all e When the controller ID in the saupdate UPDATE command is not correct No matching controller found e When a firmware file does not exist in the saupdate UPDATE command the example shows CYBORG101 BIN does not exist File CYBORG101 BIN Not Found e When an invalid firmware or corrupted file is specified in the saupdate UPDATE command the example shows CYBORG101 BIN does not exist File CYBORG101 BIN invalid or corrupted 112 Installing the System EBSU Utility The EFI based
355. nning at cardrunningat cardrunningat card running at PCI 66 MHz PCI 66 MHz PCI 66 MHz PCI 66 MHz PCI X 66 MHz Incompatible Incompatible bus Compatible New Compatible New Compatible New frequency card running at cardrunning at card running at PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 66 MHz PCI X 66 MHz 1 The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots slots 7 8 9 and 10 Slots 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 are not shared slots 2 Card is accepted and runs at frequency shown 3 The new card does not initialize and powers down due to frequency mismatch 4 The new card does not initialize and powers down due to bus mode mismatch Online Addition OLA we IMPORTANT Before installing a PCI PCI X PCle card ensure you install the proper drivers To add a PCI PCI X PCle card into an empty slot follow these steps 1 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 2 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 56 198 Removing and Replacing Server Components 3 Select an empty slot that is appropriate for the card you are installing See PCI PCI X PCle Configurations page 194 for more information A CAUTION Do not accidentally push the manual retention latch MRL of a powered on occupied slot this automatically cuts off the power for that slot 4 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL t
356. nt holes of an installed processor Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor 221 Figure 6 22 Processor Alignment Posts and Lock Unlock Mechanism Alignment Post Locations Lock Unlock Mechanism oo OOVl LAELIA ANN AT Figure 6 23 shows the processor socket lock and unlock mechanism and alignment post locations 222 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 23 Processor Alignment Holes and Lock Unlock Mechanism Alignment Holes Lock Unlock Mechanism Installing a Dual Core Processor To install a dual core processor follow these steps A NOTE Prior to installing a dual core processor into the server read the following instructions carefully and see the figures in this chapter for a complete understanding of this process 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor 223 ES 11 ES 12 13 A 14 15 Remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrie
357. ntified as PO and the second hot swappable power supply is identified as P1 Figure 6 6 A CAUTION When a second power supply is not used the empty power supply slot must remain covered with the supplied metal filler panel Failure to observe this caution can result in damage due to overheating if the cover does not remain in place CAUTION Install the hot swappable power supply into the server before attaching the new power cord Failure to observe this caution can result in damage to the server Removing a Hot Swappable Power Supply To remove a hot swappable power supply follow these steps 1 Move the cable management arm from the rack slide nearest the power supplies just enough to allow access to the power supplies 2 Remove the power cord plug from the power supply receptacle 3 Grasp the handle and push the locking tab down with your thumb to release the power supply from the socket on the midplane board 4 Support the power supply with both hands and pull the power supply out of the server Figure 6 6 186 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 6 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply Rear Chassis View Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply To replace a hot swappable power supply follow these steps 1 Remove the metal filler panel 2 Support the new power supply with both hands and slide it into the empty slot until it clicks into place Figure 6 6 EA IMPORTANT Ensure
358. ntnarienin tate 170 Manageability Status LED nacional di ed 171 LAN A Connector LEDS adi s 172 LAND Connector LEDS a 172 Normal Boot Process LEDs dieta 173 1x3600 Environmental Specific S vt ais 175 PEPE VO Da daa 194 PCI PQI X PCle TO PAS A Ai 197 PCI PCI X Card Slot Frequency Bus Mode Compatibility for Shared SlotS oonconccnmmmm m 198 Supported Memory Carrier Assembly Configurati0NS cocooonoconocnncnnnnnnonconnronoranonnnranarnnnonaranornss 203 Supported Memory Configurations ac eect acct ute ENEAS Ek Raa oaasi asie ies 209 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Load Order ri 209 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Loading Exam ples consistir avi 212 Processor Load Orders i ao 219 Customer Self Repair Inforo iii data ene iiie eiei etapa at 258 CRU Rist A eo a telat teen E E A E E E EE EEE 258 Slot Speed Comparison and Planning Table concisa ire iio ibid 261 WO Backplane Upgrade Checklist id ad ica 263 Cable kit part numbers ran tada dara eat aia 268 A N 276 SAS cable PAra A AR RA 278 Processor LIDS PACES si raro canst 280 mptutil Commands and FUNCION Sata ai lt ia ad it ia 284 IAS Cable Part Numbers A A A A 307 ACU and ORCA Supported Features and Procedures sic icncisiciseciesscenscevanns carencias 313 EFL CIMAS in a A a a a A A EEN 318 Communications Par e cocida 323 DOLVER DO ri io seuvuadeteGaseeds 343 Server DIES 343 Console Output Devices a A a io 347 Console Input Devices ad aiii 348 List of Tables List of Examples 6 1 D 1 D 2
359. nto the enclosure connector and then release the tab Table B 5 SAS cable part numbers Approximate cable length Type of cable Option kit part number 1m ft Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419570 B21 2 m 6 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini SAS 4x 407339 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419571 B21 4m 13 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini SAS 4x 432238 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419572 B21 278 Upgrades Table B 5 SAS cable part numbers continued Approximate cable length Type of cable Option kit part number 6 m 20 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini SAS 4x 432239 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419537 B21 Completing the Adapter Installation Procedure B 28 Updating the Firmware To update the firmware on the server controller or hard drives use Smart Components These components are available on the Firmware Maintenance CD A more recent version of a particular server or controller component might be available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support 1 Find the most recent version of the component that you require Components for controller firmware updates are available in offline and online formats 2 Follow the instructions for installing the component on the server These instructions are given with the CD and are provided on the same Web page as the component 3 Follow the additional instructions that describe how to use the component to flash the ROM These instruc
360. ntroller software is installed correctly the generated output looks similar to this ioscan kfnd ciss Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus 5 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ciss CLAIMED INTERFACE PCIe SAS SmartArray P400 RAID Controller dev ciss5 If the software is not installed correctly reinstall it using swinstall Procedure B 15 Updating the Firmware Use the sautil command to confirm and update the firmware version currently installed on the Smart Array Controller HP recommends that you install the latest firmware You must log in as a superuser user to run the saut il command Before running the sautil command to 272 Upgrades confirm or update the controller firmware you must know the device file name for the Smart Array Controller 1 Determine the device file for the Smart Array Controller by running the ioscan kfnd ciss command The following is an example of the ioscan output listing the Smart Array Controller device files ioscan kfnd ciss Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus 5 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ciss CLAIMED INTERFACE PCIe SAS SmartArray P400 RAID Controller dev ciss5 In the example dev ciss5 is the device file for Smart Array P400 Controller Determine the Smart Array series controller firmware version that is in the ROM on the Smart Array Controller by using either the sautil lt device_file gt command extensive output or the sautil lt device file gt
361. o access the screens select RAID Properties from the Adapter Properties screen The Select New Array Type screen displays Core I O Card Configuration 101 Figure 3 24 Select New Array Type Screen i t Internet Explorar provided Select New Array Type Screen The Select New Array Type screen enables you to view an existing array or create an Integrated Mirror array of two disks plus an optional hot spare e To goto the Create New Array screen select Create IM Volume e To go to the View Array screen select View an Existing Array Create New Array Screen The Create New Array screen enables you to create a new array To access the Create New Array screen press Enter on the Create IM Volume field from the Select New Array Type screen To create a new array follow these steps 1 Select one of the following options To migrate to an IM array press M This keeps the existing data and the disk is synchronized To delete all data on all the disks in the array press D This overwrites existing data when creating a new IM array and the disk is not synchronized 2 To create the array after the volume is configured press C The system prompts you to save changes which creates the array During the creation process the utility pauses You are then taken back to the Adapter Properties screen The following are the descriptions for the Create New Array screen Array Type Indicates the type of array being created Array Size In
362. o need to update Systems Insight Manager The latest version of Systems Insight Manager is available for download at the HP website http www hp com servers manage Processor Upgrades The HP Integrity rx2660 rx3600 rx6600 servers and BL860c server blade support upgrades from Intel Itanium Montecito to Intel Itanium Montvale processors Processor Upgrades 279 CAUTION Intel Montvale processors cannot be intermixed with similar Montecito processors Processor speed and cache size must be identical for all processors in a system Whether upgrading replacing or adding an additional processor to ensure compatibility use processors with identical part numbers Failure to observe this caution results in performance degradation or system failure Table B 6 lists the processor upgrades that are supported and required system firmware levels for each server Table B 6 Processor Upgrades Manufacturing Part Number Processor System Firmware Level HP Integrity rx2660 server AD392 2100B AD392AX 1 6 GHz 12 MB Single Core AD390 2100B AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB Dual Core greater than 01 05 AD391 2100B AD391AX 1 67 GHz 18 MB Dual Core HP Integrity rx3600 server AD390 2100C AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB greater than 02 03 AD391 2100C AD391AX 1 67 GHz 18 MB HP Integrity rx6600 server AD388 2100C 1 6 GHz 24 MB AD389 2100C 1 6 GHz 18 MB greater than 02
363. o release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X card bulkhead filler is fully exposed 5 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler A CAUTION When inserting the PCI PCI X PCle card be careful that you do not accidentally touch an attention button on the other PCI PCI X PCle MRLs this shuts down another PCI PCI X PCle card slot If you do this push the attention button again within five seconds to cancel the shutdown Also ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can fail after power is reapplied to the slot 6 Insert the PCI PCI X PCle card into the empty slot and use firm even pressure to seat the card in the slot 7 Connect all internal and external cables to the PCI PCI X PCle card 8 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead 9 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card if it is full length 10 Activate the PCI PCI X PCle card and slot a Press the red attention button located on the MRL of the appropriate slot The power LED starts to blink b Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady on ES NOTE After pushing the attention button you have five seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the attention button again After five seconds pressing the atten
364. o the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the Main Menu Booting HP UX in Single User Mode To boot HP UX in single user mode follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP UX in single user mode a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX Issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing Boot to the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt by pressing any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process After you press a key the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt launches For help using the HPUX EFI loader enter the help command To return to the EFI Shell enter exit fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 User types a key to stop the HP UX boot process an
365. o the SAS input connector of the external storage enclosure we IMPORTANT Drives that are to be used in the same array must be of the same type either all SAS or all SATA Parallel SCSI drives cannot be used with this controller 5 Tighten the lock screws on the cable connector Core I O Card Configuration 109 6 7 Power on the enclosure Power on the server SAS Cable Part Numbers If you require additional cables order them by the option kit number listed in Table 3 16 Table 3 16 SAS Cable Part Numbers Cable Length Option Kit Number Cable Assembly Number 1 0 m 3 3 ft 389664 B21 361317 001 2 0 m 6 6 ft 389668 B21 361317 002 4 0 m 13 ft 389671 B21 361317 004 6 0 m 20 ft 389674 B21 361317 006 SAUPDATE Utility Use saupdate from the EFI Shell to update the firmware image on the HP Smart Array Controller Command line options are described below Follow one of these two procedures to run saupdate we 1 If you are using saupdate from the Offline Diagnostic CD Download the firmware and copy it to the EFI partition The CD containing saupdate efi must be in the drive before booting the system to allow device mapping Boot the system to the EFI Shell prompt The CD drive should appear in the list of mapped devices as fs0 Change to this device by typing fs0 under EFI Shell prompt If the EFI utility and firmware image files are not located in the root directory move to t
366. omer replaceable unit CRU with the exception of the power supplies has a unique set of status indicators located on a diagnostic panel that you view through the top cover CRUs include components such as individual memory DIMMs processors and fans LEDs that correspond to each CRU illuminate when there is a problem Figure 1 7 Diagnostic Panel O 1 Processor Processor Camer O Memory Carrier O 1O Assemby O Disk Backplane O OPowerr O O Interconnect MOR Mass Storage 34 The server mass storage subsystem SAS features the following SAS components Overview e Hard drives e Cables e Backplane board e Core I O cards The server can contain up to eight SAS disk drives The drives have LEDs that indicate activity and device status and an LED used to locate each drive Additionally there is a set of slot availability LEDs positioned in the middle of the disk drive bays on the front of the chassis The illuminated LEDs indicate connection and power from a SAS controller to the bank of SAS disk drive slots The disk drives plug directly into the SAS backplane board There is one SAS backplane board in the server Two cables connect from the SAS backplane board to the SAS core I O card Service the SAS backplane board and SAS core I O card from the top of the chassis Firmware Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework at run ti
367. ompatible Compatible Compatible Compatible New card New card running New card running New card running running at PCI at PCI 33 at PCI 33 at PCI 33 33 PCI 66 MHz Incompatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible frequency New card New card running New card running New card running running at PCI at PCI 66 at PCI 66 at PCI 66 66 PCI X 66 MHz Incompatible Incompatible Compatible Compatible Compatible frequency bus New card running New card running New card running at PCI X 66 at PCI X 66 at PCI X 66 The conditions described in this table apply only to shared slots 7 8 9 and 10 Slots 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 are not shared slots Compatible card is accepted and runs at the frequency shown Incompatible frequency card does not work The new card does not initialize and powers down due to frequency mismatch Incompatible bus Card does not work The new card does not initialize and powers down due to bus mode mismatch Offline Installation of a PCI Card Ensure that you install the proper drivers for PCI PCI X PCle cards after you complete the server installation and power on the server To install a PCI PCI X PCle card with the power off follow these steps 64 1 2 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 56 Select an empty slot that is appropriate for the card you are installing To locate an appropriate slot see PCI PCI X PCle
368. ontact your local service provider For the North American program refer to the HP Web site at http www hp com go selfrepair Table A 1 provides customer self repair information Parts Only Warranty Service 257 Table A 1 Customer Self Repair Information Code Level Description Comments AY Yes Level A with instructions Requires you to replace these parts under warranty available in the service guide No technical skills required BY Optional Level B with instructions Low to moderate technical skills required available in the service guide CY Optional Level C with instructions High technical skills required available in the service guide N No Not a customer replaceable Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair In part order to satisfy the customer warranty HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part Customer Replaceable Units List Table A 2 lists the customer replaceable units CRUs of the HP Integrity rx3600 server we IMPORTANT change often Check the HP Partsurfer website http partsurfer hp com cgi bin spi main to ensure you have the latest part numbers associated with this server http partsurfer hp com cgi bin spi main The list of part numbers is current and correct as of November 2007 Part numbers Table A 2 CRU List Manufacturing Part Description Replacement P
369. oot0001 1 File s 354 bytes 2 Dir s fs0 gt Issue the MSUtil nvrboot efi command to launch the Microsoft Windows boot options utility For example fs0 1 gt msutil nvrboot NVRBOOT OS Boot Options Maintenance Tool Version 5 2 3683 1 SUSE SLES 9 2 HP UX Primary Boot 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 3 Windows Server 2003 Datacenter 4 EFI Shell Built in Windows OS boot option D isplay M odify C opy E x port I mport E rase P ush H elp Q uit Select gt Use the Import command to import the Window boot option file For example Select gt i Enter IMPORT file path EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Imported Boot Options from file EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Press enter to continue Type Q to quit the NVRBOOT utility Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main Menu Booting the Microsoft Windows Operating System To boot the Windows Server 2003 operating system on an HP Integrity server follow these steps 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the system on which you want to boot Windows a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter the CO command to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager Select an item from the boot
370. operation is complete Depending on the capacity and model of disk drive this can take a considerable amount of time 304 Core I O Card Utilities STATUS The STATUS command displays the status of any volume synchronization operation that is currently in progress on the controller Syntax cf ggen lt controller gt status Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 Operation If no volume synchronization is in progress CFGIR prints a message so indicating before exiting The STATUS command adds the Inactive flag to the Volume State field ifthe volume is marked as inactive by the controller firmware Sample Output The following is an example of the status information returned when a volume resynchronization is in progress Background command progress status for controller 0 IR Volume 1 Current operation None Volume ID 2 Volume status Enabled Volume state Optimal Physical disk I Os Not quiesced The status fields in the data displayed can take on the following values Current operation Synchronize or None Volume status Enabled or Disabled Volume state Inactive Optimal Degraded or Failed Physical disk I Os Quiesced or Not quiesced ENABLEIR The ENABLEIR command turns on IR functionality on a SAS controller To accomplish the enabling clear the MPI_ IOUNITPAGE1 DISABLE IR bit in the lO Unit 1 MPT Configuration page Syntax cfggen lt controller gt enableir Parame
371. option name or add boot option arguments to the existing option EL NOTE If you create a new boot option for an already existing option multiple instances of the same boot option exist For example Add a Boot Option Select a Volume NO VOLUME LABEL Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master Load File EFI Shell Built in Load File Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Exit Where e NO VOLUME LABEL A hard drive You can search through the disk for bootable applications to add to the Boot Manager list of Boot options e Removable Media Boot Treats the removable media as a bootable device 344 Utilities e Load File EFI Shell Adds a new instance to the EFI Shell Load File with the MAC address adds a network boot option e Load File with the MAC address Adds a network boot option Delete Boot Option s Use this option to remove boot options from the EFI boot menu A NOTE This does not delete any files applications or drivers from your system This option displays a list of boot options that are configured on the system The names match the options on the main Boot Manager menu If you remove a drive from the system you must manually delete it from the boot options list e To delete an item from the list use the arrow keys to highlight the item and press Enter e To remove all of the entries from the E
372. or follow these steps 1 Remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 57 ES NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however z the top cover release lever must be open 2 Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 65 ES NOTE You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the processor board 3 Remove the processor board assembly See Removing the Processor Board Assembly page 73 Installing Additional Components 75 76 we N ES 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Open the processor cage Figure 3 13 a Grasp the processor cage handle and rotate the handle upward b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure 90 degrees toward the front of the assembly until it stops IMPORTANT Ensure the processor slot is entirely exposed The processor must clear the cage closure for proper installation Locate the appropriate processor slot Module 0 or Module 1 to install the processor into Figure 3 13 Remove the plastic airflow blocker covering the processor slot Remove the protective dust cover from the processor socket Ensure that the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked counterclockwise position The zero insertion force ZIF socket for the processor is locked and unlocked by half of a full turn of the pro
373. or board Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 206 Removing and Replacing Server Components ES NOTE To avoid damage to the memory carrier extraction handles HP recommends rotating the handles inward and snapping them into the locked position when servicing the system DIMMs or any time the carrier is out of the chassis Before replacing the memory carrier press the button to release the extraction handles Use the handles to replace the memory carrier into the chassis 5 To locate the DIMM you need to remove use Figure 6 15 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 210 or Figure 6 16 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot IDs page 211 6 Lay the memory carrier assembly on side 0 or side 1 so that the memory board containing the DIMMs that require servicing faces upward Figure 6 13 page 207 7 Remove the memory carrier assembly side cover a Press the release tabs Figure 6 13 page 207 on both sides of the extraction handle release button until the side cover releases from the top center of the assembly b Rotate the side cover slightly to free the tabs from the retaining slots at the base of the assembly Figure 3 8 c Lift the side cover off the assembly 8 Release the DIMM from the slot a Identify the DIMM you want to remove on the memory board b Push the appropriate extraction levers found on either side of the DIMM slot outward to
374. or this step are identical System firmware gathers and logs all error data for this MCA event to those in Step 8a except that j 1 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors the server in this step must be dules PPM3 shared d I hard resetto besin the bootiti processor power modules s shared memory and core I O 8 8 devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for Process information NOTE You must hard reset the The problem is fixed when the MCA does not repeat server to clear the fatal condition and boot the OS Troubleshooting Tools There are a number of tools available for troubleshooting HP Integrity rx3600 servers including LEDs online and offline diagnostics and system fault management tools LEDs The HP Integrity rx3600 server provides front panel LED diagnostic panel LED and FRU health LEDs which allow you to monitor system health Front Panel The front panel of the HP Integrity rx3600 server contains the power button System Power LED Internal Health LED External Health LED System Health LED UID Button LED and an INIT button The server uses flashing states for example flashing amber or red on these LEDs to indicate a warning or an error See Figure 5 1 for a detailed layout of these front panel indicators and buttons When you power on the server the LEDs light up as follows 1 Power LED turns green when the system starts to power up External he
375. orts used to connect the server to the console device Connect the cables from the appropriate ports to the server Start the emulation software on the console device Log in to the iLO 2 MP See Logging In to the iLO 2 MP page 89 At the MP Main Menu enter CM and press Enter to select command mode At the command mode prompt enter LS and press Enter The screen displays the default LAN configuration values Write down the default values or log the information to a file You may need the information for future troubleshooting Installing the System 8 Use the LC command to disable DHCP a From the LC command menu type D and press Enter b Follow the instructions on the screen to change the DHCP status from Enabled to Disabled c Enter XD R to reset the iLO 2 MP 9 Use the LC command to enter information for the IP address host subnet mask gateway parameters and so on 10 Enter XD R to reset the iLO 2 MP 11 After the iLO 2 MP resets log in to the iLO 2 MP again and enter CM at the MP gt prompt 12 Enter LS to confirm that DHCP is disabled and display a list of updated LAN configuration settings Logging In to the iLO 2 MP To log in to the iLO 2 MP follow these steps 1 Access the iLO 2 MP using the LAN RS 232 serial port telnet SSH or Web method The iLO 2 MP login prompt displays 2 Log in using the default the iLO 2 MP user name and password Admin Admin sd TIP For security reasons
376. ot case sensitive You can enter cfggen commands and parameters in uppercase lowercase or a mixture of the two Use the following conventions in the command descriptions e Text in italics must be entered exactly as shown on the command line e Text surrounded by lt gt must be replaced with a required parameter e Text surrounded by may be replaced by an optional parameter e Parameters surrounded by must be entered one or more times as appropriate for the executed command e Donot enter the command line definition characters lt gt and on the command line The c ggen command uses a command line interface Syntax cfggen lt controller gt lt command gt lt parameters gt NOTE The program name controller number command and parameters fields must be separated by the ASCII space character The format of the parameters is command specific The program return value is returned to the user when the program exits A value of 0 is returned if the command is successful Otherwise a value of 1 is returned Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks The following rules apply when creating IM volumes and hot spare disks e All disks that are part of an IM volume or a hot spare for an IM volume must be on the same SAS controller IM volumes are supported e Only two IM volumes plus a global hot spare per controller can be created e AnIM array must have exactly two disks e A hot spare disk cannot
377. ou are accessing The full path for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server loader is efi SuSE elilo efi and it is on the device you are accessing 3 Use the bcfg command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Displays all items in the boot options list for the system e bcfg boot rm Removes the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv Ha b Moves the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Adds a new boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 EFI redhat elilo efi Red Hat Enterprise Linux adds a Red Hat Enterprise Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list Likewise bcfg boot add 1 efi SuSE elilo efi SLES 9 addsaSuSE Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details 4 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the MP Main Menu Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Operating System You can boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system on HP Integrity servers usin
378. output fvw is the name of the file created with the firmware and nvdata concatenated This concatenated image can be used for all boards of this type or revision How do I program multiple cards in a system from the command line mptutil EFI does not support this Can I program a new flash and option ROM in the same command line argument Yes Run the mptutil f lt firmware_name gt b lt option_rom_name gt command Viewing the VPD Information for EFI Driver and RISC Firmware To view the VPD information for the EFI driver and RISC firmware follow these steps e Atthe fsO gt prompt entermptutil o vpd c 0 EFI Commands To configure an Integrated Mirror IM Array on the SAS Controller use one of the following EFI commands e DRVCFG GUI interface e CFGGEN command line interface A NOTE If you are not using the IM functionality do not follow these procedures DRVCFG Utility To configure an IM on the SAS controller follow these steps Starting the DRVCFG Utility To start theDRVCFGconfiguration utility follow these steps 1 Select the EFI Shell from the console menu 2 Typedrvcfg s and press Enter HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 285 Using the DRVCFG Utility The configuration utility uses several input keys F1 F2 HOME END and so on that may not be supported by all terminal emulation programs Each of these keys has an alternate key that performs the same function Review the
379. ower supplies the I O board assembly and the processor board assembly A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Midplane Board To remove the midplane board follow these steps Removing and Replacing the Midplane Board 253 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 Remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 Remove the clear plastic cover Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 Remove the processor board See Removing the Processor Board Assembly
380. p process Installing the System Figure 3 17 Console Setup Flowchart Determine Physical Access Method terminal or Web browser Determine LAN Configuration Method Attach a Terminal laptop or thin Preferred Method client to the serial Connect to RS 232 port Serial Port Configure LAN with Attach a Terminal laptop or thin client to the serial port Log into iLO MP with iLO MP ARP Ping Log into iLO MP set Gateway Subnet Mask Get MAC address of iLO from server label From a PC on the DHCP DNS Method Reconsider network issue the Get MAC address ofiLO Criteria amp go to arp s ping MP from label on server Start commands to set a DNS host name is new IP address Mp lt MACADDRESS gt Log into LO MP Log into iLO MP Gateway set Gateway Subnet Mask etc are Subnet Mask automatically set when DHCP DNS is used Setup Remaining LO Parameters Default login is Admin with password Admin Setup iLO Change default logins Optionally Configure LDAP SSH telnet etc Setup the server Preparation There are several tasks to perform before you can configure the iLO 2 MP LAN e Determine the physical access method to select and connect cables e Determine the iLO 2 MP LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary Determining the Physical iLO 2 MP Access Method Before you can access the iLO 2 MP you must first determine the correct physical connection method The iLO 2 MP has a sep
381. page 217 Remove hot swappable chassis fan units 2 and 3 See Removing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit page 184 Remove the air baffle Disconnect the USB cable from the connector on the display board Remove the DVD drive See Removing the DVD Drive page 202 Remove the display board See Removing the Display Board page 242 Slide the SAS drives and fillers approximately two inches out of the drive bays See Removing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 188 CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot Disconnect the SAS data and power cables from the connectors on the SAS backplane board Remove the SAS backplane board See Removing the SAS Backplane Board page 247 Remove the interconnect board See Removing the Interconnect Board page 250 Remove the I O board assembly See Removing the I O Board Assembly page 225 Remove the power supplies See Removing a Hot Swappable Power Supply page 186 Remove the fan cables from the fan 1 and fan 2 housing units a Push the release tab down and push the cable connector toward the front of the chassis until the connector tabs clear the opening in the fan housing
382. page 249 CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server Operating system may not reboot Reconnect the SAS data and power cables into the connectors on the SAS backplane board Removing and Replacing the Midplane Board 255 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Replace the SAS disk drives See Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 190 Replace the display board See Replacing the Display Board page 245 Replace the DVD drive See Replacing the DVD Drive page 203 Reconnect the USB cable into the connector on the display board Replace the air baffle Replace hot swap chassis fan units 1 and 2 See Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit page 185 Replace the clear plastic cover Replace the processor board See Replacing the Processor Board Assembly page 218 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 205 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack
383. pen the server access panel and locate the PCI PCI X bus expansion slots For detailed instructions see the documentation that was provided with the server 2 Select the appropriate core I O slot 3 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed 4 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Save it to use for if you later decide to remove the adapter and leave the slot empty 5 Insert the adapter into the slot and press it firmly into place The contacts on the adapter edge should be fully seated in the system board connector Installing Core I O Cards 269 6 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead Procedure B 4 Connecting the Adapter to Other Devices e Connect the Adapter to SAS backplane See Table B 3 page 268 for a listing of Cable kit part numbers Procedure B 5 Completing the Adapter Installation 1 Verify that all cables are routed correctly and are not restricting or being pinched by other components For the correct routing of the cables see the server documentation Reconnect any peripheral devices to the server Plug the ac power cord into the server and then into a grounded AC outlet Power on any
384. peripheral devices attached to the server Power up the server If necessary update the server ROM The required firmware files are on either a CD in the adapter kit or the HP website http www hp com Instructions are provided with the files in the case of the CD in a booklet provided with the CD 7 Install the adapter drivers The drivers are also on either the CD in the adapter kit or the HP website and instructions are again provided with the files Installing the HP Smart Array P600 On HP Integrity rx3600 and rx6600 servers the HP Smart Array P600 is supported by Windows and Linux operating systems It should be installed in slot 1 if one card is to be installed and slot 2 if slot 1 is already occupied Sy Gr ee 19 For more information including configuring and diagnosing array problems refer to the HP Smart Array P600 Controller for Integrity Servers User Guide which can be found in the I O Cards and Networking Software collection under Smart Array at http www docs hp com The installation procedure involves the following steps e Preparing the server e Installing the controller board e Connecting the Controller to Other Devices e Completing the adapter installation procedure including updating the firmware and installing drivers Procedure B 6 Preparing the Server 1 Close all applications 2 Power down the server 3 Power down all peripheral devices that are attached to the server 4 Unplug the
385. personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server we IMPORTANT System information is stored on the interconnect board You must write serial number and model string information to the new interconnect board after installation Removing the Interconnect Board To remove the interconnect board follow these steps ES NOTE Use the guide posts located on the chassis and the keyways located on the interconnect board to help you with the interconnect board removal and replacement procedures 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 Remove the air baffle Figure 6 33 Remove the clear plastic cover Disconnect the USB cable from the connector on the display board Figure 6 30 Remove the DVD drive See Removing the DVD Drive page 202 Remove the display board See Removing the Display Board page 242 Slide the SAS drives and fillers approximately two inches out of the drive bays See Removing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 188 N O E amp A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note
386. pluggable disk drives using the procedures in this section when the server power is on or off CAUTION Drives are loaded in the factory starting with number 8 working from right to left and bottom to top If you have never changed your SAS configuration before you can safely move SAS devices downwards as a block If you have bays 6 7 and 8 occupied you can move them down to bays 1 2 and 3 without having the hardware paths change during a cold install or recovery while the system is shut down but you must move the disks in order and you cannot rearrange them For example you can move bay 6 to 1 7 to 2 and 8 to 3 After doing this you can safely populate the SAS enclosure from bay 4 onwards The same procedure can be performed on bays 9 to 16 CAUTION A hot pluggable device may require interaction with the operating system before you can safely remove it from or install it into the server Verify that the operating system supports removing and replacing disk drives while the operating system is running If the operating system does not support this feature shut down the operating system before attempting this procedure Failure to observe this caution can result in system failure TIP When you receive an HP Integrity rx3600 or HP Integrity rx6600 server from HP if you ever plan to add other SAS devices into the system you should consider moving the SAS devices so they start in bay 1 going upwards instead of Bay 8 going downwards
387. ppropriate service procedures Support is available on the Web and by phone For information on contacting the HP IT Resource Center ITRC near you go to http ww itrc hp com Environment 175 Online Support To contact HP Customer Support online see the Worldwide Limited Warranty and Technical SupportGuide or visit us at http www hp com go bizsupport On the web site enter the server model number rx3600 in the search field The following information is available on this Web site e Software and firmware updates e The latest drivers and utilities e Additional documentation Phone Support To contact HP customer support by phone go to the HP IT Resource Center ITRC at http www itrc hp com Local phone numbers are listed in your native language for help Collecting Information Before Contacting Support 2 NOTE HP recommends that you keep detailed records of any changes to your system and of how system behavior has changed over time or as a result of changes made to your system Before you contact HP support follow these steps 1 Check the previous sections of this chapter to attempt to solve the problem e Note failure symptoms and error indications LEDs and messages e Capture and permanently log the current SEL and FPL contents e Try to determine precisely what did or did not happen 2 Collect the following information e Model number of the server rx3600 e Product number of the ser
388. ppropriate for the executed command e Donot enter the command line definition characters lt gt and on the command line CFGGENuses a command line interface Syntax cfggen lt controller gt lt command gt lt parameters gt A NOTE The program name controller number command and parameters fields must be separated by the ASCII space character The format of the parameters is command specific The program return value is returned to the user when the program exits A value of 0is returned if the command is successful Otherwise a value oflis returned Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks The following rules apply when creating IM volumes and hot spare disks e All disks that are part of an IM volume or a hot spare for an IM volume must be on the same SAS controller e IM volumes are supported e Only two IM volumes plus a global hot spare per controller can be created e AnIM array must have exactly two disks e A hot spare disk cannot be created without at least one IM volume already created e The utility does not allow adding a hot spare disk of type different from disk types in any of the volume e With the AUTO command all drives used are the same type as the first available disk found and the size is limited to the size of the smallest disk CFGGEN Commands Using the CREATE Command The CREATE command creates IM volumes on the SAS controller Firmware and hardware limitations for
389. ption For example bcfg boot add1 EFI HPUX HPUX EFI HP UXi adds an HP UX 11i item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details 4 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them a Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu b To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the MP Main Menu Booting HP UX in Standard Mode Use either of the following procedures to boot HP UX e Booting HP UX From the EFI Boot Manager page 125 e Booting HP UX From the EFI Shell page 126 Booting HP UX From the EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager menu select an item from the boot options list to boot HP UX Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 125 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the system on which you want to boot HP UX a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to select the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen labeled EFI Boot Manager 2 At the EFI Boot Manager menu select an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments you use when booting the device 3 Press Enter to initiate booting using the selected boot option 4 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them a Press Control
390. quate backplane is out of range probably too low Disk Type 02h 02h 07h 03h The voltage onthe BMC A voltage on the I O assembly VOLTAGE DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE CRU is inadequate backplane is out of range probably too low Common I O Backplane 167 Table 5 24 1 O Card Events that May Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LEDs T O card Type E0h 4658d 26d A non hot plug I O SFW O S does not boot The IO_PCI POWER _OVERLOAD_ERR slot s power system displays the consumption increases following EFI error the total I O power message I O consumption beyond configuration the supported limit exceeded T O card Type E0h 137d 26d Insufficient power to SFW The following EFI IO NOT ENOUGH POWER ERROR power ona warning message hot pluggable PCI X displays Failed I O slot slot s deconfigured T O card Type E0h 147d 26d PCI slot standby power SFW Either a card or a slot IO SLOT STANDBY POWER_ERROR failed problem Reseat the card T O card Type E0h 131d 26d PCI X hot pluggable SFW Either a card or a slot IO HOT PLUG CTRL FAILED controller failed problem Reseat card first T O card Type E0h 139d 26d PCI bus walk I O SFW Remove any IO PCI MAPPING TOO BIG discovery resources unsupported I O cards have been exceeded Move an I O card to an unused PCI slot T O card Type E0h 148d 26d Found an
391. r Ctrl 48 DW 28E Ctr1 83 FAT File System FAT32 118 MB Ctrl 16 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Ctrl 49 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Ctrl 0B Acpi HWP0002 100 Ctr1 17 LSI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller Ctr1 18 LSI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller Ctrl 19 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Ctrl1 4B Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet BCM5701 Ctrl 0C Acpi HWP0002 200 Ctrl 0D Acpi HWP0002 400 Ctrl 0E Acpi HWP0002 700 Ctrl 1A Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 0 Ctrl 1B Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Ctrl 36 16550 Serial UART Driver Ctrl 37 VT 100 Serial Console Ctr1 31 Primary Console Input Device Ctr1 32 Primary Console Output Device Specifying SCSI Parameters 339 ES 340 Utilities Ctr1 30 Primary Standard Error Device Ctr1 1C Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 2 0 Ctr1 32 Primary Console Output Device Ctr1 30 Primary Standard Error Device Ctr1 33 Acpi PNPO501 0 Ctr1 34 16550 Serial UART Driver Ctr1 35 VT 100 Serial Console Ctr1 31 Primary Console Input Device Ctr1 32 Primary Console Output Device Ctr1 30 Primary Standard Error Device Ctrl 44 VenHw 904EFCFO0 F0A8 11D4 B4CA 303031303833 Ctr1 46 VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 FOD2992B5AA9 This information describes the SCSI interface because the path on the first line Acpi HWP0002 100 is the path from the information displayed by the info iocommand The next two lines describe the SCSI interface two
392. r Error Enabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either currently controlling the adapter or will attempt to control the adapter upon reload Disabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either not controlling the adapter or will discontinue control of the adapter upon reload Error Indicates that the EFI Driver encountered a problem with the adapter Viewing and modifying settings for the adapter is allowed but the information and functionality available may be limited Boot Support Specifies whether an adapter is eligible for configuration utility software control or is reserved for control by other software Enabled BIOS amp OS Enabled BIOS Only Enabled OS Only or Disabled e Enabled BIOS amp OS SAS controller is controlled by both the BIOS and OS driver e Enabled BIOS Only SAS controller is controlled only by the BIOS This setting may not be supported by all OS drivers For example it is not possible to disable an adapter in a Windows driver e Enabled OS Only SAS controller is controlled only by the OS driver e Disabled SAS controller is not controlled by the BIOS when the SAS controller is loaded However the adapter is still visible through the configuration protocol Changes to the Boot Support setting are reflected in the Status field of the Adapter List menu The new setting will do not take effect until the BIOS is reloaded system reboot RAID Properties Screens There are four screens within RAID properties T
393. r and in the OA and OB slots on both 0 and 1 sides of the 8 slot memory expander The first quad of DIMMs are always loaded into rank 0 s slots for side 0 then in the rank 0 s slots for side 1 The next quad of DIMMs are loaded into rank 1 s slots for side 0 then for side 1 and so on until all ranks slots for both sides are full Best memory subsystem performance result when both memory sides 0 and 1 have the same number of DIMM quads in them Memory Subsystem Behaviors The zx2 chip in rx3600 servers provides increased reliability of memory DIMMs and memory carriers The zx2 chip doubles memory carrier error correction from 4 bytes to 8 bytes of a 128 byte cache line during cache line misses initiated by processor cache controllers and by Direct Memory Access DMA operations initiated by I O devices This feature is called double DRAM sparing 2 out of 72 DRAMs in any DIMM quad can fail without any loss of server performance You must replace DIMMs or memory carriers when a threshold is reached for multiple double byte errors from one or more DIMMs on the same board When any uncorrectable memory error more than 2 bytes or when no quad of like memory DIMMs is loaded in rank 0 of side 0 you must replace the DIMMs All other DIMM errors are corrected by zx2 and reported to the Page Deallocation Table PDT and the diagnostic LED panel Memory Error Messages e Diagnostic LEDs light only when an error is isolated to a specific DI
394. r Board 1 Remove or open the access panel 2 Select the appropriate PCI Express slot 3 or 4 3 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed 4 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Save it to use for if you later decide to remove the adapter and leave the slot empty 5 Insert the adapter into the slot and press it firmly into place The contacts on the adapter edge should be fully seated in the system board connector Installing Core I O Cards 271 6 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead 7 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card Procedure B 12 Connecting the Controller to Other Devices e Connect the Adapter to the SAS backplane See Table B 3 page 268 for a listing of Cable kit part numbers Completing the Adapter Installation on HP UX Procedure B 13 Downloading Software for the Smart Array Series Controllers The drivers utilities and manpages for the Smart Array series controllers are located at the HP Software Depot 1 Gotohttp www software hp com 2 Search for Smart Array 3 Click Receive for Free 4 Select the HP UX version that your system runs then complete the required
395. r because it attaches directly to the processor board Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 Remove the processor board assembly See Removing the Processor Board Assembly page 217 Open the processor cage Figure 6 20 page 220 a Grasp the processor cage handle and apply adequate force to rotate the handle upward b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure approximately 90 degrees toward the front of the assembly until it stops IMPORTANT Ensure that the processor slot is entirely exposed The processor must clear the cage closure for proper installation Locate the appropriate processor slot Module 0 or Module 1 for the processor installation Figure 6 20 page 220 Remove the plastic airflow blocker covering the processor slot if required Remove the protective dust cover from the processor socket if required Ensure the cam on the processor socket lock is in the unlocked position Figure 6 23 CAUTION The zero insertion force ZIF socket for the processor is locked and unlocked by half of a full turn of the processor install tool The counterclockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket Remove any protective packaging from the new processor NOTE Protective covers are insta
396. r locally or remotely using the iLO 2 MP v p command 3 Compare the state of the server LEDs off flashing or steady Red Green or Amber with the LED states listed in Table 5 2 4 Go to the step number of Table 5 3 specified in the rightmost column of Table 5 2 located in the row which corresponds to your front panel LED display state 5 Read the symptom and condition information in the leftmost column of Table 5 3 Perform the action s specified in the Action column 7 If more details are required see the appropriate subsection of this chapter where this information is provided in the Action column The action you are directed to perform may be to access and read one or more error logs such as Event Log and or Forward Progress Log gt While we do suggest that all users follow the recommended troubleshooting methodology and use the Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables in the next subsection as a more experienced troubleshooter you may elect to go directly to the subsection of this chapter or section of this manual which corresponds to your own entry point of choice Table 5 1 provides the corresponding subsection or location title for these different entry points for example if you 140 Troubleshooting would prefer to start by examining the logs you can go directly to the subsection entitled Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 Table 5 1 lists the troubleshooting entry points Table 5 1 Troubl
397. r one DVD RW drive This device has one activity LED Diagnostic Panel The diagnostics panel provides a single location to view the LEDs that provide location information for internal system components that have a detectable failure The LEDs illuminate solid amber only when a failure occurs and otherwise do not illuminate The LEDs are visible through the diagnostic panel on the outside of the top cover The diagnostics panel is oriented similar to the layout of the components in the system Diagnostic LEDs are provided for each internal serviceable component in the system including all DIMMs Figure 1 12 shows the diagnostic panel label and LEDs Controls Ports and LEDs 39 Figure 1 12 Diagnostic Panel Label and LEDs I O Card omi Processor 0Q 0 ProcessorCarrier O Memory Carrier O O I O Assembly O Disk Backplane O O OPower Interconnect O Display O O Rear Panel The server rear panel includes communication ports I O ports ac power connectors and the locator LED button LEDs located on the rear panel of the server signal the operational status of the following components e iLO2MP e System LAN e Power supply e PCI PCI X PCle slots Figure 1 13 shows the rear panel control port and LED locations 40 Overview Figure 1 13 Rear Panel Control Port and LED Locations AC Input Power Supply PCI PCI X Console RS232 Aux RS232 Receptacle LED Slot LEDs Serial Port Serial Port
398. r one channel of this SCSI interface At the EFI Shell prompt enter Shell gt drvcfg s drvr handle cntrl handle where drvr_handle The handle of the driver that controls the channel with the SCSI ID you want to display or change entrl_handle The handle of the controller for the channel with the SCSI ID you want to display or change For channel A of this SCSI interface enter Shell gt drvcfg s 45 18 The EFI SCSI Setup Utility starts and its main menu displays showing a list of all the EFI capable SCSI interfaces in the system Move the cursor to highlight the channel of the SCSI interface Press Enter to determine which channel of the interface to highlight match the PCI Bus PCI Dev and PCI Func values on this screen to the Bus Dev and Fnc values from the info iocommand CAUTION Do not select the lt Global Properties gt option on the main menu TIP To move the cursor in the EFI SCSI Setup Utility use the following keys Arrow keys T lt Alternate keys H left J down K up L right home O end The Adapter Properties screen for this channel of the SCSI interface displays Be sure the utility is running for the channel of the SCSI interface by comparing the values shown for Specifying SCSI Parameters 341 10 11 12 13 14 15 342 Utilities PCI Bus PCI Device and PCI FunctiontotheBus Dev andFnc values from the info io command CAUTION Do not change
399. r the channel of the SCSI interface You can still change the channel s parameters If you select save or discard you go to the EFI SCSI Setup Utility main menu CAUTION Do not select the lt Global Properties gt option on the main menu Press Esc to exit the main menu and the EFI SCSI Setup Utility Select the option for exiting the utility When prompted press Enter to stop the SCSI interface you are at the EFI Shell prompt At the EFI Shell prompt enter the following command Shell gt reset The system starts to reboot This is required to enable the new SCSI setting Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu A Paths This menu enables you to select console output and input devices as well as various boot options It contains the following options e Boot From a File page 343 e Add a Boot Option page 344 e Delete Boot Option s page 345 e Change Boot Order page 345 e Manage BootNext Setting page 345 e Set Auto Boot TimeOut page 346 e Select Active Console Output Devices page 346 e Select Active Console Input Devices page 347 e Select Active Standard Error Devices page 348 e Security Password Menu page 348 e Resetting Passwords page 348 These options are described in the following sections The following selections are available on all menus e Help Displays the help available for the command e Exit Returns to th
400. ration limitations as slots 9 and 10 on the PCI PCI X I O backplane See Shared Slots page 197 for mo re information PCI PCI X PCle Card Path Logging Some PCI PCI X PCle failures result in I O path logging These paths help to indicate the source of the error and can be included in the error message or log for ged into console or event logs Table 6 2 page 197 describes the PCI PCI X PCle I O paths the server 196 Removing and Replacing Server Components Table 6 2 PCI PCI X PCle I O Paths Slot Function Location as HP UX Device EFI Device Path Associated with viewed from Path Path rear of chassis 1 SAS core I O Left most slot 0 4 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 11 card nearest to power supply 2 Dual port 2nd from left 0 4 2 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 21 Gigabit LAN core I O LAN 3 T O PCIe x8 3rd from left 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Acpi HIPQ0002 PNPOA08 600 Pci 010 Pci 010 Pei 1 10 Pci O switched with slot 4 Optional SAS core I O card 4 T O PCIe x8 4th from left 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Acpi HIPQ0002 PNPOA08 600 Pci 010 Pci 010 Pci 010 Pci O switched with slot 3 Optional SAS core I O card 5 T O PCIe x8 5th from left 0 7 0 0 0 Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 700 Pci 010 Pci 01 6 T O PCIe x8 6th from left 0 3 0 0 0 Acpi HPQ0002 PNP0A08 300 Pci 010 Pci 01 7 T O 133 MHz 7th from left 0 2 1 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 11
401. rd page 252 A CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS backplane board If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 4 Reconnect the SAS cables into the connectors on the SAS backplane board Figure 6 34 5 Replace the SAS disk drives See Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive page 190 6 Replace the air baffle Figure 6 33 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board 249 7 Replace the clear plastic cover Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 9 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 10 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 po Removing and Replacing the Interconnect Board The interconnect board attaches the midplane board to the display board and the SAS backplane board A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in
402. rd Assembly page 218 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 205 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Verify processor replacement and operation by using either the iLO 2 MP commands or the EFI commands Removing and Replacing the O Board Assembly The I O board assembly contains the following server components System battery T O voltage regulator module Core I O board LAN core I O card SAS core I O card PCI PCI X cards Trusted Platform Module TPM A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the
403. rd log information if applicable e Miscellaneous information associated with the device e The firmware revision code if firmware is present in the device Verifiers Verifiers quickly determine whether or not a specific device is working by performing tasks similar to those that the applications perform using the device No license is required to run the verifiers Exercisers Exercisers stress devices to facilitate the reproduction of intermittent problems Diagnostics Diagnostics are tools designed to identify faulty or failed FRUs Expert Tools Expert tools are device specific troubleshooting utilities for use by expert administrators only Their functionality varies from tool to tool but they are intended to be interactive and rely on the administrator to provide Troubleshooting Tools 151 information necessary to perform a particular task You must have the appropriate license to run expert tools Online Support Tool Availability Online diagnostics are included in the HP UX OE media and are installed by default Online Support Tools List The following online support tools are available on HP UX 11i v2 systems In some cases tools such as disk exercisers is generic to many types of hardware In other cases tools such as tape diagnostics are specific to a particular device or type of tape drive Table 5 12 lists the online support tools Table 5 12 Online Support Tools List Functional Area I
404. re hardware and networking Server Support Information http www hp com support Refer to this Web site for online access to technical support information self solve tools online assistance community forums of IT experts broad multi vendor knowledge base monitoring and diagnostic tools Support can be obtained from the US and Canada at 1 800 593 6631 Alerts and Notification http www hp com go e updates Use this site to subscribe to HP s driver and support alerts notifications program HP Encourages Your Comments HP encourages your comments concerning this document We are truly committed to providing documentation that meets your needs Send comments to netinfo feedback cup hp com Include document title manufacturing part number and any comments errors found or suggestions for improvement you have concerning this document Also include what we did right so we can incorporate it into other documents HP Encourages Your Comments 23 24 1 Overview The HP Integrity rx3600 server is a high performance high availability server that provides the following features e Form factor 4U rack or pedestal installed e Internal peripherals serial attached SCSI SAS hard drives and a DVD or DVD RW drive e High availability components N 1 hot swappable fans 1 1 hot swappable power supplies and hot pluggable PCI X or PCIe cards and SAS drives e Processors one or two dual core Intel Itanium processors
405. re degraded or corrupted respectively 2 Replace the RAID HBA The problem is fixed when all of these LEDs remain off after the next power on Cannot see the OS prompt on the system console Front panel LEDs indicate that the server s power is turned on and that the server is either booting or running the OS Nothing may be logged for this condition system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green power is steady green 1 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for information NOTE Be sure to check the console settings from the Boot Manager for your OS The problem is fixed when the OS prompt appears on the system console Methodology 145 Table 5 4 Advanced Entry Class Troubleshooting Step 6 Symptom Condition Cannot read the system event log from the system console Action System event logging has stopped due to a presumed BMC malfunction system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Examine the console messages for any EFI errors or warnings about BMC operation or communications 2 Examine the BMC heartbeat LED if it is not flashing green replace the core I O board FRU See Management Subsystem page 1
406. re the processor board assembly is fully seated before you replace the memory carrier assembly The processor board assembly access door must be flush with the front bezel To replace the memory carrier assembly follow these steps 1 Ensure that the extraction handles are positioned in the outward unlocked position 2 Align the memory carrier assembly with the front and rear chassis guide slots Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 205 ES NOTE Assembly side 0 is on the left and assembly side 1 is on the right as viewed from the front of the chassis Slide the memory carrier assembly into the chassis until it begins to seat into the socket located on the processor board CAUTION Do not apply excessive force when closing the extraction handles and seating the memory carrier assembly into the socket on the processor board Manipulate the extraction handles with care failure to observe these cautions can result in damage to the extraction handles and other server components Rotate the extraction handles inward and press the handles straight down until they snap into the locked position Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect the power cables and power on the serv
407. rees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead 7 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card Connecting the Controller to Other Devices Procedure B 20 Connecting to Internal Storage e Connect the Adapter to the SAS backplane See Table B 3 page 268 for a listing of Cable kit part numbers Procedure B 21 Connecting to External Storage 1 Connect an external SAS cable to the external port of the controller a Pull back the tab on the mini SAS 4x connector on the cable b Insert the cable connector into the external port of the controller c Release the tab 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the SAS input connector of the external storage enclosure e Ifthe enclosure uses a standard SAS 4x connector insert the cable connector into the enclosure connector and then tighten the lock screws on the cable connector e If the enclosure uses a mini SAS 4x connector pull back the tab on the cable connector insert the cable connector into the enclosure connector and then release the tab Table B 4 SAS cable part numbers Approximate cable length Type of cable Option kit part number 1m 3 ft Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419570 B21 2 m 6 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini SAS 4x 407339 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419571 B21 4m 13 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini SAS 4x 432238 B21 Mini SAS 4x to standard SAS 4x 419572 B21 6 m 20 ft Mini SAS 4x to mini
408. rees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Save it to use for if you later decide to remove the adapter and leave the slot empty Insert the adapter into the slot and press it firmly into place The contacts on the adapter edge should be fully seated in the system board connector Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 degrees b Push the edge of the MRL down until it clicks into place on the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card Connecting the Controller to Other Devices Procedure B 26 Connecting to Internal Storage Connect the Adapter to the SAS backplane See Table B 3 page 268 for a listing of Cable kit part numbers Procedure B 27 Connecting to External Storage 1 Connect an external SAS cable to the external port of the controller a Pull back the tab on the mini SAS 4x connector on the cable b Insert the cable connector into the external port of the controller c Release the tab Connect the other end of the cable to the SAS input connector of the external storage enclosure e Ifthe enclosure uses a standard SAS 4x connector insert the cable connector into the enclosure connector and then tighten the lock screws on the cable connector e If the enclosure uses a mini SAS 4x connector pull back the tab on the cable connector insert the cable connector i
409. remove the operating system CD and then insert the Smart Setup media Install the Integrity Support Pack Procedure B 18 Preparing the server 1 Ze 3 A g Back up all data Close all applications Power down the server CAUTION In systems that use external data storage be sure that the server is the first unit to be powered down and the last to be powered back up Taking this precaution ensures that the system does not erroneously mark the drives as failed when the server is powered up Power down all peripheral devices that are attached to the server Unplug the ac power cord from the outlet and then from the server Disconnect all peripheral devices from the server Installing Core I O Cards 275 Procedure B 19 Installing the controller board 1 Remove or open the access panel 2 Select the appropriate PCI Express slot 3 or 4 3 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead filler is fully exposed 4 Remove the PCI PCI X PCle bulkhead filler Save it to use for if you later decide to remove the adapter and leave the slot empty 5 Insert the adapter into the slot and press it firmly into place The contacts on the adapter edge should be fully seated in the system board connector 6 Close the MRL a Rotate the MRL downward 90 deg
410. ress Enter to view the Select New Array Type screen HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 287 To access the following screens use the arrow keys to select the screen and press Enter on the appropriate field e RAID Properties e SAS Topology e Advanced Adapter Properties The following are the descriptions for the Adapter Properties screen Adapter Indicates the specific SAS Controller type PCI Address Displays the PCI Address assigned by the system BIOS to the adapter e Bus value range 0x00 OxFF 0 255 decimal e Device value range 0x00 Ox1F 0 31 decimal e Function range 0x00 0x7 0 7 decimal FW Revision Displays the MPT firmware version and type in the format x xx xx xx yy where X XX XX XX refers to the FW version and yy refers to the type The currently supported type is IR 1 SAS Address Displays the SAS Address assigned to this adapter FW Revision Displays the Fusion MPT firmware version and type IR or IT Status Indicates whether an adapter is eligible for configuration utility software control or is reserved for control by other software Enabled Disabled or Error Enabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either currently controlling the adapter or will attempt to control the adapter upon reload Disabled Indicates the EFI Driver is either not controlling the adapter or will discontinue control of the adapter upon reload Error Indicates that the EFI Driver encountered a problem with the adapter Viewi
411. ror menus for proper operation NOTE Some operating systems support multiple input devices such as a simultaneous serial and keyboard input See your OS documentation to determine how many consoles are supported with your system For example Select the Console Input Device s Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg PcAnsi Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi PNP0501 0 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg VtUt 8 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg PcAnsi Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 347 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg Vt100 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 Uart 9600 N81 VenMsg VtUt 8 Indicates a currently selected device e Each option is identified with an EFI Device path Not all options will be available depending on the configuration of the system and the options available Device paths can differ slightly on different product models e On both serial device examples UART 9600 indicates the current baud rate of the serial device VenMsg Vt 100 is the current emulation type Several different terminal emulation protocols are supported e Only one terminal emulation type PcAnsi Vt100 and so on can be selected for each serial console but multiple serial consoles can be selected at once Table D 6 Console Input Devices Serial A Serial 1
412. rovide all the power required by the system 2 Maximum theoretical configuration 2x 1 8G 24M CPUs 24x 4GB DDRII DIMM memory 8x SAS Hard Drives 8x PCI PCI X PCle added to public I O cards 3 Minimum possible configuration 1x Itanium 1 8G 24M CPU 4x 4GB DDRII DIMM memory 0x SAS Hard Drives Ox PCI PCI X PCleadded to public I O cards 4 Half loaded configuration 1x Itanium 1 8G 24M CPU 12x 4GB DDRII DIMM memory 4x SAS Hard Drives 4x PCI PCI X PCle added to public I O cards If an overload triggers the power supply overload protection the system is immediately powered off To reset the power supply unit 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Determine what caused the overload by contacting an HP support representative 3 Reconnect the power cord then reboot the system If an overload occurs twice there is an undetected short circuit somewhere When you use the front panel s power button to turn off the server power consumption falls below the low power consumption but doesn t reach zero To reach zero power consumption in off mode either unplug the server or use a power block with a switch Power Consumption and Cooling Table 2 4 lists additional component power consumption Table 2 4 Additional Component Power Consumption Power Consumption Additional Component 100 127 V ac 200 240 V ac Each additional CPU 125 W 427 BTU hr 122 W 417 BTU hr Each Additional 4x DIMM 32 W 109 BTU
413. rray P400 P600 and P800 Controllers 309 saupdate Error Messages The following is a list of error messages under various situations e When keyword LIST or UPDATE is misspelled or extra parameters are specified Error Syntax Error Usage saupdate LISTorsaupdate UPDATE all e When the controller ID in the saupdate UPDATE command is not correct No matching controller found e When a firmware file does not exist in the saupdate UPDATE command the example shows CYBORG101 BIN does not exist File CYBORG101 BIN Not Found e When an invalid firmware or corrupted file is specified inthe saupdate UPDATE command the example shows CYBORG101 BIN does not exist File CYBORG101 BIN invalid or corrupted EBSU Utility The EFI based Setup Utility EBSU provides an easy to use interface for flashing firmware partitioning the hard disk installing diagnostic tools configuring storage controllers and running other EFI utilities AA NOTE You can use EBSU to update firmware for many different devices in the system Smart Array P600 is shown as an example To update the Smart Array firmware 1 Power on the server The server boots to EFI The EFI Boot Manager may be used from the enhanced interface grey background or the legacy interface black background 2 Load the HP Smart Setup media into the server DVD drive 3 From the EFI Boot Menu select Internal Bootable DVD and press Enter EBSU starts and displays the W
414. rrier assemblies have two sides 0 and 1 each of which contain a memory board System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards Table 6 4 lists the supported memory carrier assembly configurations Table 6 4 Supported Memory Carrier Assembly Configurations Memory Carrier Configuration Memory Boards Installed 8 DIMM memory carrier Two 4 DIMM memory boards 24 DIMM memory carrier Two 12 DIMM memory boards Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly 203 A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing and replacing the memory carrier Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly To remove the memory carrier assembly follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the
415. rs The PE conductor must be green with yellow stripes The earthing conductor is to be connected from the unit to the building installation earth or if supplied by a separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set grounding point Electrical Specifications This section provides electrical specifications for the HP server System Power Specifications 48 Available power output is the maximum dc power that the power supply can supply to the system Maximum input power is what the power supply requires from the AC line to deliver that maximum DC output given worst case efficiency and max loading Maximum input current is the worst case highest current given the lowest input voltage and the maximum input power Table 2 3 System Power Specifications Parameter Rating ac Voltage 100 127 V ac 200 240 V ac Maximum dc Output Power 1200 W 1200 W Maximum System Input Current 14 A 7A Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz System Specifications Table 2 3 System Power Specifications continued Parameter Rating Maximum per PCI PCI X PCle Socket 25 W per socket 25 W per socket Maximum Configuration 1095 W 3736 BTU hr 1056 W 3603 BTU hr Minimum Configuration 432 W 1474 BTU hr 422 W 1439 BTU hr Typical Configuration 685 W 2337 BTU hr 669 W 2283 BTU hr 1 The infrastructure should be sized such that any single power supply can safely p
416. rs during installation For additional information refer to the following documents e HP Smart Array P400 Controller Support Guide e HP Smart Array P600 Controller for Integrity Servers User Guide e HP Smart Array P800 Controller for Integrity Servers User Guide Quick Installation Procedure To install the controller follow these steps 1 Power off the server 2 Install additional physical drives if necessary see Connecting External Storage page 109 The number of drives in the server determines the RAID level that is auto configured when the server is powered on 3 Power on the server 4 Update the controller firmware see SAUPDATE Utility page 110 When the firmware update process is complete the server reboots and runs through a POST procedure This POST procedure halts briefly during controller initialization and prompts you to open ORCA Option ROM Configuration for Arrays 5 Open ORCA See Configuring the Array page 115 e ITfusing a headless console press Esc 8 e Otherwise press F8 6 Configure the logical boot drive and exit from ORCA Depending on the OS additional device drivers and management agents must be installed See the User Guide for the specific HP Smart Array Controller at 306 Core I O Card Utilities http h20000 www2 hp com bizsupport TechSupport Home jsp under the specific HP Smart Array Controller product for installation procedures The latest firmware dr
417. rst disks it finds that are usable in the IM volume Firmware and hardware limitations for the family of controllers limit the number of configurations that are possible Syntax cfggen lt controller gt auto lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the RAID volume in Mbytes or MAX for the maximum size available qsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation When AUTO creates an IM volume the first disk found is assigned as the primary disk drive If the controller is allowed to resync the disk drives the data on the primary disk drive is available by accessing the newly created volume ReplyYesif you want to complete the creation HOTSPARE The HOTSPARE command creates a hot spare disk drive The hot spare drive is added to hot spare pool 0 Syntax cfggen lt controller gt HOTSPARE DELETE lt Encl Bay gt Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 DELETE Specifies that the hot spare is to be deleted Omit the DELETE keyword to specify hot spare creation lt Encl gt lt Bay gt Enclosure number and Bay number that identifying the disk drive that will become the hot spare Operation The number of disk drives in an IM array plus the hot spare disk cannot exceed three You can create only one
418. rvicing the HP Integrity rx3600 The appendixes contain supplemental information Chapter 1 page 25 Use this chapter to develop a high level understanding of the major erver subsystems Chapter 2 page 47 Use this chapter to learn about the system specifications Chapter 3 page 53 Use this chapter to learn how to install the system Chapter 4 page 123 Use this chapter to learn about booting and shutting down the operating system Chapter 5 page 139 Use this chapter to help troubleshoot and diagnose server problems Chapter 6 page 177 Use this chapter to learn how to remove and replace server components Appendix A page 257 Use this appendix for parts information Appendix C page 283 Use this appendix for instructions on how to configure core I O cards Appendix D page 317 Use this appendix to learn about utilities such as EFI and the iLO 2 MP Intended Audience 21 Typographic Conventions This document uses the following conventions audit 5 An HP UX manpage In this example audit is the name and 5 is the section in the HP UX Reference On the Web and on the Instant Information CD it may be a hot link to the manpage itself From the HP UX command line you can enter man audit or man 5 audit to view the manpage See man 1 Book Title The title of a book On the Web and on the Instant Information CD it may be a hot link to the book itself KeyCap The name of a keyboard key Note that Return and En
419. s See Powering Off the Server page 95 2 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 3 Remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 ES NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the processor board 4 Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 204 5 Remove the processor board assembly See Removing the Processor Board Assembly page 217 Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor 219 Figure 6 20 Processor Board Assembly Module 1 Module 0 Processor Cage Closure Rotation Processor cage Handle Processor Cage Front of Assembly 6 Open the processor cage Figure 6 20 a Grasp the processor cage handle and apply adequate force to rotate the handle upward b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure approximately 90 degrees toward the front of the assembly until it stops we IMPORTANT Ensure the processors are entirely exposed and can clear the cage closure for removal 7 Disconnect the processor power cable from the connector cable that attaches directly to the processor board Figure 6 21 8 Unlock the processor from the socket on
420. s in the chassis Server logic and system firmware stages are tracked by the PDH FPGA using these three LEDs See Troubleshooting Tools page 147 for information 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for information The problem is fixed when the EFI menu appears on the system console and system firmware booting completes Ac Cannot find a boot disk or removable media drive Nothing may be logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Examine the boot device to determine if it is plugged into its drive bay properly 2 Examine the drive cabling for any problems Examine the boot path settings 4 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 154 for information p The problem is fixed when all boot devices are found 4d RAID channel redundancy failures Nothing is logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Examine the LED next to each RAID connector If this LED is either steady amber or steady red it indicates the RAID drives a
421. s test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test LAN Address Information LAN Address Path XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Acpi HWP0002 0 Acpi HWP0002 0 Acpi HWP0002 0 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pei 1 Pei 1 Pei 1 Pci 2 Pei 3 0 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Mac 00306E4C0FF2 FIRMWARE INFORMATION Firmware Revision PAL A Revision 7 3 PAL B Revision 5 3 SAL Spec Revision SAL A Revision 2 0 SAL B Revision 1 1 EFI Spec Revision EFI Intel Drop Revi EFI Build Revision POSSE Revision 0 1 ACPI Revision 7 00 BMC Revision 2 24 IPMI Revision 1 00 SMBIOS Revision 2 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Mac 00306E4C0FF2 1 10 4341 1 5 37 7 0 0 1 10 sion 14 61 1 10 0 3 2a Management Processor Revision E 02 25 WARNING AND STOP BOOT INFORMATION CHIP REVISION INFORMATION Chip Type Memory Controller Root Bridge Host Bridge Host Bridge Host Bridge Host Bridge Other Bridge Other Bridge Baseboard MC Logical Device Chip ID ID Revision 0 122b 0023 0 1229 0023 0000 122e 0032 0001 122e 0032 0002 122e 0032 0004 122e 0032 0 0 0002 0 0 0007 0 0 0224 EFI POSSE Commands 331 Example D 16 info cpu command Shell gt info cpu PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION H of L3 L4 CPU Logical C
422. se For cooling purposes always place disk drive fillers in slots that do not contain a disk drive 3 Insert the hot pluggable disk drive into the slot guides and slide the drive into the slot until it seats into the socket on the disk backplane 4 Close the extraction handle by pushing it inward until it clicks into place 5 Observe the following disk drive LEDs to ensure the drive is functional For more information see Hot Pluggable Disk Drive LEDs page 38 e Drive status LED e Drive activity LED Removing and Replacing PCI PCI X PCle Card Dividers PCI PCI X PCle card dividers are located on the I O board assembly between the PCI PCI X PCle cards Eight dividers provide short circuit protection to the hot pluggable PCI PCI X PCle cards 190 Removing and Replacing Server Components by preventing inadvertent contact between cards during the replacement addition or removal of a card A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions c
423. server determines the RAID level that is autoconfigured when the server is powered up next step Power up the server 7 Update the controller firmware APS NA D When the firmware update process is complete the server reboots and runs through a POST procedure This POST procedure halts briefly during controller initialization and prompts you to open ORCA 8 Open ORCA e Tfusing a headless console press the Esc 8 key combination e Otherwise press the F8 key 9 Configure the logical boot drive and then exit from ORCA Procedure B 24 Preparing the server 1 Back up all data 2 Close all applications Installing Core I O Cards 277 4 5 6 Power down the server CAUTION In systems that use external data storage be sure that the server is the first unit to be powered down and the last to be powered back up Taking this precaution ensures that the system does not erroneously mark the drives as failed when the server is powered up Power down all peripheral devices that are attached to the server Unplug the ac power cord from the outlet and then from the server Disconnect all peripheral devices from the server Procedure B 25 Installing the controller board 1 2 3 7 Remove or open the access panel Select the appropriate PCI Express slot 3 or 4 Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 deg
424. sh down on the release lever to disengage the SAS backplane board from the chassis Figure 6 34 CAUTION Do not use the release lever as a handle to remove the SAS backplane board Failure to observe this caution can result in damage to the release lever and the SAS backplane board Use the sheet metal bracket that surrounds the SAS backplane board as a handle and slide the board to the left to unplug it from the socket on the interconnect board Figure 6 34 Pull the board straight back toward the rear of the chassis and lift the board out of the chassis Figure 6 34 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board 247 Figure 6 33 Air Baffle Removal and Replacement Front of Chassis 248 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 34 SAS Backplane Board Removal and Replacement Release Tab Sheet Metal Bracket SAS Cable Connectors Connector Plugs Into Interconnect Board Replacing the SAS Backplane Board To replace the SAS backplane board follow these steps 1 Hold the SAS backplane board by the sheet metal bracket and guide it toward the front of the chassis until the four keyway slots on the board seat onto the locking studs Figure 6 34 2 Push the board to the right to plug it into the socket on the interconnect board The release lever locks into place when the board is fully seated Figure 6 34 3 Replace the interconnect board air baffle Figure 6 35 See Replacing the Interconnect Boa
425. sk drive c Replace the disk drive d Power on the server Determine whether the LED illuminates during the boot cycle If it does not contact HP LAN LEDs There are LAN LEDs on the rear bulkhead of the LAN HBA in PCI X slot 2 of the HP Integrity rx3600 server HBA Bulkhead LAN LEDs There are two 1 Gb LAN ports on the LAN HBA bulkhead These are LAN A and LAN B Table 5 29 lists the 1 Gb LAN A interface provides three LEDs on the LAN bulkhead Table 5 29 LAN A Connector LEDs LAN LED Location Color State Not used Top None None 1000Mb 2nd from top Blinking The 1000 Mb s ethernet protocol and twisted pair wiring is amber enabled Off No link 100Mb 2nd from bottom Blinking The 100 Mb s with ethernet protocol and twisted pair wiring green is enabled Off No link Activity Bottom Blinking The activity LED is enabled green Off No activity Table 5 30 lists the 1 Gb LAN B interface provides two LEDs on the LAN bulkhead Table 5 30 LAN B Connector LEDs 172 Troubleshooting LED Location Color Description Speed upper Upper left Yellow The 1000 MHz with ethernet protocol and twisted pair wiring left is enabled Green The 100 MHz with ethernet protocol and twisted pair wiring is enabled Off No link Link upper Upper right Green link is enabled right Off No link Booting A Table 5 31 displays the normal boot process as reflected in changes to fron
426. so available on the Smart Setup media 1 Find the most recent version of the component that you require 2 Follow the instructions for installing the component on the server These instructions are provided on the same Web page as the component 3 Follow the additional instructions that describe how to use the component to flash the ROM These instructions are provided with each component Installing the HP Smart Array P400 On HP Integrity rx3600 and rx6600 servers the HP Smart Array P400 is supported by HP UX OpenVMS Windows and Linux operating systems It should be installed in PCle slot 3 or 4 For more information including configuring and diagnosing array problems refer to the HP Smart Array P400 Controller Support Guide which can be found in the I O Cards and Networking Software collection under Smart Array at http www docs hp com The installation procedure involves the following steps e Preparing the server e Installing the controller board e Connecting the Controller to Other Devices e Completing the adapter installation procedure including updating the firmware and installing drivers Procedure B 10 Preparing the Server Close all applications Power down the server Power down all peripheral devices that are attached to the server Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and then from the server Disconnect all peripheral devices from the server A E E Procedure B 11 Installing the Controlle
427. socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot 8 Slide the server completely back into the rack 9 Open the cable management arm wide enough to slide the I O board out the rear of the rack 10 Disconnect all external cabling attached to ports at the rear of the chassis 11 Press in on the retention levers to unlock the I O board assembly extraction handles Figure 6 24 226 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 24 1 O Board Assembly Rear Chassis View Internal USB Cable Connector Retention Levers Extraction Levers In The Unlocked Position 12 Pull the I O board assembly extraction handles outward to unplug the I O board assembly from the socket on the midplane board Removing and Replacing the I O Board Assembly 227 13 Slide the I O board assembly all the way out the rear of the chassis Figure 6 25 ES NOTE The I O board assembly is large Use care when lifting it out of the server chassis Figure 6 25 1 O Board Assembly Removal and Replacement Rear Chassis View Extraction Levers In The Unlocked Position Replacing the O Board Assembly Wa IMPORTANT Ensure that the I O board extraction handles are in the outward unlocked position to engage the assembly correctly with the midplane board socket A NOTE The I O board assembly is large Use care when sliding it into the server chassis To replace the
428. sor board Close the processor cage Figure 3 13 a Grasp the processor cage handle and rotate the cage closure inward toward the rear of the assembly until itis completely closed b Push the handle down until it is flush with the cage Replace the processor board assembly See Replacing the Processor Board Assembly page 74 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 66 Installing the System 17 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 58 Figure 3 13 Processor Board Assembly Front View Module 1 Module O Processor Cage Closure Rotation Processor Cage Handle Processor Cage Front of Assembly Figure 3 14 shows the power connectors the processor lock unlock mechanism location and the alignment holes One processor is installed in the illustration Figure 3 14 Processor Alignment Holes and Lock Unlock Mechanism Alignment Holes Lock Unlock Mechanism Installing Additional Components 77 Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal Mount This section provides instructions on how to install the server into a rack or a pedestal mount This section addresses the following topics e Installing the Server into a Rack page 78 e Installing the Server into a Pedestal Mount page 78 Installing the Server into a Rack The fol
429. sparity Errors Number of dwords with running disparity errors that have been received outside of PHY reset sequences since the last PHY Link Error Reset e PHY Reset Errors Number of times the PHY reset sequence has failed since the last PHY Link Error Reset Link Error Count Actual link error count values since the last PHY Link Error Reset Threshold Count Link error count threshold values Threshold Time Time in seconds over which to apply Threshold Count The count stops when it reaches the maximum value gt When a Link Error Count exceeds a Threshold Count within the Threshold Time the link rate may be reduced by the MPT firmware Exit the SAS Configuration Utility Screen As some changes only take effect when you exit the utility it is important to always exit the utility properly To exit the utility follow these steps 1 To return to the Adapter List from Adapter Properties press ESC 2 To exit the utility from the Adapter List press ESC A NOTE A similar exit screen is used when exiting most other screens and can be used to save settings The exit screen shows some options that are grey indicating that they are not available You can only select the available options The exit choices are as follows e Are you sure you want to exit e Cancel Exit e Save changes and reboot e Discard changes and reboot e Exit the Configuration Utility and Reboot CFGGEN Utility The CFGGEN utility is a
430. ssis wall b Lift the cover off the I O VRM Push the extraction levers found on either side of the I O VRM slot outward to the open position to release the I O VRM from the socket Grasp the I O VRM by the edges and lift it out of the chassis Figure 6 27 232 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 6 27 Removing and Replacing the 1 O VRM 1 O VRM Cover Knurled Thumbscrew I O VRM Rear Of Chassis Replacing the I O VRM To replace the I O VRM follow these steps 1 Insert the I O VRM into the socket on the I O board ES NOTE The I O VRM is keyed to fit into the socket in only one direction a Firmly and evenly push on each end of the I O VRM until it seats into the slot b Ensure that the extraction levers on the socket are in the closed position ES NOTE You may need to manually close the extraction levers on the socket 2 Place the I O VRM cover on top of the I O VRM and turn the knurled thumb screw clockwise until the cover tightens into place on the chassis wall Figure 6 27 3 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 4 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 5 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module The Trusted Platform Module TPM is an optional security component
431. submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading c From the EFI Boot Manager menu select EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP OpenVMS For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the HP OpenVMS loader is efi vms vms_loader efi It is on the device you are accessing 3 At the EFI Shell environment use the befg command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list bcfg boot dump Displays all items in the boot options list for the system bcfg boot rm Removes the item number specified by from the boot options list Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 129 ES bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot list bcfg boot add file efi Description Add a new boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 efi vms vms_loader efi HP OpenVMS adds an HP OpenVMS item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details NOTE
432. t System EMS The Event Management System and WBEM provide frameworks for monitoring and reporting events SysFaultMgmt WBEM indication providers and the EMS Hardware Monitors enable you to monitor the operation of a wide variety of hardware products and alert you immediately if any failure or other unusual event occurs By using hardware event monitoring you can virtually eliminate undetected hardware failures that could interrupt system operation or cause data loss For complete information on installing and using EMS hardware event monitors as well as a list of supported hardware see the EMS Hardware Monitors Users Guide at http docs hp com hpux diag http docs hp com hpux dia Troubleshooting Tools 153 Hardware monitors are available on the HP UX OE to monitor the following components e Chassis fans and environment e CPU monitor e UPS monitor e FC hub monitor e FC switch monitor e Memory monitor e Core electronics components e Disk drives e High availability disk array ES NOTE NoSysFaultMgmt WBEM indication provider is currently available for the UPS monitor the FC Hub monitor or the FC switch monitor EMS HA Monitors High availability monitors are also available through EMS at an additional cost to monitor disk cluster network and system resources Errors and Reading Error Logs The information provided by error logs is useful for troubleshooting HP Integrity rx3600 server faults and failur
433. t Tools LAS A E 1 dE AAA Ab EA At 152 General Diagnostie TOOS ein dat e diia 153 Fault Management VEA dan abs 153 HP UX Fault Ma agement eiten nerna Ua stars stash E EA a bag dese E a gap eaa E Ee 153 Exors and Reading Erron Logs id da aaa 154 Event Log MORIN ONG anti idea 154 Using Event Loss ip pio 154 Accessing ILO MIE PELOS A ASNO 154 Supported Configurations dt a nine cea 155 System Block Di pranses AAA LA iene ENS 155 System Build Up Troubleshooting Procedure ia aii ae ae oi 158 CPU Memory and DA A A A ATA Ei E Ee E 158 Troubleshooting the x36000 CPU in toda riegerin eiriaa an et Rita 158 Itanium Processor Load Drive tb 159 Processor Module Behaviors s ctvesasess ai inca T Eaa EDE E cdta 159 Processor Problem Identification enraiar Aa e a eaea a iaai 159 Troubleshooting rx3600 Mera rin AS dia 160 Table of Contents 7 Memory DIM Mil Gad Ora ii AAA acc 161 Memory Subsystem Denda 161 Memi ry Error Wiessaces untar e eke data Ea weaken 161 Troubleshooting 000 BA Ai 164 System Power BPS and VO WRI siete td At A A a o 164 Power Subsystem Den vil rin cda 165 System Power LEDS WII A AAA A EA A aed teeta a anaes 165 Power supply Power LED a AR Aa EE AR Ad 166 VOVRMi ada 166 Cooling on bss tail 166 Cooling Subsystem BEN AVIOR xis casi cian irii an eSEE EEEE E EA id AAA 166 Common TO Backplane corts eE 167 TO SU DS Stem Beda A id 167 OIM AN A A A a a E E R REER 167 Management oa Ds ys a iii 170 Manageability LAN EED nta t
434. t ac power still applied to Internal Health LED the system When the internal health LED is lit the corresponding failed component LED illuminates on the diagnostic panel See Chapter 5 page 139 for more details on the internal health LEDs External Health LED Indicates the status of Off System is off external serviceable components When the Green System health is good external health LED is lit the corresponding failed Flashing amber System health is degraded component LED Flashing red System health is critical illuminates 1 There is an additional UID LED and button located on the rear panel of the server Both UID LEDs illuminate when you activate either the front or rear UID buttons Figure 1 9 shows the front control panel LEDs Controls Ports and LEDs 37 Figure 1 9 Front Control Panel LEDs UID Locator Button and LED System Power Button LED Health Internal External Init LED Health Health LED LED Button Storage and Media Devices The server can contain up to eight hot pluggable SAS disk drives and one DVD or DVD RW drive Storage and media devices have LEDs that indicate activity and device status Hot pluggable SAS disk drives also have an LED used to locate a particular drive Hot Pluggable Disk Drive LEDs The hot pluggable disk drives have two LEDs per drive Figure 1 10 e Drive Status LED e Drive Activity LED Figure 1 10 shows the hot pluggable disk drive LEDs Figure 1 10 Hot Pluggab
435. t are corrected in both instruction and data caches during corrected machine check CMC events to physical CPU core Diagnostic messages are reported for CMC events when thresholds are exceeded for single bit errors Fatal processor errors cause global and local MCA events Table 5 15 and Table 5 16 list the processor events that light and that may light the diagnostic panel LEDs Table 5 15 Processor Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs Diagnostic IPMI Event LEDs Processors Type E0h 39d 04d The processor failed and This event follows BOOT_DEConFIG_CPU was deconfigured other failed processors Processors Type EOh 5823d 26d Too many cache errors were Threshold PFM_ CACHE ERR_PROC detected by the processor exceeded for cache parity errors on the processor Processors Type E0h 5824d 26d Too many corrected errors Threshold PFM_CORR_ERROR_MEM detected by the platform exceeded for cache errors from the processor corrected by Zx2 CPU Memory and SBA 159 Table 5 15 Processor Events that Light Diagnostic Panel LEDs continued Diagnostic IPMI Event Cause Notes LEDs Processors Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on the FRU is Power Pod voltage VOLTAGE DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE inadequate is out of range too low Processor Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on the FRU is Voltage on the FRU Carrier VOLTAGE
436. t panel LED states Table 5 31 Normal Boot Process LED States Step Internal External Diagnostic System Power State Health Health Panel 1 Off Off Off No ac power to the system 2 Steady System is shut down but ac amber power and standby power are active 3 Off Steady System power rails are on when green power switch is toggled 4 Steady green Steady System power rails are on BMC green drives External Health LED 5 Steady green Steady System is booting firmware green has passed BOOT_START in firmware 6 Steady green Steady System has finished booting green firmware and an OS is either booting or running NOTE In the normal boot process even though the BMC is running while the system is shut down Power LED is steady amber it does not drive the External Health LED to steady green until 12VDC power from the bulk power supplies is applied The following steps describe the system boot process Step numbers provided correspond to the steps in Table 5 31 3 System power switch turns on bulk power supplies and fans and releases RESET on all CPUs simultaneously when toggled on 5 Initial CPU firmware code fetch is PAL code from EEPROM in PDH retrieved 4 bytes at a time by DMDC in Zx2 No shared memory or I O devices are available at this time they are not initially configured 5 Firmware code stack is initially in BBRAM in PDH retrieved 4 byes at a time through PDH and DMD
437. t panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green A fatal fault was detected and logged while booting or running system firmware system health is flashing red internal health is flashing amber external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Check the Diagnostic LED panel to identify the failed or faulty internal FRU See Troubleshooting Tools page 147 for information The problem is fixed when a redundant internal FRU is replaced the iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 4a Cannot see the iLO 2 MP prompt on the system console server power is off on Front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running system firmware or is booting or running the OS system health is off steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Nothing may be logged for this condition 1 Check the console cables and console configuration 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED If the LED is off the iLO 2 MP is not operational if the LED is flashing amber a ROM error exists 3 Reset the iLO 2 MP using the pinhole reset button on the core T O card 4 If the iLO 2 MP reset does not fix the problem
438. tached SCSI see SAS service tools 177 smart array P400 controller 109 306 smart array P600 controller 109 306 smart array P800 controller 109 306 355 specifications server 47 static IP address assigning with ARP ping 86 storage see mass storage system abstraction layer SAL 35 system backup 265 system battery location 231 recording configuration settings before removing 230 removing 230 replacing 231 reset system settings after replacing 231 system block diagram 155 system configuration menu 348 system fans see fans system health LEDs 37 T top cover see cover top TPM capabilities 233 removing 234 replacing 235 troubleshooting console problems 120 DVD problems 119 hard drive problems 119 methodology 117 operating system 119 Trusted Platform Module see TPM Trusted Platform Module TPM enabling 120 U UID button function 37 LED 37 unpacking inspecting for damage 55 user accounts default 90 V VGA accessing graphic console 93 viewing warnings 267 VPD viewing EFl and RISC firmware information 98 W wake on LAN 26 restrictions 26 Web interface interacting with 91 weight server 47 48 356 Index
439. tched position Figure 6 3 5 Lock the cover release lever by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees clockwise Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover Access to the memory carrier assembly is required for upgrades and repair of the server memory 182 Removing and Replacing Server Components 29 NOTE When the memory carrier assembly cover is open or removed the chassis fan units increase to high speed to assist cooling When the top cover is replaced at the end of the operation the chassis fans return to normal speed Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover To remove the memory carrier assembly cover follow these steps 1 If rack installed slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 ES NOTE You do not need to extend the server completely out of the rack to remove the memory carrier 2 Unlock the cover release lever by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise 3 Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover and memory carrier assembly cover from the chassis Figure 6 3 4 Slide the memory carrier assembly cover toward the left side of the server to free it from the center of the chassis and lift the cover off of the chassis Figure 6 4 Figure 6 4 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover Top Cover lt Cover Release Lever Latch Unlatch Memory Carrier Assembly Co
440. tecsensetgceeyriensaginnd tary ennvdieveatscdes sierdeanevs 59 Installing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive tiara aqii 61 Disk Drive St DS A E E a A NN 61 PCI PCI X Slot Identification and Card Divider LOcati0DNS occconocccnnoniconnnonacicnnonaricononanicanananoss 62 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly cuina tdi 66 Memory Carrier Assembly with Side Cover Removed ccccccccsscsssessesesscesecnseeseeeseeeseessnaeenes 67 8 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot DS a sapereenbeinneenteienins 69 24 DIMM Memory Carrier Board Slot LDS issicilcisecsssnedscavensconnncasndsietavielosnncdsdey okt scuryarniostaventertess 70 Inserting a DIMM into the Memory Board ComnectOT occcccccooncononononnonnnnnnconoranoranonnnrnnnnancnnnon anna 72 Removing the Processor Board Assembly ics il raise ataeaareaa alone eects 74 Processor Board Assembly Front Vie Wind a eaan 77 Processor Alignment Holes and Lock Unlock MechanisIM ccooccnoononocononccinnaninnnnnoranacanacinnaninnon 77 Rear Panel Power Receptacles and Power Supply LEDS unica 79 Rear Ranel LAN Poltica adn ir 80 Console Setup Flowchart nsere A A A 83 Server Rear Ports A PA 84 Web Login Pager iinis irean a ea db 91 Status Summary Pare 92 TX3600 POWETABUTEON sss ee ree een a e ad DR es 95 Accessed Screens in thedrvdfg Utility vest ia aia aiea eaea 99 Adapter Properties Screener AAA AA EA 100 Select New Array Type SAO A A A AA uk eel eda wide oem 102 EBS Welcome Screen es batas peda 113 EBSUJMa
441. ted to the support page of the HP website http www hp com support itaniumservers Installation instructions are provided with the drivers Installing the Event Notification Service The HP Smart Array SAS SATA Event Notification Service provides event notification to the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 64 bit system event log and the HP Integrated Management log The most recent version of the software component is available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support itaniumservers Installation instructions are provided with the component Installing Management Agents The Management Agents are available on the Smart Setup media The most recent versions of the agents are available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support itaniumservers Installation instructions are provided with the agents If the new agents do not function correctly you might also need to update Systems Insight Manager The latest version of Systems Insight Manager is available for download at the HP website http www hp com servers manage Linux Installation Procedure B 23 Linux Quick Installation Procedure To install the controller Power down the server Unplug the ac power cord from the power outlet Unplug the power cord from the server Install the controller hardware Installing the controller hardware on page 9 If necessary install additional physical drives The number of drives in the
442. ter both refer to the same key Emphasis Text that is emphasized Bold Text that is strongly emphasized ComputerOut Text displayed by the computer UserInput Commands and other text that you type Command A command name or qualified command phrase Variable The name of a variable that you can replace in a command or function or information in a display that represents several possible values The contents are optional in formats and command descriptions If the contents are a list separated by a pipe you must select one of the items The contents are required in formats and command descriptions If the contents are a list separated by a pipe you must select one of the items The preceding element can be repeated an arbitrary number of times Separates items in a list of choices Related Documents The HP Server Documentation CD has been provided with the server It contains a complete documentation set for the server including localized versions of key documents Other documents in this collection include HP Integrity rx3600 Installation Guide HP Integrity rx3600 Site Preparation Guide HP Integrity rx3600 Safety and Regulatory Information HP Integrity rx3600 amp rx6600 Console Quick Start HP Integrity iLO 2 MP Operations Guide Generalized Site Preparation Guide The latest versions of these documents and any updates to these documents are posted under the Enterprise Servers Workstations and Systems Hard
443. ternal cabling into the ports at the rear of the chassis Close and secure the cable management arm Slide the server completely out from the front of the rack Reconnect the internal SAS cables to the connectors on the SAS core I O card in PCI slot 1 CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server operating system may not reboot Reconnect the USB cable to the connector on the core I O board Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 IMPORTANT Serial number and model string data information is stored on both the interconnect board and the I O board When installing a new I O board copy this information from the interconnect board to the new I O board Respond YES to prompts regarding copying information onto the new board Verify the serial number and model string data information copied onto the new I O board a Boot to EFI b Enter service mode using the following command Shell gt sysmode service Current System Mode ADMIN You are now in SERVICE mode c Use the sysset command to verify that all values are set Shell gt sysset System Information Manufacturer hp Product
444. ters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 Operation If there are any existing IR volumes when this command is run you are notified with an output message no action is taken and CFGGEN returns SUCCESS If IR is currently enabled when this command is run CFGGEN returns SUCCESS Faulty controller or peripheral hardware such as cables disk drives and so on will not cause this utility to hang It exits with the appropriate return value If an operation fails a reasonable attempt is made to recover the operation This may include clearing the fault condition by whatever means necessary and retrying the operation HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller 305 DISABLEIR The DISABLEIR command turns off IR functionality on a SAS controller To accomplish the disabling set the MPI_IOUNITPAGE1_DISABLE_IR bit in the lO Unit 1 MPT Configuration page Syntax cfggen lt controller gt disableir Parameters This command does not require lt controller gt Sample Output Vendor Device Index ID ID Bus Device O 1000h 0054h 14h 08h LSI 1068 SAS Host Adapter LOCATE The LOCATE command turns locate LED s on and off Syntax cf ggen lt controller gt locate Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between 0 and 255 Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers The following information is provided to assist you in configuring the Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 controlle
445. th the assembly guides in the chassis 2 Slide the processor board assembly into the chassis until it begins to seat into the socket located on the midplane board 3 Push the processor board access door upward until it locks into position 4 Replace the memory carrier assembly See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 205 5 Replace the memory carrier assembly cover and latch the top cover release lever closed See Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 183 6 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing a Dual Core Processor The HP Integrity rx3600 uses dual core processors That is each processor contains two cores that function as separate processors Dual core processors double the processing power of the server while maintaining the physical dimensions of a single processor The server can contain one or two dual core processors that provide the following configuration options e 1P 2C One processor two cores e 2P 4C Two processors four cores 218 Removing and Replacing Server Components If the server has fewer than the maximum number of dual core processors installed install the additional processor in the appropriate slot A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power
446. the EFI TOOLS directories of all of the EFI system partitions present in the system for the specified EFI application Add a Boot Option Adds a boot option to the EFI Boot Manager Specify the boot option by providing the name of the EFI application Along with the name you can also provide either ASCII or UNICODE arguments the file uses Given the EFI application name and any options the EFI Boot Manager searches for the executable file in the same directories as described in the Boot from a File option When the file is found it is executed Delete Boot Options Deletes a specific boot option or all boot options Change Boot Order Controls the relative order in which the EFI Boot Manager attempts to execute boot options For help on the control key sequences you need for this option see the help menu Manage BootNext Setting Selects a boot option to use only once the next boot operation Set Automatic Boot Timeout Defines the value in seconds before the system automatically boots without user intervention Set this value to zero to disable the timeout feature Exit Returns control to the EFI Boot Manager menu This displays the active boot devices including a possible integrated shell if the implementation is so constructed For more information see Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu page 343 EFl Commands Table D 1 lists EFI commands for the server Table D 1 EFI Commands EFI Shell Command BCH Comm
447. the data on the primary disk drive is available by accessing the newly created volume Using the AUTO Command The AUTO command automatically creates an IM volume on the SAS controllers The volume is created with the maximum number of disks available for use in the specified volume type The main difference from the CREATE command is that with AUTO command user does not specify SCSI ID values for disks to use in the volume The c ggen utility automatically uses the first disks it finds that are usable in the IM volume Firmware and hardware limitations for the family of controllers limit the number of configurations that are possible Syntax cfggen lt controller gt auto lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the RAID volume in Mbytes or MAX for the maximum size available qsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation When AUTO creates an IM volume the first disk found is assigned as the primary disk drive If the controller is allowed to resync the disk drives the data on the primary disk drive is available by accessing the newly created volume Reply Yes if you want to complete the creation HOTSPARE The HOTSPARE command creates a hot spare disk drive The hot spare drive is added to hot spare pool 0 Syntax cfggen lt controller gt
448. the Server page 94 Reset the server date and time using the EFI date and time commands Removing and Replacing the System Battery 231 Removing and Replacing the I O Voltage Regulator Module The I O voltage regulator module I O VRM is a stand alone component located on the I O board assembly that regulates voltage for I O operations A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the 1 O VRM To remove the I O VRM follow these steps 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering Off the Server page 95 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 181 Remove the I O VRM cover Figure 6 27 a Locate the knurled thumb screw on top of the I O VRM cover and turn it counterclockwise until the cover disengages from the cha
449. the power supply is flush with the adjacent power supply or metal filler panel 3 Plug the power cord into the power supply receptacle ES NOTE The LED immediately turns on when power is applied 4 Replace the cable management arm Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply 187 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler Disk drive fillers are installed for all slots that do not contain a disk drive we IMPORTANT For cooling purposes always leave disk drive fillers in slots that do not contain a disk drive Removing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler To remove a hot swappable disk drive filler follow these steps 1 Squeeze the tabs on the front of the filler to release it from the slot in the drive bay 2 Pull gently until the filler slides out of the chassis Replacing a Hot Swappable Disk Drive Filler To replace a hot swappable disk drive filler follow these steps 1 Orient the disk drive filler so that the release tab is on the left side of the filler and the airflow holes are on the right side of the filler 2 Insert the filler into the slot guides and slide the filler into the slot until it clicks into place and is fully seated Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable Disk Drive There are eight hot pluggable disk drives located in the front of the server You can replace the hot pluggable disk drives using the procedures in this section when server power is on or off
450. the processor board Figure 6 22 a Unfasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver from the tool holder on the processor board b Insert the processor tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink c Rotate the processor tool counterclockwise 180 degrees A CAUTION The zero insertion force ZIF socket for the processor is locked and unlocked by half of a full turn of the processor install tool The counterclockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket d Refasten the processor install tool to the tool holder on the processor board 9 Remove the dual core processor from the processor slot a Carefully grasp the sheet metal that encases the processor b Pull the processor straight up and out of the chassis 220 Removing and Replacing Server Components 10 Protect the processor from damage a Install the protective pin cover on the processor connectors to shield the connector pins b Place the dual core processor in an anti static container Figure 6 21 shows the power connector and cable for the processor Figure 6 21 Processor Power Cable O O Processor Power Cable Power Connector on EA Processor Board Figure 6 22 shows the processor lock and unlock mechanism location and the alignme
451. the value for any of the following fields on the Adapter Properties screen e Auto Termination e SCSI Parity e SCSI Bus Scan Order e Spinup Delay Secs Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results CAUTION Do not change the value for any of the following fields on the Device Properties screen e Scan Id e Scan LUNs gt 0 e Disconnect e SCSI Timeout Queue Tags e Format e Verify Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results Display the SCSI parameters listed below for the channel of the SCSI interface and change the parameters if necessary or restore its SCSI parameters to their default values e SCSI ID e Maximum data transfer rate e Bus width e Whether the SCSI interface is bootable driver support e Avoid bus resets secondary cluster server e Restore Defaults Use the arrow keys to navigate to the appropriate SCSI parameter Use the plus and minus keys to scroll through the values until the value you want displays Press Esc to exit the Adapter Properties screen Move the cursor to the action cancel save or discard you want to take and press Enter Select one of the following options e Cancel the exit to stay on the Adapter Properties screen for the channel of the SCSI interface e Save the changes you made then exit the screen e Discard the changes you made then exit the screen If you select cancel you remain in the Adapter Properties screen fo
452. this family of cards limit the number of configurations that are possible Syntax cfggen lt controller gt create lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the IM volume in Mbytes or MAX for the maximum size available gsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation Once a disk has been added to an IM volume all of its storage capacity may or may not be used depending on drive capacity and volume capacity For example if you add a 36 GB disk drive to a volume that only uses 9 GB of capacity on each disk drive the remaining 27 GB of capacity on the disk drive is unusable 300 Core I O Card Utilities The disk identified by the first SCSI ID on the command line is assigned as the primary disk drive when creating an IM volume If the SAS controller is allowed to resync the disk drives the data on the primary disk drive is available by accessing the newly created volume Using the AUTO Command The AUTO command automatically creates an IM volume on the SAS controllers The volume is created with the maximum number of disks available for use in the specified volume type The main difference from the CREATE command is that with AUTO command user does not specify SCSI ID values for disks to use in the volume The CFGGEN utility automatically uses the fi
453. tility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Seg Bus Dev Func Description Version 1 51 4 0 HP Smart Array P600 1 92 1 20 1 0 HP Smart Array 5300 3 54 The identification information from this list is used to designate which controller is to be updated UPDATE NOTE The saupdate utility program file saupdate efi must be located in the same file system as the firmware files saupdate UPDATE lt seg bus dev func gt smartarray_ firmware file For example to update the controller at segment 1 bus 51 device 4 function O from the example output above enter a command at the EFI Shell prompt as in this following example fs0 gt saupdate UPDATE 1 51 4 0 CYBORG234 BIN Replace CYBORG234 BIN with the name of your firmware file The following screen displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Updating controller in Seg 1 Bus 51 Dev 4 Func 0 Current firmware version 1 92 Percentage completed 100 Activating firmware now this may take several minutes Resetting and reinitializing controller Retrieving firmware version this may take several minutes Current controller firmware version
454. ting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server e When removing or installing any server component follow the instructions provided in this guide e If installing a hot pluggable component complete the required software intervention prior to removing the component 262 Upgrades If installing an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items Do not wear clothing subject to static charge buildup such as wool or synthetic materials If installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit HP 9300 1155 Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrica
455. tion button initiates slot powerdown 11 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 Online Replacement OLR CAUTION For HP UX 11i version 1 and later you can only replace an existing card with a like card To remove and replace a PCI PCI X PCle card into a populated slot follow these steps 1 If rack installed slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 180 2 Remove the top cover from the chassis See Removing the Top Cover page 181 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card 199 ES 4 10 11 12 13 A Deactivate the PCI PCI X PCle card and slot a Press the red attention button located on the MRL of the appropriate slot and the power LED starts to blink b Wait until the power LED goes from blinking to steady off NOTE After pushing the attention button you have five seconds to cancel the operation by pushing the attention button again Pull the gate latch toward the front of the chassis to completely unlock the PCI PCI X PCle card Open the MRL a Press the indentation on the MRL to release it from the chassis wall b Lift the edge of the MRL and rotate it upward 90 degrees until it rests against the chassis wall and the PCI PCI X PCle card bulkhead is fully exposed Disconnect all external and internal cables attached to the PCI PCI X PCle card Grasp the PCI PCI X PCle
456. tions are provided with each component Installing device drivers and Management Agents The drivers for the controller are bundled into the supported Red Hat and Novell Linux distributions In a system that does not yet have Linux installed 1 Follow the standard controller installation procedure 2 Reboot the server 3 Follow the standard procedure for installing Linux As Linux is installed it recognizes the controller and automatically loads the correct driver 4 In a system that already has Linux installed 1 Power down the system 2 Follow the standard controller installation procedure 3 Power up the system As Linux boots it recognizes the controller 4 Enter one of the following commands as appropriate to ensure that the driver is loaded correctly Red Hat mkinitrd f boot efi efi redhat initrd uname r img uname r Novell SLES mkinitrd k boot vmlinux i boot initrd 5 For Novell enter the following command to confirm that the driver is active 1smod grep cciss If the driver is active the system responds by displaying cciss Installing Management Agents The most recent versions of the agents are available on the support page of the HP website http www hp com support itaniumservers For installation instructions refer to the downloadable file HP Insight Management Agents for Linux on Integrity Servers provided with the agents If the new agents do not function correctly you might als
457. tions e ea e a AEE us A AAA EE a T TE ENA Rood E AA ANE E 320 Table of Contents 11 SDA ai ie D OE iit E eg evteee E ete ad coe Steels ek ast ah es Saar G E ad oe cates 323 PATAINCLOLS A A 323 Opera 323 DOI a e e lo e e do e die Eh ek 323 SA RTT ur aed ER eieauea salah genta 323 PALAM NN 323 CPUCON A A Ae De ETS UP Mn hrc ene wa tern ean Dea Taa 324 SV TILA A Gisese ie a E E E E ge canaemeuR obama oat 324 PAPAIMCLCRS 06 4522 ad ta de ica a ea ae da o oe eee EEE 324 OPE SAA AAA A AAA T 324 CONC Pl a r o te tose oae ea AE TEEN 325 A eS aneeles swear aa eae E vhs veveret eal ative Seite inated teed Maret cake 325 Parameters eles tec rl et NEN nl eter a le a ol Melt eto CN ad 325 Notes a E tt ad he tate tats Tees dL ees at te tle dede es T 325 TOCOMEL SA a r aE EA E EE iS A AA AA ARA E 326 SVL GANS iiga E E viata A eect silty niece Oe see aia ato Laney aeais tiubhsuoataas 326 P rameterSa ois oes Sco eay eevee seed sas a dd iaa 326 Opera aia 326 Ge G0 8 pe ea PRP PT A et 327 SY Noa cnet casa eta aca soap waa Rest ea es eee a Tas an ae es ate 327 ParameterSsnm td in 327 OPA A AAA AA ae eaaS 327 CTEM shanti coveted E E 327 o E AT ey signa se eehodeadwentuasabese sins TS 328 PAaraIMmetersseices havedeascie sh di 328 RDO EA A puis dew saes shunts unas EER EAE Dan OTEA SAOS EEE Ea E A EEE ER cane vee 328 Ud a EEE E E A TO a E 328 A ii 328 Parametros A E e a Bilas a A e aus 328 lanaddress ii das 334 A attend A ve eed an web cat vet wend ceed
458. to boot HP UX Issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing Type any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process This stops the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt At the HPUX prompt enter the boot 1m vmunix command to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Control B to exit the system console and return to the MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP type X at the MP Main Menu Shutting Down HP UX Use the shutdown command to shut down HP UX running on a system For more information see the shutdown 1M manpage and the following procedure To shut down the HP UX operating system follow these steps 1 Log in to HP UX running on the system that you want to shut down Log in to the iLO 2 MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the iLO 2 MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP UX has shut down 128 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System 2 Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command line options The command line options you specify dictate the way in which HP UX shuts down and whether the system is rebooted e To shut down HP UX and halt power off the system issue the shutdown h command To reboot a halted system pow
459. to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Processor Board Assembly To remove the processor board assembly follow these steps 1 ES Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 57 NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open You must remove the memory carrier because it attaches directly to the processor board Remove the memory carrier assembly See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly page 65 Press the button located on top of the bezel directly in front of the memory carrier assembly to release the processor board access door Figure 3 12 CAUTION The processor board access door opens at a 30 degree angle Do not force the door to open to a greater angle Failure to observe this warning results in damage to server components Use the processor board assembly access door as a handle and gently slide the assembly out of the chassis approximately six inches Grasp the handholds on the assembly carrier tray with both hands and carefully slide the assembly out of the chassis Figure 3 12 Installing Additiona
460. to the server a Connect ac input power cable b Connect LAN core I O cable Set up the console Access the host console Power on the server Configure core I O cards 9 Boot the operating system 10 Verify the server configuration Unpacking and Inspecting the Server This section describes procedures you perform before installation Ensure that you have adequately prepared your environment for the new server and received all the components you ordered Verify that the server and its containers are in good condition after shipment This section addresses the following topics Verifying Site Preparation page 54 Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage page 55 Unpacking the Server page 55 Checking the Inventory page 55 Returning Damaged Equipment page 55 Unloading the Server with a Lifter page 55 Verifying Site Preparation 54 Verifying site preparation is an essential part of a successful server installation It includes the following tasks Gather LAN information Determine the IP addresses for the iLO 2 MP LAN and the system LAN Establish a method to connect to the server console For more information on console connection methods see Console Setup page 80 Verify electrical requirements Ensure that grounding specifications and power requirements have been met Validate server physical space r
461. ues Operation Sets NVM and stable store values to predefined default values Normally only a subset of values are available for default To reset the system execute the default clear command errdump Displays the contents of processor internal memory logged on the first machine check abort MCA for all processors present in the system EFI POSSE Commands 327 Syntax errdump mca cpe cme Parameters mca dumps cpe dumps cmc dumps init dumps la dumps clear Operation init la clear the Machine Check Abort error log the Corrected Platform Error log the Corrected Machine Check log the Initialization log the Logic Analyzer log erases all of the logs mca cpe cmc init la Enter errdump with no parameters to display usage Otherwise the specified error log displays Add n to the clear parameter to disable the confirmation prompt Access the errdumpcommand from the System Configuration menu info Displays most system information Syntax info b target Parameters target all cpu cache mem lo boot chiprev fw sys warning 328 Utilities valid targets are display everything display information display information display information display information display on on on on cpus cache memory io boot related information display information on chip revisions display firmware version information display system information display warning and stop boot informatio
462. uide for details on iLO 2 MP commands To access iLO 2 MP event logs follow these steps 154 Troubleshooting EL NOTE Your terminal console must be able to connect to the iLO 2 MP 1 Login to the console with proper username and password ES NOTE The default operator login and password are as follows login password oper 2 Enter cl to display the console history log The log displays console history from the oldest event to the newest event 3 Enter s1 to display the status logs The status logs consist of the following e SEL e FP e Current boot log e Previous boot log e Live events log e Clear SEL FPL logs For a complete explanation of configuring the iLO 2 MP and using the iLO 2 MP commands see the HP Integrity Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor Operations Guide Supported Configurations This section provides a system build up procedure System Block Diagram Figure 5 3 and Figure 5 4 display the major rx3600 server functional components and their interconnections Core I O is shown with a one SAS I O card configuration The Dual Gbit LAN may be installed in slot 10 depending on the core I O configuration Supported Configurations 155 Figure 5 3 rx3600 with PCI PCI X I O System Block Diagram PCI X 66 Bridge or 12 DIMM shes Memory Extender PCI X 133 Bridge or 12 DIMM ja Memory DMD Extender PDHILPC PCIX 266 Bridge PCI X 266 Bridge PCI X 66 Bridge
463. ull the board straight up and out of the chassis for removal 7 Grasp both edges of the board and apply even force to lift the board straight up and out of the chassis Replacing the Core I O Board To replace the core I O board follow these steps 1 Insert the replacement card into the dedicated core I O board slot A CAUTION Do not rock the board side to side during installation or you can damage the slot pins Push the board straight down into the slot for installation a Insert the tab at the base of the card bulkhead into the slot in the chassis b Align the card connectors with the slots on the I O board c Apply firm even pressure to both sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot 2 Replace the slotted T15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the chassis use a T15 driver to turn the screw clockwise until it tightens to the chassis Removing and Replacing the Core I O Board 237 gt Reconnect the USB cable to the card Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 182 If rack installed slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 Reconnect all external cables to the card Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing the Core O Board Battery Replace the battery with an identical or equivalent battery only Dispose of used batteries accor
464. upply LED Rear Panel UID Locator LED and Button Power Supply LED Power Supply Condition Off No ac power Blinking green ac power standby power on Solid green Full power on normal operation Blinking amber Power supply failure The UID locator LED and button is used to help locate a particular server within a rack of servers Figure 1 13 page 41 You can remotely activate this function using system utilities Table 1 10 lists the rear panel UID LED states Table 1 10 Rear Panel UID LED Off UID button is not activated Blue UID button is activated 1 There is an additional UID LED and button located on the front control panel of the server Both UID LEDs illuminate when you activate either of the front or rear UID buttons PCI PCI X PCle Card Slot The server has eight public hot pluggable PCI PCI X PCle slots and two private core I O slots Each slot has an attention LED that serves two purposes Figure 1 13 It indicates a potential problem with the slot that requires immediate attention Additionally the LED can function as 44 Overview a locator used to identify a particular PCI PCI X PCle slot Activate the locator functionality using software utilities CAUTION Private core I O slots one and two on the PCI PCI X IOBP and slots 1 4 on the PCI PCI X PCle IOBP are not hot pluggable Do not remove the cards in these slots without first powering off the server and unplugging the power cords
465. uration To access the View Array screen press Enter on the View Existing Array field from the Select New Array Type screen 290 Core I O Card Utilities You can perform the following actions on the View Array screen e To view the next array press N e To create a new array press C Array Identifier Type Scan Order Size MB Status Bay Device Identifier RAID Disk Hot Spr Drive Status Displays the number of this array Displays the identifier of this array Displays the RAID type Displays the scan order of the array Displays the size of the array Displays the status of the array Displays the bay in which devices are located Displays the device identifier Specifies the devices disks that make up an IM array If RAID Disk is Yes the device is part of an IM array if No the device is not part of an IM array This field is grayed out under the following conditions e The device does not meet the minimum requirements for use in an IM array e The device is not large enough to mirror existing data on the primary drive e This disk has been selected as the hot spare for the IM array Specifies whether a device is the hot spare for an IM array If hot spare is Yes the device is used as a hot spare for the IM array if No the device is not used as a hot spare for the IM array Only one hot spare per IM array is permitted A hot spare is not required in an IM A hot spare can be specified at array
466. urations Table 3 3 Supported Memory Carrier Assembly Configurations Memory Carrier Configuration Memory Boards Installed 8 DIMM memory carrier Two 4 DIMM memory boards 24 DIMM memory carrier Two 12 DIMM memory boards WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to moving DIMMs Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly To remove the memory carrier assembly follow these steps Installing Additional Components 65 1 Unlatch the cover release lever on the top cover and remove the memory carrier assembly cover See Removing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 57 ES NOTE You do not need to fully remove the top cover to service this component however the top cover release lever must be open 2 Press the button located in the center of the memory carrier assembly to release the extraction handles Figure 3 7 A CAUTION Manipulate the extraction handles with care Failure to observe this caution can result in d
467. use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as s3 enter s3 at the EFI Shell prompt Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFI loader If needed you can specify the loader s full path by entering efi SuSE elilo at the EFI Shell command prompt Booting and Shutting Down Linux 137 4 Allow the ELILO EFI loader to proceed with booting the SuSE Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Shutting Down Linux Use the shutdown command to shut down Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server The Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server shut down command has the following options h Powers off the server after shutdown Use the PC command at the iLO 2 MP command menu to manually power on or power off server hardware as needed S Reboots after shutdown 0 Cancels a shutdown in progress time Determines when to shut down Required You can specify time in any of the following ways e Absolute time in the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute two digits e Number of minutes to wait in the format m in whi
468. ver Core I O Card Configuration This section provides information on core I O cards that need to be configured during installation This section addresses the following topics Core I O Card Configuration 95 e Integrated RAID page 96 e HP 8 Internal Port SAS HBA SAS Controller page 96 e MPTUTIL Utility page 96 e DRVCFG Utility page 98 e CFGGEN Utility page 106 e Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers page 109 e SAUPDATE Utility page 110 e EBSU Utility page 113 e ORCA Utility page 116 e ACU Utility page 117 Integrated RAID Use Integrated RAID IR where either storage capacity redundancy or both of a RAID configuration are required Two components of IR are e Integrated Mirror IM e Global Hot Spare Integrated Mirror The advantage of an IM is there is always a mirrored copy of the data An IM provides data protection for the system boot volume to safeguard critical information such as the operating system on servers and high performance workstations An IM supports two simultaneous mirrored volumes making an array providing fault tolerant protection for critical data Typically one of these volumes is the boot volume If a disk in an IM fails the hot swap capability enables the volume to be easily restored by replacing the failed disk The firmware then automatically re mirrors to the replaced disk Global Hot Spare Each
469. ver Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover To replace the memory carrier assembly cover follow these steps Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover 183 1 Position the cover onto the opening above the memory carrier assembly Slide the cover toward the right side of the server until it is flush with the center chassis wall 3 Slide the top cover forward until it is flush with the front of the chassis push firmly 4 Push the cover release lever down into the latched position Figure 6 3 5 Lock the cover release lever by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees clockwise Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit There are three interchangeable hot swappable chassis fan units in the server Fan unit one is located behind the memory carrier assembly Fan units two and three are located in the center of the chassis between the disk drives and the I O board assembly You can replace the hot swappable fans using the procedures in this section when system power is on or off A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before removing or replacing a fan unit Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server A NOTE A hot swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from or installed into the server The dc power to the server does not have to be off to remove or replace a hot swappable chassis fan unit
470. ver Find this number on the identification label on the front of the chassis e Serial number of the server Find this number on the identification label 3 Familiarize yourself with the system configuration e Do you use the LAN RS 232 or Web interface to monitor the server e How many processors DIMMs and PCI cards are installed e What versions of processor memory and PCI cards are used and where are they installed e What accessories are installed 4 Determine the following e Which firmware versions are in use e When did the problem start e Have recent changes been made to the system e Which OS version is in use 176 Troubleshooting 6 Removing and Replacing Server Components This chapter describes safety information required service tools accessing the server and the removal and replacement of hardware components for the HP Integrity rx3600 server This chapter addresses the following topics e Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware page 120 e Safety Information page 178 e HP Integrity rx3600 Component Classification page 178 e Accessing a Rack Installed Server page 179 e Accessing a Pedestal Installed Server page 180 e Removing and Replacing the Top Cover page 181 e Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly Cover page 182 e Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Chassis Fan Unit page 184 e Installing a Hot Swappable Pow
471. ver completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 180 5 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On the Server page 94 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card PCI PCI X PCle cards are located on the I O board assembly Cards dedicated to core I O functions require the server be powered off for card replacement Core I O cards have designated slots on the I O board assembly The remaining PCI PCI X PCle cards are hot pluggable Software intervention is required prior to removing a PCI PCI X PCle card This section describes the following hot plug operations and PCI PCI X PCle card replacement procedures e PCI PCI X PCle Configurations page 62 Describes PCI PCI X PCle capabilities and relates card functions and capabilities to specific slots e Online Addition OLA page 198 Describes the installation of new PCI PCI X PCle expansion cards in previously empty slots without powering down the server 192 Removing and Replacing Server Components e Online Replacement OLR page 199 Describes the replacement of a PCI PCI X PCle card without powering down the server This action requires suspending the associated driver The existing driver for the old card must be compatible with the new card A CAUTION If you are performing OLR on HP UX 11i version 1 and later the card you install must be exactly the same as the card you replace
472. ving a PCI PCI X PClIe Card Divide ti dot 191 Replacing a PCI PCI X PCIle Card Divide ia iia 192 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable PCI PCI X PCle Card c ccscsscssssssssenseesnescesseesenseeeees 192 PENPCIEA PET Conte Ural ON Sind A A SAA aca 194 REYPEEXIOBR ti aida aa nica EE 194 PCTY PCIEX P Gle TOBE nn dia 196 Shared Slot rca ouns casts evade uehes a sanz cae cure lala dao peace cundo riadas AEA 197 Online Addition OLA recesia i ai A hb at 198 Online Replacement eres a veiw Silva a ao 199 Removing a PCI PCI X PCle Card Olmeca A 201 Installing aPC PCI X P Cle Card Offline ita aia 201 Removing and Replacing the DVDS sa 202 Removing thie DVD Drive eta id a dica dcha 202 Replacing the DVD Driven uretral dida ER 203 Removing and Replacing the Memory Carrier AsseMbly ooconocinoconocononnninnnnonnnonnanancconncnanccnnnarinacnno 203 Removing the Memory Carrier Assia 204 Replacing the Memory Carrier Assembly sesssesseesessseississresesssersresresserssisrerserssisneeseenseenreneense 205 Removing and Replacing System Memory citada wer a aa eas 206 Removing System Men da 206 Memory Installation Conventions a ata 208 Supported DIMM Sizes and Memory Configurati0WS cooonoooncnnncnooncnanonnoranonnnrannrancnnnrn nenas 208 NEMESIO e a A A A a AE E Ear SERAN 209 Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines a 211 Installins MEVA A AA A a 212 Removing and Replacing the Front Beze dd a 215 Removing the Front Bezares ida dada 215 Replacing
473. w hints SPACE shows release notes shows more selection items Select all everything will be flashed Deselect all clear all selections more devices 4 03 BMC 4 01 Management Processor E 3 28 Smart Array 6482 J Smart Array P600 Open for details Back Begin flash EBSU displays the firmware update screen for the selected device Smart Array P400 P600 and P800 Controllers 311 e The version number in the first column ROM Firmware Version is the one currently installed on your system e The version number in the second column ROM Version on Disk is the one available on your Smart Setup media Figure C 10 EBSU Maintain Firmware Update Screen Telnet 16 89 144 165 Select Smart Array P6BB cards to be flashed Select all everything will he flashed Deselect all clear all selections x 688 ACA AAL AAA 1 50 Cancel OK i 9 Compare the two version numbers and perform one of the following options e If the number in the first column is the same or higher than the number in the second column your installed firmware is current You do not need to update the firmware for this device You can exit EBSU and quit this procedure e If the number in the first column is less than the number in the second column your installed firmware is older than the version on your Smart Setup media You must update the firmware for this device Proceed to Step 9 and continue from there
474. wappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected This voltage is present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items Do not wear clothing subject to static charge buildup such as wool or synthetic materials e If installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit HP 9300 1155 e Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards HP Integrity rx3600 Component Classification The server components are classified into three major categories e Hot Swappable Components e Hot Pluggable Components e Cold Swappable Components A brief explanation of each category and the classifications for the server components follow Hot Swappable Components A component is defined as hot swappable if you can remove it from the chassis while the server remains operational Hot swappable components require no software intervention prior to removing the component A NOTE Hot swappable components are marked with red touch points The following are
475. ware collection under HP Integrity rx3600 at http www docs hp com Warranty Information The latest versions of the BCS Global Limited Warranty and Technical Support document is posted in the Enterprise Servers Workstations and Systems Hardware collection under each server to which it applies at http www docs hp com Related Information You can find other information on HP server hardware management Microsoft Windows and diagnostic support tools at the following Web sites 22 Web Site for HP Technical Documentation http docs hp com This is the main Web site for HP technical documentation This site offers comprehensive information about HP products available for free Server Hardware Information http docs hp com hpux hw This Web site is the systems hardware portion of the docs hp com site It provides HP nPartition server hardware management details including site preparation installation and more Diagnostics and Event Monitoring Hardware Support Tools http docs hp com hpux diag This site contains complete information about HP hardware support tools including online and offline diagnostics and event monitoring tools This site has manuals tutorials FAOs and other reference material Web Site for HP Technical Support http us support2 external hp com The HP IT resource center Web site provides comprehensive support information for IT professionals on a wide variety of topics including softwa
476. wer supplied to the server for it to remain operational You must promptly replace the failed BPS to restore 1 1 functionality A minimum of one BPS is required to power the server There is no 1 1 capability if only one BPS is present Power States A The server has three power states e standby power e full power e off To get to standby power state plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the chassis The front panel power button is not turned on Full power occurs when the power cord is plugged into the appropriate receptacle and either the power is activated through the iLO 2 MP PC command or the power button is activated In the off state the power cords are not plugged in Table 3 8 lists the server power states Table 3 8 Power States Power States Power Cable Power Activated through the iLO 2 MP Pc ac Voltage dc Voltage Plugged Into Command or Front Panel Power Button Applied Applied Receptacle Activated Standby power Yes No Yes No Full power Yes Yes Yes Yes Off No No No No NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server can automatically power on to the full power state Figure 3 15 shows the rear panel power receptacles and power supply LEDs Figure 3 15 Rear Panel Power Receptacles and Power Supply LEDs ac Input Power Supply Receptacle LED Connecting the Cables 79
477. x Operating System page 136 See Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating System page 137 e To shut down either Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server see Shutting Down Linux page 138 Adding Linux to the Boot Options List This section describes how to add a Linux entry to the system boot options list The processes for adding both Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Servers are included EL NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list To add a Linux item to the boot options list follow these steps Booting and Shutting Down Linux 135 1 Access the EFI Shell a Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter the CO command to access the system console b Confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu select Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager c Select the EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Linux For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux loader is EFI redhat elilo efi and it is on the device y
478. y accessible CRU failed System is on or in standby mode Usually this is a power supply or fan failure Check front back LEDs for failed component This LED is cleared when all failed externally accessible entities are repaired and report that they are healthy or when the system goes into ac standby power cycle Table 5 6 lists the iLO 2 MP strings in the Virtual Front Panel VFP for the three states of the External Health LED Table 5 6 VFP External Health Description LED State Description Off None Green External parts including fans and power supplies are healthy Flashing amber A redundant externally accessible CRU has failed Check the front back LEDs Internal Health LED The front panel Internal Health LED indicates the status of the internal system chassis components You must open the system to service these components This LED maintains its state when the system is in standby mode system power turned off but ac power still applied to the system The amber indicators on this LED correspond to internal health conditions that light other LEDs in the box indicating which component must be serviced to correct the fault For example the Diagnostic LED board has a fault indicator lit when this LED shows amber Failures that cause the Internal Health LED to light do not cause the External Health LED to light Table 5 7 lists the internal health LED states 148 Troubleshooting Table 5 7
479. y systems with Windows installed the MSUtil nvrboot efi utility is provided for managing Windows boot options from the EFI Shell For HP Integrity systems with OpenVMS installed the efi vms vms_bcfg efi and efi vms vms_ show utilities are provided for managing OpenVMS boot options Operating system utilities for managing the boot options list include the HP UX setboot command and the HP OpenVMS SYSSMANAGER BOOT_OPTIONS COM command The EFI Boot Configuration menu provides the Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s and Change Boot Order menu items use this method if you must add an EFI Shell entry to the boot options list Autoboot Setting The autoboot setting determines at startup whether a system automatically loads the first item in the boot options list or remains at the EFl Boot Manager menu When autoboot is enabled EFI loads the first item in the boot options list after a designated timeout period Configure the autoboot setting for an HP Integrity system using either the autoboot EFI Shell command or the Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu item from the EFI Boot Configuration menu To disable autoboot from the EFI Shell issue the autoboot off command To enable autoboot with the default timeout value issue the autoboot on command To enable autoboot with a timeout of 60 seconds issue the autoboot time 60 command To set autoboot from HP UX issue the setboot command To issue autoboot from HP UX issue the setboot b oncomma
480. ypical problems show up in the SEL or FWP If the IMPI event logs do not point to a root cause escalate to bring in expert assistance CPU Memory and SBA All of the CPU memory controller and System Bus Adapter SBA or I O rope controller functions reside on the processor board assembly FRU Memory DIMMs reside on memory board FRUs The Local Bus Adapter LBAs or PCI X bus controller chips reside on the common I O backplane CRU along with core and customer Host Bus Adapter HBA device controller I O cards This section discusses the roles of logical CPUs physical memory ranks and the rope interfaces in the SBA logic of the zx2 chip Troubleshooting the rx3600 CPU Each rx3600 server supports one or two Intel Itanium processor modules Each processor module contains two individual CPU cores This results in four physical CPUs when two processor modules are installed in rx3600 servers 158 Troubleshooting Each physical CPU core contains logic to support two physical threads This results in up to eight physical threads or the equivalent of 8 logical CPUs when two processor modules are installed and enabled in rx3600 servers The operating system kernel attaches one or more software processes to each available thread In multiple processor servers having more threads means all software processes are launched and executed faster Itanium Processor Load Order For a minimally loaded server one Itanium processor module must be installe
481. ys The version of the utility displays on the second line kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Pone Syntax saupdate lt operation gt lt parameters gt Commands You can use the following operations with saupdate bd LIST UPDATE s UPDATE all HELP or List Use LIST to display all detected Smart Array controllers along with the active firmware versions fs0 gt saupdate LIST kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Smart Array Offline Firmware Update Utility Version 1 04 12 00 C Copyright 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Seg Bus Dev Func Description Version 1 51 4 0 HP Smart Array 6400 1 92 1 20 1 0 HP Smart Array 5300 3 54 The identification information from this listis used to designate which controller is to be updated UPDATE A NOTE The saupdate utility program file saupdate efi must be located in the same file system as the firmware files saupdate UPDATE lt seg bus dev func gt smartarray_ firmware file For example to update the controller at segment 1 bus 51 device 4 function O from the example output above enter a command at the EFI Shell prompt as in this following

HP INTEGRITY RX3600 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents